JP2014166328A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

An accurate random value is obtained.
When numerical data is stored in a random value register, a corresponding random number latch flag is set to an on state, and storage of new numerical data is restricted. When the numerical data is read from the random value register, the corresponding random number latch flag is set to the off state, and storage of new numerical data is permitted. The security time setting KSES can be set to change the security time. A predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the big prize opening count switch. In the special variable winning ball apparatus, when the large winning opening door solenoid is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door puts the large winning opening in the closed state as the first state. On the other hand, when the solenoid for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big prize opening door puts the big prize opening into the open state as the second state.
[Selection] Figure 55

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game, such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins in a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are Some are paid out as prize balls (prize). In addition, a predetermined specific display result (big hit) is derived and displayed as a display result in the variable display of identification information such as special symbols started by the variable display unit based on the winning of the game ball at the start winning opening. There is a gaming machine that controls to a big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state. In the big hit game state, for example, a predetermined variable winning device is opened until a predetermined number of times (for example, “15”) is reached, and a round in which a game ball is easy to win is executed. Furthermore, when a predetermined open display result (small hit) is derived and displayed as the display result of the identification information, the variable winning device is opened so that the game ball can enter from a closed state where the game ball cannot enter. It may be.

  In such a gaming machine, in response to the start port switch that detects a winning ball entering the start winning port being turned on, a latch pulse from the CPU or a start port, for example, is added to the random number determination register that constitutes the random number generating means. There is a technique in which a predetermined signal such as an output from a switch is input and a count value latched in the random number determination register is acquired as a random value (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2000-61120 A

  In the technique described in Patent Document 1, after a count value is latched in the random number determination register by inputting a predetermined signal, a new count value is latched by, for example, noise before the count value is acquired. There is a problem that it is impossible to obtain an accurate random number value corresponding to a winning ball or the like that enters the start winning opening.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of obtaining an accurate random value.

  (1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the claims of the present application is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like), and a first state in which a gaming medium can be won A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7 or the like) that changes into a second state (for example, a closed state) in which a game medium cannot be won (for example, an open state), and a predetermined period (for example, steps S1 to S14). After the elapse of the security check process execution period, the game control with a built-in control CPU (for example, CPU 505) that executes game control in the gaming machine based on the storage content of the nonvolatile memory (for example, ROM 506). Microcomputer (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) and the game control microcomputer built in or externally attached A random number circuit (for example, a random number circuit 509) for generating numerical value data to be a random value, and the random number circuit updates numerical value data according to a predetermined procedure and outputs it (for example, a random number generation circuit). 553, random number sequence change circuit 555, and the like, and random number storage means (for example, random value register 559A (R1D) or random value register 559B (R2D) that takes and stores the numerical data output from the numerical value updating means as the random number value. Etc.), and the game control microcomputer uses the random number value generated by the random number circuit to make a predetermined decision by the control CPU (for example, the CPU 505 performs steps S228, S229, A portion for executing the processing of S232) and a predetermined signal (for example, the first start winning signal SS1 or the second When the numerical data output from the numerical value updating means based on the input of the random number latch signals LL1, LL2, etc. based on the dynamic prize signal SS2 is stored in the random number storage means, the first value is changed to a new value. While restricting the storage of numerical data, the numerical value stored in the random value storage means is changed to a second value when the random number value is read out by the control CPU at the read timing of the random value, and a new numerical value is obtained. Security check means (eg, random number latch flags RDFM0, RDFM1, etc.) permitting storage of data and security check means for executing a security check that checks whether or not the storage content of the nonvolatile memory has been changed during the predetermined period. The CPU 505 variably sets the predetermined period, etc., where the processing of steps S9 to S14 is executed. Possible start period setting means (for example, based on the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES, the CPU 505 executes the processing of step S1 to step S4 or the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES) Based on the portion where the CPU 505 executes the processing of step S5 to step S8) and the fact that the game medium has won the variable winning device, value giving means for giving a predetermined game value (for example, the CPU 505 in step S145). For example, a portion for executing the big hit release processing and the prize ball processing in step S98).

  According to such a configuration, an accurate random value can be acquired.

  (2) Alternatively, the gaming machine according to the present application may use a start area (for example, a first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A or a second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B) as a game medium ( For example, a plurality of types that can be identified based on the establishment of a start condition that permits the start of variable display (for example, it is determined No in step S221 or step S223) after a game ball or the like passes. Variable display means (for example, the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B and the image display device 5) for variably displaying identification information (for example, special symbols and decorative symbols) and displaying the display results, and game media A variable winning device (for example, a variable winning device 40) that performs an opening / closing operation that changes between an open state in which a player can enter and a closed state in which a game medium cannot enter, and the variable winning device. Specific detection means (for example, a specific area switch 24) that detects a game medium that has passed through a specific area (for example, the specific area 49) among a plurality of areas (for example, the specific area 49 and the normal area 50); When the display means displays an open display result (for example, a special chart display result of “small hit”), the variable winning device is caused to execute the opening / closing operation, and the opening / closing operation causes the opening state. When the game medium that has entered the variable winning device is detected by the specific detection means, and when a specific display result (for example, a special figure display result of “big hit”) is derived and displayed on the variable display means, the player A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that is controlled to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to 14 is executed, and a control CPU (for example, CPU 505) for executing game control in the gaming machine based on the storage contents of the nonvolatile memory (for example, ROM 506) is incorporated. A computer (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) and a random number circuit (for example, a random number circuit 509) that is incorporated in or externally attached to the game control microcomputer and generates numerical data to be a random number value. The circuit updates numerical value data according to a predetermined procedure and outputs it (for example, a random number generation circuit 553 or a random number sequence change circuit 555), and the numerical data output from the numerical value update means Random number storage means (for example, random value register 5) 59A (R1D), random number value register 559B (R2D), etc., and the game control microcomputer reads the random number value from the random value storage means when the game medium passes through the starting area. Using the reading means (for example, the part where the CPU 505 executes the process of step S506) and the random number value read by the random number reading means based on the establishment of the start condition, the variable display means Predetermining means (for example, the CPU 505 performs the processing of steps S228, S229, and S232) for determining whether or not the display result that is derived and displayed is the specific display result and whether or not the display result is the open display result. A random number latch signal based on a predetermined signal (for example, the first start prize signal SS1 or the second start prize signal SS2). L1 and LL2, etc.), the numerical data output from the numerical value updating means is set to the first value when stored in the random number storage means, and the storage of new numerical data is restricted. Predetermined data that is set to a second value and allows new numerical data to be stored when the numerical data stored in the random number storage means is read by the control CPU at the read timing of the random number Security check means (for example, the CPU 505 performs steps S9 to S14) that executes a security check (for example, the random number latch flags RDFM0, RDFM1, etc.) and whether or not the storage contents of the nonvolatile memory are changed in the predetermined initial setting. And a security check by the security check means. Security time setting means capable of variably setting the execution time (for example, the part where the CPU 505 executes the processing of step S1 to step S4 based on the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES, or the bit number of the security time setting KSES [ 4-3] may be included in which the CPU 505 executes steps S5 to S8.

  According to such a configuration, when the numerical data is stored in the random value storage means based on the input of the predetermined signal, the predetermined data is set to the first value and storage of new numerical data is restricted. When the numerical data is read from the random value storage means at the read timing of the random value, the predetermined data is changed to the second value and storage of new numerical data is permitted. Thereby, the numerical data stored in the random number storage means based on the input of the predetermined signal can be acquired as an accurate random value. In addition, the execution time of the security check process can be variably set. Thereby, it becomes difficult to specify the execution start timing of the game control, and it is possible to reliably prevent a sniper based on the analysis result of the control code and an illegal act by connecting a so-called “hanging board”. Further, by using the random number value read from the random value storage means, it is determined whether or not the display result derived and displayed on the variable display means is the specific display result, and whether or not the display result is the open display result. And done. Thereby, a display result can be determined using an accurate random number value.

  (3) In the gaming machine of the above (2), the numerical value updating means cyclically updates numerical data from a predetermined update initial value to a predetermined update final value within a predetermined range in which the numerical data can be updated ( For example, a part for generating a random number sequence RSN as shown in FIG. 23 or FIG. 24 by a random number generation circuit 553 or a random number sequence change circuit 555), the game control microcomputer is system-reset. Each of them may include random number initial value setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 505 executes the process of step S55, a start value setting circuit 554, etc.) capable of variably setting the predetermined update initial value.

  In such a configuration, the predetermined update initial value set for the numerical value updating means to cyclically update the numerical data can be variably set every time the game control microcomputer is reset. As a result, it becomes difficult to specify numerical data that becomes a random number value after the occurrence of a system reset, and it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as aiming.

  (4) In the gaming machine of the above (3), after the power supply to the gaming machine is started, counting means (for example, a free-run counter 554A) that counts initial value determination data separately from the operation of the control CPU The random number initial value setting means may determine the predetermined update initial value using the initial value determination data counted by the counting means (for example, in the process of step S55 by the CPU 505) Based on the start value setting circuit 554, the start value is set.

  In such a configuration, the predetermined update initial value is determined using the initial value determination data counted by the counting means separately from the operation of the control CPU. This makes it difficult to specify numerical data that is a random number value from the operation mode of the control CPU, and it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as aiming.

  (5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (4), the nonvolatile memory is built in the game control microcomputer, and the game control microcomputer is a device other than the control CPU. A read restriction circuit (for example, an internal resource access control circuit 501A) that restricts external reading of the nonvolatile memory may be included.

  In such a configuration, the game control microcomputer includes a read restriction circuit that restricts external reading of the nonvolatile memory other than by the control CPU. This makes it difficult to read out and analyze the control program stored in the non-volatile memory from the outside of the microcomputer for game control, and to aim at the so-called “hanging board” based on the analysis result of the control program. Unauthorized acts caused by connection can be surely prevented.

  (6) In any one of the above gaming machines (2) to (5), a random number clock generation circuit that generates a random number clock signal outside the gaming control microcomputer and supplies the random number clock signal to the random number circuit ( For example, a random number clock generation circuit 112) and a control clock generation circuit (for example, the control clock generation circuit 111, the clock circuit 502, etc.) for generating a control clock signal supplied to the control CPU, A random number circuit is built in the game control microcomputer, and the game control microcomputer generates an input state of a random number clock signal supplied from the random number clock generation circuit by the control clock generation circuit. Whether or not an abnormality occurred in the input state of the random number clock signal by comparing with the control clock signal Random clock abnormality determining means for determining (e.g., frequency monitoring circuit 551, and, like parts CPU505 is executing the processing in steps S62 to S66) may include.

  In such a configuration, the input state of the random number clock signal is compared by comparing the input state of the random number clock signal supplied from the random number clock generation circuit with the control clock signal generated by the control clock generation circuit. It is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game control from being executed in a state in which an abnormality has occurred in the operation of updating the numerical data serving as the random value.

  (7) In any one of the gaming machines according to (2) to (6), the gaming control microcomputer is configured to release the system reset of the gaming control microcomputer and execute the gaming control by the controlling CPU. A system reset time processing means (for example, a portion where the CPU 505 executes the process of step S56) that sets the predetermined data to the second value when started may be included.

  In such a configuration, when the system reset of the game control microcomputer is released and the execution of the game control is started, the system reset time processing means sets the predetermined data to the second value. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent the numerical data stored in the random number storage means from being erroneously acquired as a random value in a state where the power supply voltage is unstable when the power is turned on.

  (8) In the gaming machine of any one of (2) to (7), the predetermined power supply voltage generated based on the power supply to the gaming machine is monitored and detected based on the decrease of the predetermined power supply voltage. Power supply monitoring means (for example, a power supply monitoring circuit 303) that outputs a signal (for example, a power-off signal) is provided, and the game control microcomputer performs the game control after the detection signal is output from the power supply monitoring means. Detection detection means (for example, a portion where the CPU 505 executes the process of step S119) for repeatedly determining the input state of the detection signal until the microcomputer for operation is stopped, and the detection signal is input by the detection determination means When it is determined that the game control is not performed, the control CPU starts execution of the game control from the beginning of the game control processing program. The power failure recovery control means (for example, the part that returns from the game control timer interrupt process after the CPU 505 executes the process of step S124) and the detection signal is not input by the detection determination means. After the determination is made, the predetermined data is set to the second value before the power failure recovery control means causes the control CPU to start execution of game control from the beginning of the game control processing program. And a power failure recovery processing means (for example, a portion where the CPU 505 executes the processing of steps S121 and S123).

  In such a configuration, after the detection signal is output from the power supply monitoring unit, the input state of the detection signal is repeatedly determined by the detection determination unit until the game control microcomputer is stopped. Then, after the determination that the detection signal is not input, before the execution of the game control is started from the head of the game control processing program by the control CPU, the power failure recovery processing means performs predetermined data Is the second value. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the numerical data stored in the random number storage means from being erroneously acquired as a random value when the power supply voltage is unstable, for example, when the predetermined power supply voltage is lowered.

  Whether or not to control the specific gaming state based on the random number value read by the random number reading means when a game medium passes through the starting area before the determination by the prior determination means. Starting determination means (for example, a portion where the CPU 505 executes a winning random number determination process in steps S205 and S210) and a determination result of the prior determination means, A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern (for example, a portion where the CPU 505 executes the processing of steps S251 to S263) and a variable display pattern of the identification information when the game medium passes through the starting area Extraction means (for example, CPU) for extracting a variable display determination random value (for example, random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern type) 05 is a part for executing the processing of step S508) and the random number value read by the random number reading means for the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the game medium passes through the start area. Reservation storage means (for example, the first and second special figure reservation storage units 591A, 591B, etc.) for storing the random number for variable display determination extracted by the extraction means as a reservation storage up to a predetermined upper limit number; Based on the determination result by the start determination means, before the start condition of the variable display that is the determination target is satisfied, the specific effect (for example, the notice effect YD1 shown in FIG. 69, the notice effect YD2 shown in FIG. 70, FIG. 71). Specific effect execution means (for example, the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120) executes steps S705 to S70. And the variable display pattern determining means includes the number of reserved memories stored by the reserved storage means when the start condition is satisfied, and the variable display pattern determining means. The variable display pattern of the identification information is determined based on the random number for variable display determination extracted by the extraction unit and the determination value corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns, and the start determination unit includes the extraction Based on the variable display determination random value extracted by the means and the determination values corresponding to the plurality of types of variable display patterns, the variable display pattern of the identification information is a specific one of the plurality of types of variable display patterns. It is determined whether or not a variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern with super reach) is obtained (for example, the CPU 505 performs steps S527 and S532). The specific effect execution means performs the specific effect when it is determined by the start determination means that the specific game state is controlled or when it is determined that the specific variable display pattern is obtained. (E.g., a portion where the CPU of the production control microcomputer 120 executes steps S <b> 554 to S <b> 556, steps S <b> 561 to S <b> 563, or steps S <b> 705 to S <b> 709, etc. based on Yes in step S <b> 701). At least a part of the determined values corresponding to the specific variable display pattern is the same determined value (for example, as shown in FIG. 54) regardless of the number of reserved memories stored by the reserved storage means when the start condition is satisfied. The value within the range of “230” to “251” within the specific pattern common range as shown in FIG. The determined value corresponding to the non-specific variable display pattern that is different from the specific variable display pattern is determined depending on the number of reserved memories stored by the reserved storage means when the start condition is satisfied (for example, 54 is set, and the start determination unit determines whether or not the variable display determination random number value extracted by the extraction unit matches the same determination value. It may be determined whether or not the specific variable display pattern is obtained (for example, the CPU 505 determines whether or not the random value MR3 is within the specific pattern common range in steps S527 and S532). Etc.) Further, the non-specific variable display pattern is a variable display pattern in which a reach state is not established, and the display result is derived and displayed after variable display of the identification information is started in comparison with the specific variable display pattern. The variable display pattern (for example, variation pattern PA1-2) for shortening the variable display time until the variable display pattern determining means is stored in the holding storage means when the variable display start condition is satisfied When the number of reserved storage to be performed is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, when the total number of reserved storage in normal time is “3” or more or “6” or more, ”Or more), the number of determination values corresponding to the variable display pattern for shortening is set larger than in the case where the reserved storage number is less than the predetermined number. The variable display pattern may be determined using the determined value (for example, refer to any of the loss variation pattern type determination tables 133C and 133D selected by the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 in steps S259 and S260). The part for determining the variation pattern type in step S261).

  In such a configuration, at least a part of the determined values corresponding to the specific variable display pattern is set to the same determined value regardless of the number of reserved memories when the start condition is satisfied. By determining whether or not the random number for determining variable display matches, it is determined whether or not a specific variable display pattern is obtained. This makes it possible to reliably determine that the specific variable display pattern is to be obtained before the variable display of the identification information. In addition, since the determined value corresponding to the non-specific variable display pattern different from the specific variable display pattern is set according to the number of the stored storage when the start condition is satisfied, the determined storage means stores the determined value. The variable display time can be varied according to the number of reserved memories, and the situation where the variable display operating rate is reduced can be prevented as much as possible.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variable winning apparatus and an upper stage. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game ball induced | guided | derived to the upper left ball path. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game ball induced | guided | derived to the "right" upper sphere path | route. It is a figure which shows one structural example of a rotary body. It is a figure which shows a mode that a game ball is guide | induced to a specific area | region and a normal area | region. It is a figure which shows roughly the progress of the game in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit classification and the small hit classification in a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a power supply board. It is a timing diagram which shows typically the state of a reset signal and a power-off signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the microcomputer for game control. It is a figure which shows an example of the address map in the microcomputer for game control. It is a figure which illustrates the main part of a program management area and a built-in register area. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting content in a header and function setting. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting content in 1st random number initial setting, 2nd random number initial setting, and interruption initial setting. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting content in security time setting. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an internal information register. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random value used as the game random number. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a random number circuit. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a random number sequence change register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change operation | movement of the random number sequence update rule by a random number sequence change circuit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change operation | movement of the random number sequence update rule by a random number sequence change circuit. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a random value acquisition register. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a random number latch selection register. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a random value register. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a random number latch flag register. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a random number interrupt control register. It is a figure which shows the structural example in case a random number circuit is externally attached to the microcomputer for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an input port register. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a variation pattern classification. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a common figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a starting opening prize table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an accessory release control pattern. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a security check process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random number circuit setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random number circuit abnormality test | inspection process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a power-off process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random value acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the specific pattern common range etc. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit release pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during small hit release. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a continuous notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control command processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation when a notice effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation when a notice effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation when a notice effect is performed. It is a timing chart for demonstrating operation | movement in a random number circuit. 7 is a timing chart for explaining a read operation of a random value register, and the like. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the operation | movement etc. at the time of the fall of a power supply voltage.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot and shot by a ball hitting device including a shooting motor 62 shown in FIG.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. There is no limitation, and for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  Above the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a first hold indicator 85A and a second hold indicator 85B are provided. Each of the first hold indicator 85A and the second hold indicator 85B displays the variable display hold memory number (special figure hold memory number) in the special figure game so that it can be specified (special figure hold memory display). As an example, the first hold indicator 85A displays a variable display hold memory number (first special figure hold memory number) in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A so as to be specified. To do. The second hold indicator 85B displays the variable display hold memory number (second special figure hold memory number) in a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B so as to be specified. The variable display hold memory in the special game is started when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Occurs when winning a prize. That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. The start that is established when the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied because the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The variable display holding storage corresponding to the condition is performed. Each of the first hold indicator 85A and the second hold indicator 85B has a number (for example, 4) corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number, for example. As long as it is configured to include a plurality of LEDs.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). The normal symbol display 20 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. A plurality of types of normal symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. The normal symbol display 20 is not limited to the one that variably displays the numbers indicating “0” to “9” or the symbols indicating “−” as normal symbols. For example, “O” and “X” are displayed. Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately lighting the decorative lamps (or LEDs) to be displayed, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order. It may be a thing.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a common figure holding display 85C is provided. The general figure hold display 85C displays the variable display hold memory number (the general figure hold memory number) in the general game so that it can be specified (the general figure hold memory display). Here, the variable display hold storage in the usual game occurs when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area. That is, when the condition for executing the variable display of the usual game is established, but the condition for starting the usual game is not established, the pending game is stored. The universal hold indicator 85C may include, for example, a number (for example, 4) of LEDs corresponding to the upper limit (for example, “4”) of the universal reserved storage number.

  A variable prize device 40 is provided at a substantially central position of the game area on the game board 2. In the winning space of the variable winning device 40, the image display device 5 is disposed, for example, at the center rear (back) portion of the variable winning device 40. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display (LCD) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game respectively correspond to the variable display. For example, in a decorative symbol display unit serving as a variable display unit divided into a plurality of parts such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. Then, in the special symbol game, any one of the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started. In response to this, variable display of decorative symbols (for example, vertical or horizontal scroll display) is performed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Be started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game (completely stopped display), the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L in the image display device 5 are displayed. At 5C and 5R, the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped (completely stopped). The “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are movable within the display area of the image display device 5, and display the decorative symbols in a reduced or enlarged manner. You may be able to do that. When the special symbol or the decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed, the display result in the variable display of each symbol is definitely displayed, and thereafter, the display state is such that the player can recognize that the current variable display does not proceed. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is displayed completely stopped, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”. Ornamental symbols may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbols completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Stopping and displaying the display symbol to the extent that the player can recognize that the variation of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is not progressing like the complete stop display or the temporary stop display is also referred to as a derivation display.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters). Numbers “1” to “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, effect images showing eight characters related to a predetermined motif, effect images combining numbers, characters or symbols and characters, and the like. The effect image indicating the character may include, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or an image indicating any other figure. In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, a blank symbol (a symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of types of decorative symbols that are variably displayed is not limited to eight, but may be any number of decorative symbols.

  While the decorative symbols are changing, in the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, from the smallest to the largest symbol numbers, for example, from top to bottom. Alternatively, a scrolling display that flows from the right side to the left side is performed. Then, when the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display portion 5L), the symbol number is scrolled from the largest to the smallest, and the symbols are displayed. When the decorative design having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design having the largest design number may be displayed.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, the first special figure holding memory number as the number of effective approach balls that entered the normal winning ball device 6A and the number of effective approach balls as the number of effective approach balls that entered the normal variable winning ball device 6B. 2 A special symbol start memory display area for displaying the number of special figure hold memories may be provided. As a specific example, when 1 is added to the first special figure reservation storage number, one of the display parts that are normally not displayed (for example, the leftmost display part among the display parts that are not displayed) Is changed to red. In addition, when the second special figure reserved memory number is incremented by 1, one of the display parts that are normally non-displayed (for example, the leftmost display part of the non-displayed display parts) is displayed in yellow. Change. On the other hand, when 1 is subtracted from the first special figure reserved memory number, one of the display parts displayed in red (for example, the rightmost display part among the display parts displayed in red) is not displayed. Return to. When the second special figure reserved memory number is decremented by 1, one of the yellow display parts (for example, the rightmost display part of the yellow display parts) is returned to non-display. Alternatively, in the special symbol start memory display area, by displaying a number indicating the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number is displayed. May be recognized by a player or the like. Alternatively, in the special symbol start memory display area, for example, a display corresponding to the added value of each reserved memory number is performed without distinguishing between the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number. Also good.

  Thus, although the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special game started first is being executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. For this reason, when the start condition for starting the special figure game is not satisfied, variable display suspension corresponding to the special figure game occurs. For example, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied when the first start condition is satisfied, the first special figure The number of reserved memories is incremented by 1 (incremented), and the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, when the second start condition is satisfied, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second special figure The reserved memory number is incremented by 1 (incremented), and execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure holding memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. Is started, the second special figure reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented).

  The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also referred to as a total hold memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  In addition, in the display area of the image display device 5, special symbols variably displayed in the special symbol game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B are separated from the decorative symbols. May be provided with a special symbol variable display area for display as identifiable. As an example, in response to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the special symbols can be changed in the special symbol variable display area. Variation of the effect image indicating “「 ”,“ 「”, “×”, etc. corresponding to the display is started. Thereafter, in response to the fact that the special symbol variable display in the special symbol game is terminated and the confirmed special symbol is stopped, “◎” predetermined corresponding to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol variable display area. It is only necessary to stop and display effect images such as “O” and “X”. For example, if the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is a big hit symbol, “◎” is stopped and displayed in the special symbol variable display area, and if it is a small bonus symbol, “○” is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol. In some cases, “x” may be stopped and displayed.

  Below the variable winning device 40, there are provided an ordinary winning ball device 6A, an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7, general winning ports 42F, 42L, 42R, an out port 69, and the like. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is, for example, an electric tulip type having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an expanded open state that is a tilt position by a solenoid 55 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. An accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided to form a second start winning opening. As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball enters (passes) into the second start winning opening. It becomes a normal open state that is difficult to do. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the normal electric accessory solenoid 55 is in the on state, so that the game ball enters (passes) into the second start winning opening. Easy to open and open. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter (pass) into the second start winning opening even when in the normal open state, the game ball enters (passes through) in the expanded open state ( You may comprise so that possibility that it may pass) may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured so that the game ball does not enter (pass) the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening. .

  The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 has, for example, a large winning opening door 61 that is opened and closed by a large winning opening solenoid 54 shown in FIG. 9, and the large winning opening 60 is moved to the first state by the large winning opening door 61. To an open state and a closed state to be a second state. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the big prize opening door 61 closes the big prize opening 60 when the big prize opening door solenoid 54 is off. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the big prize opening door 61 opens the big prize opening 60 when the big prize opening door solenoid 54 is on.

  Each of the general winning ports 42F, 42L, 42R is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The out port 69 takes in a game ball that has not won any winning area at the bottom of the gaming area and discharges it to the outside of the gaming area.

  The game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, the first start opening switch 22A among the start opening switches 22A and 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the special symbol variable display is executed by the first special symbol display device 4A. The first start condition is established, and the first special figure holding memory number is incremented by one. Here, the first special figure holding memory number is the memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure that has been held without being started even though the first start condition is satisfied, and the predetermined upper limit memory number. It is possible to hold the special game so as to be executable until it reaches (for example, “4”). Therefore, when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit storage number, the establishment of the first start condition becomes invalid.

  The game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, the second start opening switch 22B among the start opening switches 22A and 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B is executed. The second start condition is established, and the second special figure holding memory number is incremented by one. Here, the second special figure holding memory number is the number of memory of the special figure game using the second special figure that has been held without starting yet although the second start condition is satisfied, and the predetermined upper limit memory number It is possible to hold the special game so as to be executable until it reaches (for example, “4”). Therefore, when the second special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit storage number, the establishment of the second start condition becomes invalid.

  A game ball that has entered the special winning opening 60 formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, a special winning count switch 28 shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the big prize opening count switch 28. In the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the special winning opening door solenoid 54 is in the off state, the special winning entry door 61 puts the special winning opening 60 in the closed state as the first state. On the other hand, when the special winning opening door solenoid 54 is in the ON state, the special winning opening door 61 brings the special winning opening 60 into the open state as the second state. Thus, the special variable winning ball device 7 constitutes a variable winning device that performs a specific operation that changes between a first state advantageous to the player and a second state disadvantageous to the player.

  The game balls that have entered the general winning opening 42F are detected by, for example, the first general winning ball switch 27F among the general winning ball switches 27F, 27L, and 27R shown in FIG. The game ball that has entered the general winning opening 42L is detected by, for example, the second general winning ball switch 27L among the general winning ball switches 27F, 27L, and 27R shown in FIG. The game ball that has entered the general winning opening 42R is detected by, for example, the third general winning ball switch 27R among the general winning ball switches 27F, 27L, and 27R shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by any of the general winning ball switches 27F, 27L, 27R.

  FIGS. 2A and 2B are enlarged views of a configuration example of the variable winning device 40. FIG. In the variable winning device 40, “left” and “right” blade members 32L and 32R are provided as movable members serving as a pair of opening and closing members so as to be slidable. The “left” blade member 32L is connected to a plunger or the like built in the coil of the open solenoid 53 shown in FIG. 9 via a predetermined link mechanism such as a linkage arm. The “right” blade member 32R may also be connected to a plunger or the like built in the coil of the open solenoid 53 shown in FIG. 9 via a predetermined link mechanism or the like. Alternatively, separate solenoids may be prepared for each of the “left” blade member 32L and the “right” blade member 32R.

  In this embodiment, when the open solenoid 53 is in the ON state, the “left” and “right” blade members 32L, 32R are connected to the “left” and “right” accessory entrances 31L, 31R. 1 is set to the open state. On the other hand, when the open solenoid 53 is in the OFF state, the “left” and “right” blade members 32L, 32R set the “left” and “right” accessory entrances 31L, 31R as the second state. Closed. The “left” and “right” blade members 32L and 32R are not limited to those configured to be slidable. For example, the “left” and “right” blade members 32L and 32R are configured to be rotatable. What is necessary is just to be able to change the accessory entrance 31L, 31R into the open state which is the first state and the open state which is the second state. In this way, the variable prize winning device 40 performs a starting operation or an accessory opening / closing operation (also simply referred to as an “opening / closing operation”) that changes between a first state advantageous to the player and a second state disadvantageous to the player. It is configured to be able to execute. In this way, the variable winning device 40 is opened by the “left” and “right” blade members 32L, 32R opening the “left” and “right” accessory entrances 31L, 31R. When the “left” and “right” blade members 32L and 32R close the “left” and “right” accessory entrances 31L and 31R, the variable winning device 40 is closed.

  Inside the variable winning device 40, for example, game balls such as “left” and “right” upper ball paths 34L and 34R, special ball paths 37, mountain stage 38, and the like can flow and roll. A plurality of ball paths are provided. Further, a “left” doll model 47L including a “left” foot model 51L is provided on the left side of the variable winning device 40, and a “right” foot model 51R is provided on the right side of the variable winning device 40. There is provided a “right” doll model 47R with A game ball that has entered the variable winning device 40 passes through one of the ball paths, and then enters one of a plurality of areas, such as the specific area 49 and the normal area 50, and then enters the variable winning apparatus 40. It is discharged outside. At this time, the game ball that has entered the specific area 49 is detected by the specific area switch 24. That is, the specific area switch 24 detects a game ball that has entered the specific area 49 among a plurality of areas provided in the variable winning device 40. In this embodiment, any one of the “left” and “right” accessory entrances 31L, 31R opened by the “left” and “right” blade members 32L, 32R in the start operation in the small hit game state. Accordingly, in response to the game ball entering the variable winning device 40 entering the specific area 49 and being detected by the specific area switch 24, the game is controlled to the big hit game state as the specific game state.

  In FIG. 2A, the “left” and “right” accessory entrances 31L and 31R are closed, and in FIG. 2B, the “left” and “right” accessory entrances 31L. , 31R is open. The “left” and “right” accessory entrances 31L and 31R are openings that allow the inside and the outside of the variable winning device 40 to communicate with each other, and are in an open state as shown in FIG. The game ball can be entered from the outside of the variable winning device 40 to the inside. A game ball that has entered the variable winning device 40 from one of the “left” and “right” accessory entrances 31L and 31R is guided onto the upper stage 33 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 2C is an enlarged view showing a configuration example of the upper stage 33. As shown in FIG. 2C, the upper stage 33 is formed with “left”, “middle”, and “right” distribution holes 46L, 46C, and 46R. In the upper stage 33, the central portion 33C is formed to rise one step higher than the left side portion 33L and the right side portion 33R. Therefore, the game balls guided to the upper stage 33 are distributed to the “left” distribution hole 46L and the “right” distribution hole 46R, rather than being distributed to the “middle” distribution hole 46C. There is a higher possibility of entering after being sorted. That is, the “middle” distribution hole 46C is configured to make it less likely for a game ball to enter than the “left” distribution hole 46L and the “right” distribution hole 46R.

  The game ball that has entered the “left” distribution hole 46L is detected by the “left” accessory count switch 23L shown in FIG. 2B among the accessory count switches 23L, 23C, and 23R shown in FIG. The The game ball that has entered the “medium” distribution hole 46L is detected by the “medium” accessory count switch 23C shown in FIG. 2B among the accessory count switches 23L, 23C, and 23R. The game ball that has entered the “right” distribution hole 46R is detected by the “right” accessory count switch 23R shown in FIG. 2B among the accessory count switches 23L, 23C, and 23R. In this way, the accessory count switches 23L, 23C, and 23R each detect a game ball that has entered the variable prize device 40. A predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of game balls by any of the accessory count switches 23L, 23C, 23R. The game balls that have entered the “left” distribution hole 46L and the game balls that have entered the “right” distribution hole 46R are guided to the “left” upper ball path 34L shown in FIG. . The game ball that has entered the “middle” distribution hole 46C is guided to the “right” upper ball path 34R shown in FIG.

  FIGS. 3A and 3B are diagrams showing the flow of the game ball guided to the “left” upper ball path 34L. As shown in FIGS. 2A and 3A and 3B, a “left” doll model 47L is provided as an example of a decorative model near the “left” upper sphere path 34L. Yes. A “left” foot model 51L is attached to the “left” doll model 47L as an example of a movable member serving as a sorting member. The “left” foot model 51L is connected to a plunger or the like built in the coil of the “left” model solenoid 52L among the model solenoids 52L and 52R shown in FIG. 9 via a predetermined link mechanism or the like. ing. The “left” model solenoid 52L is also connected to a “left” mouthpiece model or the like attached to the “left” doll model 47L, and is operated in conjunction with the “left” foot model 51L. It may be.

  When the “left” model solenoid 52L is in the ON state, the “left” foot model 51L does not contact the game ball flowing down the “left” upper ball path 34L, as shown in FIG. It is held above the path of the game ball. At this time, the game balls flowing down the “left” upper ball path 34L are guided to be distributed to the lower stage 35 without contacting the “left” foot model 51L. When the “left” model solenoid 52L is off, the “left” foot model 51L moves downward and flows down the “left” upper ball path 34L, as shown in FIG. 3B. Contact with the playing ball. At this time, the game ball that has flowed down the “left” upper ball path 34L contacts the “left” foot model 51L and is guided to be distributed to the “left” lower ball path 36L.

  4A and 4B are diagrams showing the flow of the game ball guided to the “right” upper ball path 34R. As shown in FIGS. 2A, 4A, and 4B, a “right” doll model 47R is provided near the “right” upper sphere path 34R as an example of a decorative model. Yes. A “right” foot model 51 </ b> R is attached to the “right” doll model 47 </ b> R as an example of a movable member serving as a sorting member. The “right” foot model 51R is connected to a plunger or the like built in the coil of the “right” model solenoid 52R among the model solenoids 52L and 52R shown in FIG. 9 via a predetermined link mechanism or the like. ing. The “right” model solenoid 52R is also connected to a “right” mouthpiece model attached to the “right” doll model 47R, and is operated in conjunction with the “right” foot model 51R. It may be.

  When the “right” model solenoid 52R is in the ON state, as shown in FIG. 4A, the “right” foot model 51R does not contact the game ball flowing down the “right” upper ball path 34R. It is held above the path of the game ball. At this time, the game balls flowing down the “right” upper ball path 34R are guided to be distributed to the special ball path 37 without contacting the “right” foot model 51R. A game ball passing through the special ball path 38 is guided to the mountain stage 38. When the “right” model solenoid 52R is off, the “right” foot model 51R moves downward and flows down the “right” upper ball path 34R, as shown in FIG. 4B. Contact with the playing ball. At this time, the game balls that have flowed down the “right” upper ball path 34R are guided so as to contact the “right” foot model 51R and be distributed to the “right” lower ball path 36R.

  As an example of a movable member serving as a distribution member, a rotating body 45 as shown in FIG. 5 is provided directly below the mountain stage 38 by being attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 56 shown in FIG. ing. The rotating body 45 may be constantly rotated (rotated) at a constant speed by the driving force of the motor 56 while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on. Alternatively, in the variable prize winning device 40, the “left” and “right” blade members 32L, 32R correspond to changing the “left” and “right” accessory entry 31L, 32R from the closed state to the open state. In this case, the rotation operation may be performed in a predetermined rotation manner by the driving force of the motor 56, and the rotation operation may be stopped when the predetermined period ends.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the rotating body 45 is formed with a plurality of entry holes that can each receive and hold a game ball. In the example shown in FIG. 5, seven lost holes 43 </ b> A to 43 </ b> G and one V hole 44 are formed in the rotating body 45. The lost holes 43A to 43G are formed in a square shape with the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 45 closed, and guide the game balls that have entered the lost holes 43A to 43G to the normal region 50. The V hole 44 is formed in a U-shape in which the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 45 is opened, and the game ball that has entered the V hole 44 can be guided to the specific area 49.

  FIG. 6A shows that a game ball released from the mountain stage 38 or a game ball that has passed through the lower stage 35 enters the V hole 44 of the rotating body 45 and is then released from the V hole 44 to the specific area 49. It shows how it is guided to enter. In addition, the game ball released from the mountain stage 38 is guided to directly enter the specific area 49 after passing through the upper surface of the rotating body 45 without entering the holes 43A to 43G or the V hole 44. There is. As a result, the game ball that has passed the mountain stage 38 is more likely to enter the specific area 49 than the game ball that has passed the lower stage 35. The game ball guided to the mountain stage 38 is a game ball that has passed through the “right” upper ball path 34R, whereas the game ball guided to the lower stage 35 is a “left” upper ball path 34L. Therefore, the game ball guided to the “right” upper ball path 34R is more specific than the game ball guided to the “left” upper ball path 34L. It becomes easy to enter 49. Therefore, the “right” upper ball path 34R is configured to be a path more advantageous to the player than the “left” upper ball path 34L. As shown in FIG. 6A, the game ball that has entered the specific area 49 is detected by the discharge port switch 25 when it is discharged from the variable winning device 40 after being detected by the specific area switch 24.

  FIG. 6B shows that a game ball that has entered one of the holes 43A to 43G of the rotating body 45 or a game ball that has passed through each of the “left” and “right” lower ball paths 36L and 36R A state of being guided to the region 50 is shown. As shown in FIG. 6B, the game ball that has entered the normal area 50 is not detected by the specific area switch 24, but is detected by the discharge port switch 25 when discharged from the variable winning device 40. .

  In addition to the above configuration, the game area formed on the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED is arranged around each structure (for example, a normal winning ball device 6A, a normal variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7, a variable winning device 40, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided an operation knob 30 serving as a hitting operation handle operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the resilience of the game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device. At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. Below the hitting ball supply tray, there is provided an extra ball receiving tray (lower plate) that holds (stores) game balls that cannot be stored in the hitting ball supply tray.

  For example, at a predetermined position in the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as a central position on the front side of the upper surface of the hitting ball supply tray, an operation button that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is installed. May be. This operation button can be pressed and can be a rotatable jog dial. The operation buttons are not limited to those that can be pressed and rotated, and may be those that can be touched and pressed, such as a touch panel. Further, instead of the operation button, a sensor that can detect a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. That is, the operation button only needs to be configured to detect a predetermined operation action by the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. The player's instruction operation on the operation button may be detected by a predetermined operation detection switch.

  Instead of these operation buttons or together with the operation buttons, for example, in a member that forms the lower plate, the player holds it at a predetermined position (for example, the central portion of the lower plate) on the upper surface of the lower plate body. A stick controller capable of tilting operation may be attached. The stick controller includes an operation rod that is held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation rod (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is placed when the player holds the operation rod). . The trigger button allows a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) in a state where the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). It suffices to be configured. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod. A tilt direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the body of the lower plate in the lower part of the stick controller. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation pole when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor. In addition, the attachment position of the stick controller in the lower plate is not limited to the central portion of the lower plate, and may be a position close to either the left or right.

  The attachment positions of the stick controller and the operation buttons need only be in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of a stick controller and an operation button as the position put to either the right or left in an upper plate and a lower plate, maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the attachment position of the stick controller and the operation button may not be in the vertical relationship but may be in the horizontal relationship, for example.

  Furthermore, a prepaid card unit (card unit) for executing processing for enabling ball lending using a prepaid card or the like may be installed at a predetermined position adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. The card unit may not only execute a lending process by taking a prepaid card, but may also execute a lending process by taking a membership card or cash.

  FIG. 7 schematically shows the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the first start opening switch 22A. Or the detection signal of the second start port switch 22B is turned on, and a start winning is generated. Here, the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B is that the normal symbol display result as a variable display result in the normal symbol game using the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 20 is “per normal symbol”. When this happens, the drive control of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 55 changes from a pass disadvantageous state in which a game ball is difficult to pass (enter) to a pass advantageous state in which it is easy to pass (enter). On the other hand, when the usual figure display result in the usual figure game becomes "fuzz figure loss", the second start winning opening is maintained in the passing disadvantageous state, and the next usual figure game can be executed.

  Based on the occurrence of the start prize, a lottery is performed to determine whether the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game, will be “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” Is called. Based on these lottery results, variable display of special symbols is executed. In addition, in response to the execution of variable display of special symbols (synchronization), variable display of decorative symbols may be performed in the display area of the image display device 5.

  In the special figure game, when the fixed special symbol that is the special figure display result is derived and displayed and the variable display is finished, the game state is specified when the special figure display result is determined as “big hit” as the specific display result It is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the gaming state. In the big hit gaming state, it is possible to execute a round that is a specific action of a predetermined action unit. When the special figure display result is “big hit”, a plurality of types of big hit types may be provided, for example, according to the execution form of the round. As an example, in this embodiment, big hit types of “first big hit” and “second big hit” as shown in FIG. 8A are prepared in advance. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, among the multiple types of special symbols displayed on the special symbol display device 4, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3” and “5” is the jackpot symbol, and the jackpot type is “first jackpot”. In some cases, the special symbol indicating the number “3” becomes the confirmed special symbol, while when the big hit type is “second big hit”, the special symbol indicating the number “5” becomes the confirmed special symbol. And Note that the special symbol that becomes the jackpot symbol can be arbitrarily set, and is not limited to the ones indicating the numbers “3” and “5”.

  When the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is determined to be “first big hit”, the big open / closed door 61 provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened and closed in the big hit gaming state. The winning opening 60 changes from a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter to an open state in which a game ball can enter. As an example, the special prize opening door 61 has been operated for a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) after the special prize opening 60 is changed from the closed state to the opened state by driving the special prize opening door solenoid 54. Alternatively, the large winning opening 60 is changed from the open state to the closed state in response to the occurrence of a predetermined number (for example, nine) of winning balls. The unit of operation until such a special winning opening 60 is changed from the closed state to the open state and then changed again to the closed state is defined as one round. In addition, the number of rounds at the big hit (also referred to as the maximum round value or the maximum number of times the big winning opening is opened) as the maximum number of times the round can be repeatedly executed (can be continued) in the big hit gaming state is, for example, “15”, The predetermined number may be a predetermined number. Thus, when the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “first big hit”, the “left” and “right” bonus entry 31L provided in the variable winning device 40, The round which makes the big winning opening 60 open by the big winning opening door 61 provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 without starting 31R is started.

  When the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is determined to be “second big hit”, the “left” and “right” bonus entrances provided in the variable winning device 40 in the big hit gaming state 31L and 31R change from a closed state in which game balls cannot enter to an open state in which game balls can enter. As an example, the “left” and “right” blade members 32L and 32R change the “left” and “right” accessory entrances 31L and 31R from the closed state to the open state by driving the open solenoid 53, respectively. The left and right accessory entrances 31L and 31R are changed from the open state to the closed state in response to the elapse of a predetermined time or the occurrence of a predetermined number of approaching balls. . It is only necessary that the unit of operation until the “left” and “right” accessory entrances 31L and 31R are changed from the closed state to the open state and then changed to the closed state is defined as one round. . Or, as one round, the “left” and “right” wing members 32L, 32R are provided on the variable winning device 40 so that the “left” and “right” bonus entry points 31L, 31R The accessory opening / closing operation for returning to the closed state after the open state where the game ball can enter from the closed state where the entry is impossible may be repeated a plurality of times.

  When the special figure display result is determined to be “small hit” as the open display result, the gaming state is controlled to the small hit gaming state after the special figure game ends. In the small hit gaming state, the variable winning device 40 performs an accessory opening / closing operation. When the special figure display result is “small winning”, for example, depending on the execution form of the opening / closing operation of the accessory and the execution content of the round in the big winning game state based on the occurrence of the V winning (round content at the time of V winning) Small hit types of types may be provided. As an example, in this embodiment, small hit types of “first small hit” and “second small hit” as shown in FIG. 8B are prepared in advance. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, among the multiple types of special symbols displayed on the special symbol display device 4, the special symbol indicating the numbers “1” and “2” is the small hit symbol, and the small hit type is “first small symbol”. The special symbol indicating the number “1” becomes the confirmed special symbol when “winning”, while the special symbol indicating the number “2” is confirmed when the small hit type is “second small hit”. It shall be a special symbol. In addition, the special symbol used as the small hit symbol can be arbitrarily set, and is not limited to the one indicating the numbers “1” and “2”.

  When the special figure display result is “small hit” and the small hit type is “first small hit”, the “left” and “right” bonuses are entered by opening and closing the bonus game in the small hit game state. The time for the mouths 31L and 31R to be in the open state (the accessory release time) is 3 seconds, and the number of times the mouths 31L and 31R are in the open state (the number of open times) is one. When the special figure display result is “small hit” and the small hit type is determined to be “second small hit”, in the small hit gaming state, the bonus release time is 1 second due to the bonus opening / closing action. The number of times is, for example, 3 times with an interval of 1 second. The timing at which the opening / closing operation of the accessory is started may be after the special figure display result is fixedly displayed (derived display) for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second).

  A game ball that has entered the variable prize-winning device 40 from one of the “left” and “right” accessory entrances 31L and 31R that is opened by the opening / closing operation of the accessory in the small hit game state is in the specific area 49. When the player enters the game and is detected by the specific area switch 24, the big hit gaming state is entered. Here, when a game ball that has entered the variable winning device 40 enters the “middle” distribution hole 46C in the upper stage 33 and is distributed to the “right” upper ball path 34R, the “left” ”And the“ right ”distribution holes 46L and 46R, and enters the specific area 49 with a higher probability than the case where it is distributed to the“ left ”upper sphere path 34L. Detected by. In other words, compared to the case where the game balls are distributed to the “left” upper ball path 34L, the case where the game balls are distributed to the “right” upper ball path 34R becomes the big hit game state after the small hit game state is reached. This is highly advantageous for the player.

  When the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is determined to be “second big hit”, the opening / closing operation of the accessory in the first round (first round) executed in the big hit gaming state is the special figure display result. Part or all may be the same operation as the accessory opening / closing operation executed in the small hit gaming state when is determined as “small hit”. As an example, when the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” and the big hit type is determined to be “second big hit”, the opening time for the opening and closing operation of the accessory in the first round is 3 seconds, For example, it may be 10 times at maximum with an interval of 1 second. In this case, the first accessory opening / closing operation in the first round is the same as the accessory opening / closing operation in the small hit gaming state corresponding to the “first small hit” small hit type. As another example, when the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” and the big hit type is determined to be “second big hit”, the opening time by the opening / closing operation of the accessory in the first round is 1 second. For example, the number of times may be 30 times at maximum with an interval of 1 second interposed therebetween. In this case, the accessory opening / closing operation up to the third time in the first round is the same operation as the accessory opening / closing operation in the small hit gaming state corresponding to the “second small hit” small hit type. In addition, in the big hit gaming state when the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is determined as “second big hit”, part or all of the opening / closing operation of the first round is executed in the small hit gaming state. On the other hand, in the second round and after, for example, a bonus game is performed in a small hit gaming state in which a round with the big prize opening 60 opened by the big prize opening door 61 is executed. An operation different from the opening / closing operation may be performed.

  A game ball that has entered the inside of the variable winning device 40 from one of the “left” and “right” bonus entry points 31L and 31R that has been opened by the action opening / closing operation in the small hit game state (the prize winning ball) ) Passes (enters) the specific area 49 and is detected by the specific area switch 24, a V prize is generated. When a V prize is generated, the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state. In this embodiment, when the small hit type when controlled to the small hit gaming state is “first small hit”, the contents of the round at the time of V winning in the big hit gaming state due to the occurrence of the V winning are as follows. Similarly to the case where the display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is determined to be “first big hit”, the round in which the big winning opening 60 is opened is executed up to 15 times. On the other hand, when the small hit type when controlled to the small hit gaming state is “second small hit”, the contents of the round at the time of V winning in the big hit gaming state due to the occurrence of the V winning are variable winning devices. The round by the opening / closing operation of the accessory at 40 is executed up to 15 times. The V-winning round content corresponding to the case where the bonus type is “second bonus” is the second round in the case where the special figure display result is determined to be “big bonus” and the bonus type is determined to be “second bonus”. What is necessary is just to be the same as the following.

  When the special figure display result is determined to be “losing”, the next special figure game can be executed after the special figure game ends. At this time, if the special figure holding storage number is “1” or more, the variable symbol special symbol display in the next special symbol game is started immediately after a predetermined fixed symbol display time has elapsed. On the other hand, when the special figure holding storage number is “0”, when the start condition is established due to the occurrence of the start winning, the special symbol variable display in the next special figure game is started. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, among a plurality of types of special symbols displayed on the special symbol display device 4, a special symbol indicating the number “0” is regarded as a lost symbol, and the special symbol display result is “lost”. It is assumed that the special symbol indicating the number “0” becomes the confirmed special symbol. Note that the special symbol that becomes the lost symbol can be arbitrarily set, and is not limited to the one indicating the number “0”.

  After the big hit game state is over, as one of the special game states, time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed in which the special symbol change time (special figure change time) in the special game is reduced compared to the normal state. It may be possible to control to a short state when it is displayed. Here, the normal state is a game state other than a special game state such as a big hit game state or a special game state such as a short-time state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed) Thus, the same control as in the state in which the initialization process is executed after power-on is performed. The time-saving state is terminated when one of the conditions is established first, that is, a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of the special figure game is executed and the special figure display result is “big hit”. That's fine.

  Alternatively, after the big hit gaming state is ended, as one of the special gaming states different from the short-time state, for example, the probability variation control ( It may be controlled to a probability variation state (high probability gaming state) in which probability variation control is performed. In this probability change state, in the special display of each special figure game or decorative design, the special figure display result is “big hit”, and the probability of being further controlled to the big hit gaming state is improved to be higher than in the normal state. Such a probability change state may be continued until the special figure display result becomes “big hit” regardless of the number of executions of the special figure game. On the other hand, after the certainty change state is reached, any one of the conditions in which a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) the special figure game is executed and the special figure display result is “big hit” is first. It may be made to end when it is established. In addition, even if the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times or the special figure display result is “big hit” in the probability change state, the probability change state ends at a predetermined rate when the special figure game is started. You may make it happen. Similar to the time-short state, the time reduction control in the probability changing state may be terminated when a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of the special game is executed. Alternatively, the time reduction control in the probability variation state may be continued until the special figure display result becomes “big hit” next, regardless of the number of executions of the special figure game.

  When the time shortening control is performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, the control for reducing the normal symbol variable display time (ordinary symbol variation time) in the ordinary symbol game by the ordinary symbol display device 20 is shorter than that in the normal state. Control to improve the probability that the normal symbol variable display result will be "per normal map" in the normal game, and the variable display result will be based on the fact that the variable display result is "per normal map" Second start-up, such as control for making the tilting time (opening time) of the movable blade piece (opening / closing blade) in the apparatus 6B longer than that in the normal state, and control for increasing the number of tilting (opening times) than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player may be performed by increasing the possibility of the game ball entering the winning opening and making it easier to satisfy the second start condition. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. As described above, the control that is advantageous for the player by making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening as well as the time shortening control in the probability changing state or the short time state is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B can be easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. In addition, the time until the special figure display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. Therefore, by performing the high opening control, it becomes easier to enter the big hit gaming state than in the normal state. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and during this period, the time reduction control is performed when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is either the certain change state or the short time state. It may be the same as the period.

  It is also said that the gaming state is in the high base during the high opening control period. On the other hand, when it is not the high opening control period, it is said that the gaming state is in the low base. The time-short state in this embodiment is a gaming state that is also referred to as a low probability and high base state, and the normal state is a gaming state that is also referred to as a low probability and low base state. Further, when the high opening control period during which the high opening control is performed in the probability changing state, the gaming state is also referred to as the high probability high base state, and when not in the high opening control period, it is also referred to as the high probability low base state. It is a gaming state to be played.

  Whether or not the state is controlled to the short-time state or the probable change state after the end of the big hit gaming state may be determined based on the background to the big hit gaming state, the type of big hit or the like. As an example, a game ball that has entered the variable prize-winning device 40 from one of the “left” and “right” accessory entrances 31L and 31R that is opened by the opening / closing operation of the accessory in the small hit game state. When the big hit gaming state is controlled based on the occurrence of the V winning that enters the specific area 49, it may be controlled to the short-time state after the big hit gaming state ends. On the other hand, in the case where the big hit gaming state is controlled based on the direct hit in which the special figure display result is “big hit”, the probability change state may be controlled after the big hit gaming state ends. . As another example, when the content of the round in the V-winning state in the jackpot game state corresponds to the jackpot type of “first jackpot”, the game is controlled to the short-time state after the jackpot game state ends. May be. On the other hand, if the V-winning round content in the big hit gaming state corresponds to the big hit type of “second big hit”, it is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit gaming state. May be. It should be noted that the game state may be changed to the normal state without being controlled to the special game state such as the short time state or the probability change state after the big hit game state.

  In this embodiment, after the big hit game state is finished, the game state is shortened until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of the special figure game is executed or until the special figure display result becomes the “big hit” again. It shall be controlled by the state. On the other hand, it is assumed that the gaming state is not controlled to be a probable change state after the end of the big hit gaming state.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, in response to the special symbol variable display being performed in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the decorative symbol variable display is performed. Done. Then, when the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becomes a big hit symbol, as a variable symbol display result, for example, the predetermined symbol variable display portion of “left”, “middle”, “right” The confirmed decorative symbols constituting the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed. In addition, when the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is a small hit symbol, the decorative symbol variable display result is determined by, for example, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol variable display sections. The fixed decorative symbols constituting the small hit combination are stopped and displayed. As an example, the confirmed decorative symbols of the jackpot combination are, for example, the same decorative symbols that are derived and displayed together in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. I just need it. On the other hand, for the small decorative combination, for example, in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R, the same decorative symbols are derived and displayed together. In the decorative symbol display portion 5C of “”, any decorative symbols different from the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R may be derived and displayed.

  During the variable display of the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols are in a reach display state on all or some of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" May be derived and displayed. Here, the reach display state refers to a decorative symbol that has not yet been derived and displayed when the decorative symbol derived and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms a part of the jackpot combination (“reach variation symbol”). ")" Is a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R, etc.) The remaining decorative symbol display part (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been derived and displayed when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) constituting the determined jackpot combination is derived and displayed. In the symbol display portion 5C, etc., the decorative symbols are changing, or the decorative symbols are big hits in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. This is a display state that changes in synchronization while constituting all or part of the combination. Further, in response to the reach display state, an effect image such as an animation image or a live-action image different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, the display mode of the background image is changed, There are times when the variation pattern of the decorative design is changed. Such an effect image display, background image display mode change, and decorative pattern change mode change are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). Some reach productions are set such that when they appear, a big hit is likely to occur (a high probability is a big win) compared to a normal reach production (normal reach). Such a special reach production is also called a super reach production (or simply “super reach”). As an example, for reach production that becomes super reach, after performing a reach production similar to normal reach until a predetermined time elapses, for example, a decorative pattern such as a background image display mode, a displayed character, a decorative pattern variation direction, etc. The change of the production mode (so-called “development”) by changing at least one of the fluctuation modes before the reach display state or at the time of the normal reach, and the reach production peculiar to the super reach It is sufficient if the introduction part in is started. In addition, in the reach production that becomes super reach, when the decorative design is derived and displayed in the reach display state, the introduction part in the reach production peculiar to super reach is started without performing the reach production similar to the normal reach. Things may be included.

  In addition, during the variable display of decorative symbols, unlike reach production, there is a possibility that the decorative symbols may be derived and displayed in the reach state, and that the variable display result may be a “hit”, There may be a case where a specific effect for informing the player is given in accordance with a variable display mode of the decorative design. In this embodiment, specific effects such as “slip” and “pseudo-run” are set to be executable. In addition, the specific effect in this embodiment should just change a special figure fluctuation time according to whether a corresponding effect operation is performed. For example, when a specific effect is executed, it is only necessary that the special figure change time becomes longer than when the specific effect is not executed.

  In the specific effect of “sliding”, after performing all symbol variations that change the ornament symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” ornament symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, two or more After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display portions (for example, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5R, etc.), a predetermined number (for example, of the decorative symbol display portions that are temporarily stopped and displayed) “1” or “2”), the decorative symbol display unit (for example, one or both of the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L and the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R) is changed again. The effect display which changes the decorative design to be stopped and displayed by performing the stop display later is performed. In addition, in the temporary stop display of the decorative design in the specific effect, while the decorative design is stopped and displayed, for example, by performing a fluctuation change display or immediately changing the decorative design only by a short stop, etc. What is necessary is just to alert | report that the decoration symbol stopped and displayed to the player is not decided. Alternatively, in the temporary stop display, the decorative design may be re-fluctuated after the decorative design is stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the decorative design that has been stopped is confirmed.

  In the “pseudo-ream” specific production, all symbol fluctuations are started in response to the first start condition or the second start condition for starting the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols being established once. , “Left”, “Medium”, “Right” decorative symbols are displayed on all 5 L, 5 C, 5 R sequentially or simultaneously, and then “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” "Revariable display operation (revariation) for changing the decorative symbols again in all of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, 5R" is performed for a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). As an example, in the specific effect of “pseudo train”, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R have a plurality of types of decorative symbols that are predetermined as pseudo-success chances. One of the combinations is displayed as a temporary stop. Then, it is only necessary to set so that the rate at which the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases as the number of re-variations increases. As a result, the player can recognize that one of the pseudo-continuous chances is temporarily stopped and displayed, so that the specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous” is performed, and the variable display result becomes “ The expectation of becoming a “big hit” is enhanced. In this embodiment, in the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the re-variation is performed once to three times, so that the decorative design can be changed based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once. The display can appear as if it has been started 2-4 times in a row.

  During the variable display of the decorative pattern in which the specific effect of “pseudo-continuation” is executed, an effect image showing a character prepared in advance at a predetermined position in the display area of the image display device 5 as the pseudo continuous variation progresses , Displaying a predetermined sound (special sound) from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting the game effect lamp 9 with a predetermined lighting pattern, for effects provided inside or outside the game area A predetermined effect operation such as operating a plurality of movable members included in the accessory may be executed. As an example, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed on all the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then the decorative symbols are displayed again on all the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, Pseudo continuous variation is performed by performing any one or a combination of a plurality of operations among the display of the displayed effect image, the output of the special sound, the lighting of the lamp, and the operation of the movable member. May be notified in a recognizable manner.

  In addition to “pseudo-continuous” and “slip”, specific effects using such decorative display variable display operations include, for example, “Development opportunity eyes”, “Development opportunity eyes end”, and “Slip after chance eyes stop” Various production operations may be executed. Here, in the specific effect of “Development Opportunity”, “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the display of the fixed decorative pattern resulting in the variable display result. In all of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach state. A predetermined reach production is started. As a result, when the decorative symbol constituting the development opportunity is temporarily stopped, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, and the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. , The player's expectation is enhanced. Further, in the specific effect of “end of development opportunity”, after the decorative symbol variable display is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, 5R An effect display is performed for deriving and displaying a decorative pattern of a predetermined combination as a development opportunity. In the specific effect of “slip after the chance stop”, as with the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, until the fixed decorative pattern that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed, Temporarily stop display of decorative combinations (special combinations) that are one of a plurality of types of pseudo consecutive chances in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, unlike the specific effect of the “pseudo-ream”, an effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped is performed by changing the decorative symbol again in a part of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is called.

  Furthermore, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect or the specific effect, for example, by displaying the decorative pattern in a display mode other than the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, such as displaying a predetermined character image or message image. A notice effect may be executed to notify the player that the variable display state may become a reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit”. For example, the notice effect such as “character display”, “step-up image”, and “background change” may be set to be executable. Note that the notice effect may be any one that does not change in the special figure fluctuation time depending on whether or not the corresponding effect operation is executed. In the notice effect of “character display”, two or more decorative symbols are displayed after the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. The character image prepared in advance in a predetermined position in the display area of the image display device 5 is displayed before the decorative symbols are derived and displayed on the display portion (for example, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R). An effect display is performed. In the notice effect of “step-up image”, two or more decorative symbols are displayed after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Before the decorative part is derived and displayed on the display unit, there may be an effect display in which a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance are switched and displayed in a predetermined order in the display area of the image display device 5. In the notice effect of “step-up image”, after any one of a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image that is displayed first in a predetermined order) is displayed, the effect image The effect display in the notice effect may be terminated without being switched. In the “background change” notice effect, an effect display that changes the display of the background image in the display area of the image display device 5 to one of a plurality of types is performed.

  In addition, there is a possibility that the variable display result may be a “hit” over the variable display of decorative symbols executed multiple times in response to multiple special drawing games, etc. A notice effect for informing the player that the variable display by the accompanying fluctuation pattern) may be executed may be continuously executed. Such a notice effect continuously executed over a plurality of variable displays is also referred to as a continuous notice effect. On the other hand, the notice effect performed in response to a single variable display is also referred to as a single notice effect. The last variable display among the multiple variable displays for which the continuous notice effect is executed is a variable display for which the possibility of the variable display result being a “big hit” is notified by the continuous notice effect. It is also referred to as a variable display that is subject to notice by a notice effect. When the continuous notice effect is executed, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” based on the reserved memory information of the special figure game is notified before the variable display to be notified is started. The notice effect is started.

  After the continuous notice effect is started, for example, every time variable display of decorative symbols is executed, a plurality of effect modes are provided by effect display that selectively displays a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance in a predetermined order. An effect operation that changes (steps up) in stages may be performed. At this time, as the number of times of change (number of steps) increases, the possibility (reliability) of the variable display result to be a “big hit” may be increased. Further, the object to be notified may change depending on the number of times of change (number of steps). For example, “reach determination” may be performed when going to the second step, “super reach confirmation” when going to the third step, and “big hit confirmation” going to the fourth step. As the change of the notice mode (step-up), different character images may be displayed in order, or the step-up may be performed by changing the shape or color of one character. May be. That is, it is only necessary to be able to recognize that the state of the notice means (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) as viewed from the player changes stepwise.

  If a special symbol that will be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state will not reach the reach state after the variable symbol variable display starts. There are cases where a fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination or a fixed decorative symbol that is one of a plurality of types of development chances is stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach-losing combination (also simply referred to as “reach combination”) may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  In the probability variation state, for example, an effect image for notifying that the probability variation state is “being probability variation” is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, or a background image or a decorative pattern display mode in the display region of the image display device 5 is displayed. May be different from the display mode in the normal effect mode, for example, so that the player can recognize that the player is in the probability change state. Alternatively, in the probability variation state, for example, the player may be unable to recognize or difficult to recognize that the probability variation state is caused by the same effect mode as in the normal state or the short time state (so-called latent probability variation). . It can be said that during the period in which such a latent probability change is performed, the gaming state is in the latent probability change.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes, for example, a power supply board 10, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a payout control board 15, and a launch control board 17 as shown in FIG. A control board is mounted. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 18 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. Note that the audio control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 may be configured as independent boards that are separate from the effect control board 12, or may be integrated into the effect control board 12 and configured as one board. In addition, various control boards such as an information terminal board and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The interface board is a control board interposed between the payout control board 15 and the card unit when the card unit is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The power supply board 10 is installed independently of each control board such as the main board 11, the effect control board 12, and the payout control board 15, and generates a voltage used by each control board and mechanism component in the pachinko gaming machine 1. . For example, in the power supply board 10, as shown in FIG. 10, AC24V, VLP (DC + 24V), VSL (DC + 30V), VDD (DC + 12V), VCC (DC + 5V) and VBB (DC + 5V) are generated. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 10, the power supply substrate 10 includes a transformer circuit 301, a DC voltage generation circuit 302, a power supply monitoring circuit 303, and a clear switch 304. Further, the power supply substrate 10 may be provided with a capacitor serving as a backup power supply. For example, this capacitor may be charged from a power supply line of VBB (DC + 5V). In addition, the power supply board 10 may be provided with a power switch for executing or cutting off the power supply to each control board and the mechanical components in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, the power switch may be provided outside the power supply board 10 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, the transformer circuit 301 may be configured to include a transformer to which commercial power is applied to the input side (primary side), a varistor as an overvoltage protection circuit provided on the input side of the transformer, and the like. Here, the transformer included in the transformer circuit 301 may be any one that electrically insulates the commercial power supply from the power supply substrate 10. The transformer circuit 301 generates AC 24V as its output voltage. The DC voltage generation circuit 302 includes, for example, a rectifying / smoothing circuit that generates VSL by rectifying and boosting AC 24V with a rectifying element. VSL is used as a power supply voltage for driving the solenoid. Further, the DC voltage generation circuit 302 includes a rectifier circuit that generates VLP by rectifying AC24V with a rectifier, for example. The VLP is used as a power supply voltage for lighting a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9. In addition, the DC voltage generation circuit 302 includes a DC-DC converter that generates VDD and VCC based on, for example, VSL. This DC-DC converter includes, for example, one or more switching regulators and a relatively large capacity capacitor connected to the input side of the switching regulator, and power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the outside is stopped. Sometimes, it may be configured so that the direct current voltage such as VSL, VDD, VBB, etc. decreases relatively slowly. VDD includes, for example, the gate switch 21, the first and second start port switches 22A and 22B, the accessory count switches 23L, 23C, and 23R, the specific area switch 24, the discharge port switch 25, the general winning port switch 27F illustrated in FIG. It is supplied to various switches for detecting game media, such as 27L, 27R, and a prize winning count switch 28, and used to operate these switches.

  As shown in FIG. 10, AC24V output from the transformer circuit 301 is transmitted to the payout control board 15 via a predetermined connector or a power supply line, for example. The VLP is transmitted to the lamp control board 14 via, for example, a predetermined connector or a power supply line. VSL, VDD, and VCC are transmitted to the main board 11, the lamp control board 14, and the payout control board 15 through, for example, predetermined connectors and power supply lines. The VBB is transmitted to the main board 11 and the payout control board 15 through, for example, a predetermined connector and a power supply line. Note that each voltage may be supplied to the effect control board 12 and the sound control board 13 via the lamp control board 14. Alternatively, each voltage may be directly supplied to the effect control board 12 and the sound control board 13 from the power supply board 10 without going through the lamp control board 14.

  The power monitoring circuit 303 is configured by using, for example, a power failure monitoring reset module IC, and is a circuit that realizes a power monitoring unit that outputs a power interruption signal. For example, when a predetermined power supply voltage (VSL as an example) used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value (+22 V as an example), the power supply monitoring circuit 303 outputs a power-off signal in an off state (high level). On the other hand, when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or lower than the predetermined value continues for a predetermined time (for example, 56 ms), an on-state (low level) power-off signal is output. Alternatively, the power supply monitoring circuit 303 may output an on-state power-off signal immediately when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes a predetermined value or less. For example, the power-off signal may be a negative logic electric signal that is turned on when it is low and turned off when it is high. The power-off signal output from the power supply monitoring circuit 303 is amplified by, for example, an output driver circuit mounted on the power supply board 10 and then transmitted to the main board 11 or the payout control board 15 via a predetermined connector or signal line. Is done. The power-off signal may be transmitted to the main board 11 via the payout control board 15.

  The predetermined power supply voltage to be monitored for outputting the power-off signal is preferably a voltage higher than a specified value (for example, +12 V) in the power supply voltage VDD for operating the switch, such as the power supply voltage VSL. As a result, the power supply voltage VDD for operating the switch decreases, and various switches (for example, the gate switch 21, the first and second start port switches 22A, 22B, the accessory count switches 23L, 23C, 23R, the specific area switch 24, the exhaust switch, Various switches by outputting a power-off signal (turning on) before the operation state of the exit switch 25, the general winning opening switches 27F, 27L, 27R, the large winning opening count switch 28, etc.) becomes unstable. It is possible to prevent the progress of game control based on the erroneous detection by. That is, when the power supply voltage VDD for operating the switch is lowered, the switch output of the negative logic (turned on at a low level) is turned on, but the power supply voltage VSL that drops earlier than the power supply voltage VDD is monitored to supply power By recognizing the stop, it becomes possible to enter a state of waiting for power supply recovery and not detecting the switch output before the switch output is turned on.

  A large capacity capacitor may be connected to the power supply line for transmitting the power supply voltage VSL and the like to the main board 11, the lamp control board 14 and the payout control board 15. On the other hand, such a capacitor may not be connected to the input line that transmits to the power supply monitoring circuit 303 in order to monitor the power supply voltage VSL. In this case, the power supply voltage VSL in the input line to the power supply monitoring circuit 303 to be monitored drops earlier than the power supply voltage VSL in the power supply line to which the capacitor is connected. That is, even after the monitored power supply voltage VSL starts to decrease, the supply state of the power supply voltage VSL in the power supply line supplied to the solenoid, the motor, or the like is maintained for a predetermined period. Therefore, even when the power supply voltage VSL to be monitored starts to decrease, the solenoid, the motor, and the like can be driven for a predetermined period. Further, it is possible to recognize the stop of the power supply before the power supply voltage VSL in the power supply line starts to decrease.

  In place of the solenoid drive power supply voltage VSL, for example, a power cut-off signal is generated by monitoring an arbitrary power supply voltage higher than a specified value in the switch operation power supply voltage VDD, for example, the power supply voltage VLP for lighting the light emitter. You may make it output. In addition, the condition for detecting the stop of the supply of power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the outside is not limited to the fact that the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has become a predetermined value or less. Any condition can be used as long as it is possible to detect that the power has been cut off. For example, the AC wave such as AC 24V may be monitored to detect that the AC wave has stopped, or the signal obtained by digitizing the AC wave may be monitored and the AC signal may be generated when the digital signal becomes flat. It may be a detection condition for the interruption.

  For example, the power supply monitoring circuit 303 may output a reset signal when a predetermined power supply voltage (VCC as an example) becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value (+4.5 V as an example). The reset signal may be an electric signal that is turned on when the reset signal becomes low level, for example. The reset signal output from the power supply monitoring circuit 303 is amplified by, for example, an output driver circuit mounted on the power supply board 10 and then, via a predetermined connector or signal line, the main board 11, the lamp control board 14, and the payout control board. 15 is transmitted. A reset signal may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 via the lamp control board 14. Alternatively, the reset signal may be transmitted directly to the effect control board 12 without going through the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, the circuit that outputs the reset signal may be configured by using a watchdog timer built-in IC provided separately from the power supply monitoring circuit 303, a system reset IC, or the like.

  When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the power monitoring circuit 303 outputs a reset signal (sets to a low level) when a predetermined period elapses after the power-off circuit 303 outputs a power-off signal (sets to a low level). ) In the predetermined period, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 and the payout control microcomputer 150 mounted on the payout control board 15 shown in FIG. It is sufficient if the time is sufficient for execution. That is, the power monitoring circuit 303 outputs a power-off signal as a power feeding signal, and after the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 150 complete execution of predetermined power-off processing, the operation stop signal The reset signal is output (set to low level). The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 150 that have received the reset signal output from the power supply monitoring circuit 303 are in an operation stop state, and execution of various control processes is stopped. In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, when a predetermined power supply voltage (VCC as an example) exceeds a predetermined value (+4.5 V as an example), the power monitoring circuit 303 stops outputting the reset signal (Set to high level).

  FIG. 11 is a timing diagram schematically showing the states of AC 24 V, VSL, VCC, reset signal, and power-off signal when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started and when power supply is stopped. is there. As shown in FIG. 6, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, VSL and VCC gradually reach specified values (DC + 30V and DC + 5V). At this time, when VCC exceeds the first predetermined value, the power supply monitoring circuit 303 stops outputting the reset signal (sets it to a high level) and turns it off. When VSL exceeds the second predetermined value, the power supply monitoring circuit 303 stops outputting the power-off signal (sets it to a high level) and turns it off. On the other hand, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, VSL and VCC gradually decrease. At this time, when VSL falls to the second predetermined value, the power supply monitoring circuit 303 outputs the power-off signal as an ON state (sets it to a low level). When VCC decreases to the first predetermined value, the power supply monitoring circuit 303 outputs a reset signal as an ON state (sets to a low level).

  A clear switch 304 included in the power supply substrate 10 illustrated in FIG. 10 has, for example, a push button structure, and outputs a clear signal in response to an operation such as pressing. The clear signal may be an electrical signal that is turned on when it becomes low level in response to an operation such as pressing. Alternatively, the clear signal may be an electrical signal that is turned on when it becomes high level in response to an operation such as pressing. The clear signal output from the clear switch 304 is transmitted to the main board 11 via a predetermined connector or signal line, for example, and is transmitted from the main board 11 to the payout control board 15. When the clear switch 304 is not operated, the output of the clear signal is stopped (set to high level or low level). Note that the clear switch 304 may have a configuration other than a push button structure (for example, a slide switch structure, a toggle switch structure, a dial switch structure, or the like).

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is a sub-side mainly composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch arranged at a predetermined position, an effect control board 12, a payout control board 15, and the like. It has a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information to the control board as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to the hall management computer, and the like. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control. For example, as shown in FIG. 9, the main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a control clock generation circuit 111, a random number clock generation circuit 112, a switch circuit 114, a solenoid circuit 115, and a motor drive circuit. 116 is provided. A game start switch 31 may be installed on the main board 11.

  Here, the control clock generation circuit 111 generates a control clock CCLK that becomes an oscillation signal having a predetermined frequency outside the game control microcomputer 100. The control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 111 is supplied to the clock circuit 502 via a control external clock terminal EXC of the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 13, for example. The random number clock generation circuit 112 generates a random number clock RCLK that is an oscillation signal having a predetermined frequency different from the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK, outside the game control microcomputer 100. The random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112 is supplied to the random number circuit 509 via the random number external clock terminal ERC of the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 13, for example. As an example, the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112 may be equal to or lower than the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 111. Alternatively, the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112 may be higher than the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 111.

  The switch circuit 114 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The solenoid circuit 115 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoids 81 and 82. The game start switch 31 has, for example, a push button structure, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 closes the gaming machine frame 3 so that the player can not normally touch the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state in which the player plays a normal game. What is necessary is just to be arrange | positioned. Then, for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on or when the system is reset, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated to instruct the game start after the initial setting. Note that the game start switch 31 may have a configuration other than the push button structure (for example, a slide switch structure, a toggle switch structure, a dial switch structure, etc.).

  As shown in FIG. 9, the main board 11 includes a gate switch 21, a first start port switch 22A, a second start port switch 22B, an accessory count switch 23L, 23C, 23R, a specific area switch 24, and a discharge port switch 25. Wirings for transmitting detection signals from the general winning opening switches 27F, 27L, 27R and the large winning opening count switch 28 are connected. In addition, these switches should just have arbitrary structures which can detect the game ball | bowl as game media like what is called a sensor, for example. Further, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 85A, a second hold display device 85B, and a general drawing hold display device 85C. A wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control is connected. Further, the main board 11 has wirings for transmitting command signals for performing drive control of the model solenoids 52L and 52R, the opening solenoid 53, the big prize opening solenoid 54, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 55, the motor 56, and the like. It is connected.

  The solenoid circuit 115 mounted on the main board 11 outputs a drive control signal as a command signal for various solenoids in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 100. The motor circuit 116 mounted on the main board 11 outputs a drive control signal as a command signal for the motor 56 in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 100.

  The main board 11 may be provided with a main board side connector corresponding to the relay board 18, for example, and an output buffer circuit may be connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. . This output buffer circuit can pass a control signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 18, for example, and prevents the signal input from the relay board 18 to the main board 11. . Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 or the relay board 18 side to the main board 11 side. Note that the relay board 18 may not be provided between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. Thereby, the freedom degree of wiring routing between the main board | substrate 11 and the production | presentation control board 12 can be raised.

  For example, the relay board 18 may be provided with a transmission direction regulating circuit in a wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The transmission direction regulating circuit includes a diode having an anode connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to the presentation control board connector corresponding to the presentation control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And the other end of which is connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, the transmission direction regulating circuit can block the signal input from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 18 and allow the signal to pass only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided in the wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 18, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing, illegal signal input to the main board 11 from the outside can be prevented.

  Various control commands and notification signals are transmitted between the main board 11 and the payout control board 15 by, for example, bidirectional serial communication. The payout control board 15 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives a control command and a notification signal transmitted from the main board 11, and controls the payout operation of the game ball by the payout motor 51. Various circuits are installed. That is, the payout control board 15 has a function of controlling the award ball payout operation by the payout motor 51. The payout control board 15 may have a function of controlling the ball lending operation by controlling the driving of the payout motor 51 in accordance with the communication result with the card unit via the interface board, for example. The payout control board 15 receives wiring for receiving detection signals from the full tank switch 26 and the ball break switch 27, and detection signals from the payout motor position sensor 71, the payout count switch 72, and the error release switch 73. Wiring for is connected. In addition, a wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing payout control of the game ball in the payout motor 51 and a command signal for performing display control in the error display LED 74 are transmitted to the payout control board 15. Wiring for communication with the card unit is connected via the interface board.

  Here, the full tank switch 26 is installed on the side wall of the surplus ball passage that communicates between the striking ball supply tray and the surplus ball receiving tray, for example, below the back of the game board 2, and detects the full tank of the surplus ball receiving tray. Is. A lot of game balls based on award balls or ball lending requests are paid out, the batting supply tray becomes full, and after the game balls reach the contact port, when game balls are paid out, the game balls pass through the surplus ball passage. It is led to the extra ball tray. When the game ball is further paid out, for example, a predetermined sensing lever presses the full switch 26 to turn on.

  Further, the ball break switch 27 is installed downstream of the guide rail that guides the game ball to the payout device in which the payout motor 51 is installed, for example, on the back of the game board 2, and via a curve rod downstream of the guide rail. This is for detecting the presence or absence of game balls in two rows of ball passages communicated with each other. As an example, the ball break switch 27 is locked by a locking piece at a position where it can be detected that 27 to 28 game balls are present in the ball path, and the maximum payout number (for example, 100) It is possible to confirm that at least 25 pieces corresponding to a circle are secured. The guide rail guides a game ball from a storage tank that stores a game ball as a supply ball above the back of the game board 2 to a payout device, and a payout motor 51 is provided below the ball passage. The payout device in which is installed is fixed.

  The error release switch 73 is a switch for releasing the error state by software reset when the payout control microcomputer 150 is controlled to a predetermined error state. The error display LED 74 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and is used to display error codes corresponding to various errors based on an error flag set by the payout control microcomputer 150.

  The launch control board 17 shown in FIG. 9 is for controlling the launch operation of the game ball by a predetermined launch device in accordance with the operation amount of the operation knob 30. For example, the firing control board 17 has wiring for transmitting a drive signal from the power supply board 10 or the main board 11, wiring for transmitting a connection signal from the card unit via the payout control board 15 and the interface board, and an operation knob 30. Are connected to the firing motor 62. Note that the connection signal from the card unit may be branched at the dispensing control board 15 and transmitted to the firing control board 17, or the launch control may be performed from the card unit via the interface board and not via the dispensing control board 15. It may be transmitted to the substrate 17. The firing control board 17 adjusts the driving force of the firing motor 62 in accordance with the operation amount of the operation knob 30. The launch motor 62 elastically deforms the launch spring by a driving force adjusted by the launch control board 17, for example, and transmits the biasing force of the launch spring to the hitting hammer to hit the game ball, thereby controlling the game ball to the operation knob 30. It is fired toward the game area at a speed corresponding to the operation amount.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 18 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted as an electric signal. In this embodiment, the effect control command is set for transmission by the CPU 505 (see FIG. 13) included in the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, and the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the setting. Is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the second channel transmission circuit of the serial communication circuit 511 (see FIG. 13). In the following description, the transmission operation of the effect control command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 includes a series of operations by the CPU 505 and the serial communication circuit 511 provided in the game control microcomputer 100. To do. In this case, on the side of the effect control board 12, for example, the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 performs an interrupt process based on a reception interrupt request generated when communication data in the serial signal format transmitted from the main board 11 is received. By executing, the effect control command may be captured and stored in a predetermined buffer (for example, a reception command buffer for effect). The effect control command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 18 by a plurality of signal lines (for example, eight effect control signal lines). In this case, in addition to the signal line for transmitting the effect control command, a signal line for transmitting the capture signal (effect control INT signal) for requesting the capture of the effect control command may be wired.

  The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. The lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the light emitter is included. FIG. 12A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the display control command used in this embodiment. The display control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit of the MODE data (bit number [7]) is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. The form of the display control command shown in FIG. 12A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the display control command has a 2-byte configuration, but the number of bytes constituting the display control command may be 1 or a plurality of 3 or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12A, the command 8001H is a first change start command for designating the start of change of the first special figure in the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command for designating the start of change of the second special figure in the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special graphic game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  In this embodiment, the first and second variation start commands and the variation pattern designation command are prepared as separate production control commands. On the other hand, the designation content indicating which of the first special figure and the second special figure is to be changed and the designated content of the fluctuation pattern are configured to be specified by one effect control command. Also good. As an example, an effect control command in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a special symbol (first special figure or second special figure) that starts change and a change pattern is prepared. You may enable it to specify the special symbol and fluctuation pattern which become a fluctuation start. Here, when the special symbol and the variation pattern that start the variation can be specified by one effect control command, the special symbol (the first special feature that starts the variation) for one variation pattern. There are cases where it is necessary to prepare two types of effect control commands according to the figure or the second special figure). On the other hand, if an effect control command for designating a special symbol for starting variation and an effect control command for designating a variation pattern are prepared separately, two types of effect control commands corresponding to the special symbol for starting variation are prepared. And the number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types of variation patterns may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  Command 8CXXH is a display result designation command for designating variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 12B, the variable display result is determined in advance as to whether it is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”, and the variable display result is “ Different EXT data is set in accordance with the hit type determination result indicating which of the big hit type and the small hit type is “big hit” or “small hit”. More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result and a hit type determination result indicating that the big hit type is “first big hit” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C02H is a third display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result and a hit type determination result indicating that the big hit type is “second big hit” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C03H is a fourth display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result and a hit type determination result that the hit type is “first hit” when the variable display result is “small hit”. The command 8C04H is a fifth display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result and a hit type determination result that the small hit type is “second small hit” when the variable display result is “small hit”.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the display result designation command are prepared as separate presentation control commands. On the other hand, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result indicated by the display result designation command may be configured to be specified by one effect control command. As an example, it corresponds to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result ("Lost", "Big hit" or "Small hit" and the big hit type or small hit type when "Big hit" or "Small hit") Then, an effect control command in which EXT data is set may be prepared, and information that can specify the variation pattern and the variable display result may be transmitted by the effect control command. Alternatively, the variation pattern and the variable display result may be specified by three or more effect control commands. Here, when the variation pattern and the variable display result are configured to be specified by a single effect control command, a plurality of types of effects corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display results for one variation pattern. You may need to provide control commands. On the other hand, if the production control command for designating the variation pattern and the production control command for notifying the variable display result are prepared separately, the number of production control commands corresponding to the number of types of the variation pattern and the variable display result are provided. The number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation designation command for designating the stop of variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The symbol confirmation designation command may not be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In this case, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is specified on the side of the effect control board 12, and the elapsed time from the start of variable display of the decorative design is variable display time. Even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not received, the determined decorative design may be displayed in a completely stopped state to confirm the variable display result.

  A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. In the hit start designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the display result designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set depending on the advance determination result or the hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result or the hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the display result designation command.

  The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening designation command that designates display of an effect image during a period in which the special winning opening 60 is open in each round, corresponding to the big hit gaming state. The command A2XXH designates display of an effect image (for example, an effect image in an interval between rounds) during a period in which the big prize opening 60 changes from the open state to the closed state at the end of each round, corresponding to the big hit gaming state. This is a designation command after the winning opening is opened. In the special winning opening opening designation command and the special winning opening open designation command, different EXT data is set corresponding to, for example, the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “15”). In addition, not only in the big hit gaming state in which the round with the big winning opening 60 being opened is executed, but also the “left” and “right” bonus entry points 31L and 31R provided in the variable winning device 40 are opened. Even in the jackpot gaming state in which the round to be in the state is executed, the character opening entry designation command for designating the period during which these character entry entrances 31L and 31R are in the open state, and the open state to the closed state An after-release designation command that designates the changed period may be prepared. Further, not only in the big hit gaming state but also in the small hit gaming state, the designated command during opening of the bonus item or the designation command after releasing the bonus item may be transmitted. A common effect control command is transmitted when a round in which the grand prize winning opening 60 is opened and when a round in which the accessory entrances 31L and 31R are opened or when an accessory opening / closing operation is performed are transmitted. Alternatively, a separately produced effect control command may be transmitted.

  The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to the display result designation command or the hit start designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result or the hit type determined result. Alternatively, in the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result or the hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the display result designation command or the hit start designation command.

  The command B1XXH is a first special symbol display based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A and a start winning is generated. This is a first start slot winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the device 4A is established. The command B2XXH is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and a start winning has occurred, and the second special symbol is generated. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the display device 4B is established.

  In this embodiment, the first start opening winning designation command notifies a determination result using predetermined numerical data at the time of the first start winning that is the time of detecting the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening. It is also used as an effect control command. The second start opening prize designation command is an effect control command for notifying a determination result using predetermined numerical data at the time of the second start winning place, which is a time of detecting a game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening Also used as

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12C, in the first start opening prize designation command and the second start opening prize designation command, when the special figure display result is “losing”, the predetermined pattern used for determining the variation pattern is used. The variable display determining numerical value (for example, numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type) is associated with a specific variation pattern (for example, super reach) regardless of the reserved memory number of the special figure game (special figure reserved memory number). Different EXT data is set depending on whether the variation pattern is within or outside the specific pattern common range. More specifically, the command B100H and the command B200H notify that they are outside the specific pattern common range, while the command B101H and the command B201H notify that they are within the specific pattern common range.

  In addition, in the first start opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command, a predetermined specific display result determining numerical value (for example, special figure display) used for determining whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” is determined. Different EXT data is set according to the determination result of whether or not the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” based on the numerical value data (random number MR1 for determining the result). More specifically, the command B102H and the command B202H notify the winning jackpot determination that is determined that the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit”. On the other hand, the command B100H, the command B101H, the command B200H, and the command B201H are notified that it is determined that the special figure display result is not determined to be “big hit”. Note that the winning jackpot determination is not limited to the case where it is determined that the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit”, and the special figure display result is determined to be determined to be “small hit”. It is good also as determination per winning time including.

  Furthermore, in the first start opening winning designation command, the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening during the big hit when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, EXT data that can specify that a game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening is detected during the time-shortening control in the time-shortening state. More specifically, the command B103H notifies of a big hit / short / medium winning that a game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening is detected during the big hit or during the short-time control.

  The command C0XXH displays the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in the start winning memory display area 5H provided in the display area of the image display device 5 in an identifiable manner. This is a special figure reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number which is the total value with the reserved memory number. The special figure hold memory number notification command is executed when, for example, either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, or the special start game is executed when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. Corresponding to the start or the like, following the transmission of either the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command, the main board 11 sends it to the effect control board 12. The In the special figure hold memory number notification command, for example, the total number of hold data (for example, “0” to “8”) of the hold data in the first special figure hold storage unit 591A and the hold data in the second special figure hold storage unit 591B shown in FIG. ), Different EXT data is set. As a result, on the side of the production control board 12, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, or when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the special game is executed. Is received, the special figure hold storage number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, and the total storage of the hold data in the first special figure hold storage unit 591A and the second special figure hold storage unit 591B is received. The number can be specified.

  In this embodiment, the first and second start opening winning designation commands and the reserved memory number designation command are prepared as separate presentation control commands. On the other hand, the notification content indicating which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied and the notification content of the total reserved storage number are configured to be specified by one effect control command. Also good. As an example, an effect control command in which EXT data is set corresponding to the combination of the established start condition (the first start condition or the second start condition) and the total reserved memory number is prepared. The established start condition and the total number of reserved memories may be specified. Here, when it is possible to specify which one of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied by one effect control command together with the total reserved memory number, for example, the upper limit value of the total reserved memory number is “8”. ”, It is necessary to prepare a total of 16 types of effect control commands of 8 types corresponding to the case where the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied. On the other hand, if an effect control command that can specify which of the first start condition and the second start condition is established and an effect control command that can specify the total number of reserved memories are prepared separately, the first If there are prepared a total of 10 types of effect control commands comprising two types of effect control commands that can specify each of the start condition and the second start condition and eight types of effect control commands that can specify the total number of reserved memories. It is often possible to reduce the types of commands prepared in advance and the storage capacity of the command table.

  In addition to the first start opening prize designation command and the second start opening prize designation command, an effect control command for notifying a determination result using predetermined numerical data at the first start winning prize or the second starting winning prize is prepared. May be. Alternatively, the notification content of the determination result using predetermined numerical data and the notification content of the total reserved storage number can be specified by one production control command at the time of the first start winning or the second starting winning. May be.

  The command E100H is used when a winning combination occurs when a game ball passes (enters) one of the “left” and “right” winning entry 31L and 31R provided in the variable winning device 40. This is a prize winning detection command for notification of valid detection of a prize winning ball. The command E200H notifies that the V winning ball is detected when the game ball passes (enters) a specific area 49 as a V winning opening provided inside the variable winning device 40 and a V winning occurs. This is a winning detection command. In the command E300H, there is a match between the number of game balls that have entered the variable prize device 40 (number of winning prize balls) and the number of game balls that have been discharged to the outside of the variable prize device 40 (number of discharged balls). This is a discharge completion detection command notifying that it has been detected.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the payout control board 15 is, for example, a payout control command transmitted as an electrical signal. The payout control command is set to transmit the payout control command by the CPU 505 (see FIG. 13) provided in the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, and based on the setting, the game control use is made. It is transmitted to the payout control board 15 by the first channel transmission / reception circuit of the serial communication circuit 511 (see FIG. 13) provided in the microcomputer 100. In the following description, the transmission operation of the payout control command from the main board 11 to the payout control board 15 includes a series of operations by the CPU 505 and the serial communication circuit 511 provided in the game control microcomputer 100. To do. Also, for example, a payout notification command as an electrical signal is transmitted from the payout control board 15 to the main board 11. The payout notification command is set so that the payout notification command is transmitted by the CPU of the payout control microcomputer 150 mounted on the payout control board 15, and the payout control microcomputer 150 is set based on the setting. It is transmitted to the main board 11 by a serial communication circuit provided. In the following description, it is assumed that the transmission operation of the payout notification command from the payout control board 15 to the main board 11 includes a series of operations by the CPU and serial communication circuit provided in the payout control microcomputer 150. . In addition, in the following description, not only a command for a predetermined operation from one of the main board 11 and the payout control board 15 to the other, but also a notification signal for notifying the other of the operation state of the other is a payout control command or a payout It shall be included in the notification command.

  The payout control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the payout control board 15 may include a payout number designation command and an ACK feedback command. The payout number designation command is a command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out. The ACK feedback command becomes a reception confirmation acceptance signal indicating that the prize ball ACK command transmitted from the payout control board 15 to the main board 11 is received on the main board 11 side.

  The payout notification command transmitted from the payout control board 15 to the main board 11 may include a prize ball ACK command, a payout error notification command, and a payout error cancel command. The winning ball ACK command is a reception confirmation signal indicating that the payout number specifying command transmitted from the main board 11 to the payout control board 15 is received on the payout control board 15 side. The payout error notification command is a command for notifying the main board 11 that an abnormality relating to the payout of the game ball has occurred on the payout control board 15 side. The payout error cancel command is a command for notifying the main substrate 11 side that the error that has occurred on the payout control board 15 side has been cancelled.

  In addition, between the main board | substrate 11 and the payout control board 15, it is not limited to what transmits / receives a command by serial communication, You may transmit / receive a command by parallel communication using a several signal wire | line. Further, instead of the payout error notification command and the payout error cancel command transmitted from the payout control board 15 to the main board 11, a payout error state signal indicating an error occurrence state in the payout control board 15 is sent to the main board 11. You may input into one of the provided input ports. For example, the payout error state signal is turned on when an error occurs in the payout control board 15, and is turned off when no error occurs or when the error is released. In this case, on the main board 11 side, a payout error state signal is fetched every time a timer interrupt occurs, and the fetch result is stored. The payout error state signal has changed from the off state to the on state by taking the exclusive OR of the signal state captured by the current timer interrupt and the signal state captured and stored by the previous timer interrupt. It may be possible to detect that the error has been changed from the on state to the off state (indicating the time when the error is released). When an error occurs in the payout control board 15 or when the error is released, an error has occurred in the payout operation by transmitting an effect control command prepared for each from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 You may make it instruct | indicate the start and completion | finish of the alerting | reporting operation | movement which alert | reports. The payout error state signal is not limited to one input to one of the input ports provided on the main board 11, and for example, a payout control board 15 such as a full signal, a ball out signal, a prize ball case error signal, or a door open signal. May be input to the main board 11 to detect when an error occurs or when an error is released as in the case of the payout error state signal. Then, by transmitting an effect control command corresponding to the type of the detected error from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the start or end of the notification operation corresponding to the detected error is instructed. It may be.

  FIG. 13 shows a configuration example of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. A game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 13 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes an external bus interface 501, a clock circuit 502, a specific information storage circuit 503, a reset / interrupt controller 504, a CPU (Central Processing Unit). ) 505, ROM (Read Only Memory) 506, RAM (Random Access Memory) 507, CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) 508, random number circuit 509, PIP (Parallel Input Port) 510, and serial communication circuit 511 And an address decoding circuit 512.

  FIG. 14 shows an example of an address map in the game control microcomputer 100. As shown in FIG. 14, the area from address 0000H to address 1FFFH is allocated to the ROM 506 and includes a user program area and a program management area. FIG. 15A shows an example of the usage and contents of the main part of the program management area in the ROM 506. The area from address 2000H to address 20FFH is a built-in register area assigned to the built-in register of the game control microcomputer 100. FIG. 15B shows an example of the usage and contents of the main part of the built-in register area. An area from address 7E00H to address 7FFFH is a work area assigned to the RAM 507, and can be assigned to an I / O map or a memory map. An area from address FDD0H to address FDFBH is an XCS decode area allocated to the address decode circuit 512.

  The program management area is a storage area for storing information necessary for the CPU 505 to execute the user program. As shown in FIG. 15A, the program management area includes a header KHDR, a function setting KFCS, a first random number initial setting KRS1, a second random number initial setting KRS2, an interrupt initial setting KIIS, a security time setting KSES, and the like. It is.

  The header KHDR stored in the program management area indicates the internal data read setting in the game control microcomputer 100. FIG. 16A illustrates the correspondence between setting data and operation in the header KHDR. Here, in the game control microcomputer 100, the ROM read prevention function and the bus output mask function can be set. The ROM read prevention function is a function for permitting or prohibiting the read operation for the data stored in the ROM 506 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, and the data stored in the ROM 506 cannot be read in a state where the read is prohibited. The bus output mask function is an address bus output, data bus output, and control signal in the external bus interface 501 when an external device connected to the external bus interface 501 makes a read request for internal data of the game control microcomputer 100. This function makes it impossible to read internal data from an external device by masking the output. As shown in FIG. 16A, the operation combination of the ROM read prevention function and the bus output mask function is set differently in accordance with the setting data of the header KHDR. Of the setting data shown in FIG. 16A, the setting data for which ROM reading is permitted and the bus output mask is valid is also referred to as bus output mask valid data. Further, the setting data (all “00H”) in which ROM reading is prohibited and the bus output mask is valid is also referred to as ROM reading prohibiting data. The setting data for which ROM reading is permitted and the bus output mask becomes invalid is also referred to as bus output mask invalid data.

  The function setting KFCS stored in the program management area indicates the operation setting of the watch dog timer (WDT) in the game control microcomputer 100 and the use setting of various function shared terminals. FIG. 16B shows an example of setting contents in the function setting KFCS.

  The bit number [7-5] of the function setting KFCS indicates, for example, the operation permission / prohibition of the watchdog timer that can be set as an interrupt factor in the reset / interrupt controller 504, and the cycle when it is permitted. The bit number [4] of the function setting KFCS indicates whether the predetermined function shared terminal (first shared terminal) in the game control microcomputer 100 is the second channel transmission terminal TXB used by the serial communication circuit 511 or the address decoding This is a TXB terminal setting that designates whether the circuit 512 uses the chip select output terminal XCS13. In the example shown in FIG. 16B, if the bit value in the bit number [4] of the function setting KFCS is “0”, the first shared terminal is used for the second channel transmission in the serial communication circuit 511. This is the setting for the 2-channel transmission terminal TXB. On the other hand, if the bit value is “1”, the first dual-purpose terminal is set to the chip select output terminal XCS13 used in the address decode circuit 512. In this embodiment, by setting the bit number [4] of the function setting KFCS to “0” and setting the first shared terminal to the second channel transmission terminal TXB, serial communication with the effect control board 12 is performed. to enable.

  The bit number [3] of the function setting KFCS indicates whether the predetermined function shared terminal (second shared terminal) in the game control microcomputer 100 is the first channel transmission terminal TXA used by the serial communication circuit 511 or the address decoding This is a TXA terminal setting that indicates whether the circuit 512 uses the chip select output terminal XCS12. In the example shown in FIG. 16B, if the bit value in the bit number [3] of the function setting KFCS is “0”, the second shared terminal is used for the first channel transmission in the serial communication circuit 511. 1 channel transmission terminal TXA is set. On the other hand, if the bit value is “1”, the second dual-purpose terminal is set to the chip select output terminal XCS12 used in the address decode circuit 512. In this embodiment, by setting the bit number [3] of the function setting KFCS to “0” and setting the second shared terminal to the first channel transmission terminal TXA, serial communication with the payout control board 15 is performed. to enable.

  The bit number [2] of the function setting KFCS indicates that the predetermined function shared terminal (third shared terminal) in the game control microcomputer 100 is the first channel reception terminal RXA used by the serial communication circuit 511, or the PIP 510 This is an RXA terminal setting indicating whether to use the input port P5. In the example shown in FIG. 16B, if the bit value in the bit number [2] of the function setting KFCS is “0”, the third shared terminal is used for the first channel reception in the serial communication circuit 511. 1 channel receiving terminal RXA is set. On the other hand, if the bit value is “1”, the third shared terminal is set to the input port P5 included in the PIP 510. In this embodiment, by setting the bit number [2] of the function setting KFCS to “0” and setting the third shared terminal to the first channel receiving terminal RXA, serial communication with the payout control board 15 is performed. to enable.

  The bit number [1] of the function setting KFCS is used by the PIP 510 as the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI connected to the CPU 505 or the like as a predetermined function shared terminal (fourth shared terminal) in the game control microcomputer 100 This is an NMI connection setting indicating whether to set the input port P4. In the example shown in FIG. 16B, if the bit value in the bit number [1] of the function setting KFCS is “0”, the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI whose fourth shared terminal is connected to the CPU 505 or the like is set. (CPU connection). On the other hand, if the bit value is “1”, the fourth shared terminal is set to the input port P4 included in the PIP 510 (CPU disconnected).

  The bit number [0] of the function setting KFCS is a predetermined function shared terminal (fifth shared terminal) in the game control microcomputer 100 is used as an external maskable interrupt terminal XINT connected to the CPU 505 or the like, or is used by the PIP 510 The XINT connection setting indicates whether the input port is P3. In the example shown in FIG. 16B, if the bit value in the bit number [0] of the function setting KFCS is “0”, the external maskable interrupt terminal XINT connected to the CPU 505 or the like is set to the fifth shared terminal. (CPU connection). On the other hand, if the bit value is “1”, the fifth shared terminal is set to the input port P3 included in the PIP 510 (CPU disconnected).

  The first random number initial setting KRS1 and the second random number initial setting KRS2 stored in the program management area indicate the initial setting of the random number circuit 509. FIG. 17A shows an example of setting contents in the first random number initial setting KRS1. FIG. 17B shows an example of setting contents in the second random number initial setting KRS2.

  The bit number [3] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is a random number circuit use setting indicating whether to use the random number circuit 509 or not. In the example shown in FIG. 17A, if the bit value in the bit number [3] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is “0”, the random number circuit 509 is not used (unused), but “1”. "Is set to use the random number circuit 509 (use). In this embodiment, the bit number [3] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is set to “1”, and the random number circuit 509 is set to be usable.

  The bit number [2] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 uses the random number update clock RGK (see FIG. 21) used for updating the numerical data that becomes the random number value in the random number circuit 509 as the internal system clock SCLK or for the random number. This is a random number update clock setting indicating whether the clock RCLK is divided by two. In the example shown in FIG. 17A, if the bit value in the bit number [2] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is “0”, the internal system clock SCLK is set to be used as the random number update clock RGK. If it is 1 ″, the random number clock RCLK is divided by two and used as the random number update clock RGK. In this embodiment, the bit number [2] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is set to “1”, and the random number clock RCLK is divided by two to be used as the random number update clock RGK.

  The bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is a random number update rule setting indicating whether or not to change the random number update rule in the random number circuit 509 and the change method in the case of the change. In the example shown in FIG. 17A, if the bit value in the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is “00”, the random number update rule is not changed, and if it is “01”. The setting for changing the random number update rule by software is made after the second round, and if it is “10”, the random number update rule is automatically changed after the second round.

  The bit number [3-2] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is set to a fixed bit value “00”. Note that “B” in “00B” in FIG. 17B indicates binary display. The bit number [1-0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 indicates the setting relating to the start value in the numerical data that becomes the random value in the random number circuit 509. In the example shown in FIG. 17B, if the bit value in the bit number [1] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is “0”, the start value is set to a predetermined default value 0000H, while “1”. In this case, a value based on the ID number, which is unique identification information assigned to each game control microcomputer 100, is set as the start value. In the example shown in FIG. 17B, if the bit value in the bit number [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is “0”, the start value is not changed every time the system is reset. When it is 1 ″, the start value is changed every time the system is reset. In addition, when setting the start value to a value based on the ID number, a part or all of the calculation for performing a predetermined scramble process on the ID number and the calculation such as addition / subtraction / multiplication / division using the ID number are performed. It is only necessary to execute and use the calculated value as the start value. When the bit value [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is “1”, the count value in a predetermined free-run counter (for example, the free-run counter 554A shown in FIG. 21) every time the system is reset. A value set based on the above may be used as the start value. Further, when both the bit values [1] and [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 are “1”, a value set based on the ID number and the count value in the free run counter is set. It may be used as a start value.

  Note that when two systems (corresponding to the first and second channels) for generating numerical data to be a random number value in the random number circuit 509 are provided, the first shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B. The bit number [3-0] of the random number initial setting KRS1 and the bit number [3-0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 are used to indicate the initial setting in the first channel. On the other hand, the bit number [7-4] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 and the bit number [7-4] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 (omitted in FIGS. 17A and 17B), the second It may be used as an indication of the initial setting in the channel.

  Interrupt initial settings KIIS stored in the program management area indicate initial settings related to handling of maskable interrupts generated in the game control microcomputer 100. FIG. 17C shows an example of setting contents in the interrupt initial setting KIIS.

  In the bit number [7-4] of the interrupt initial setting KIIS, the upper 4 bits of the interrupt vector are set. In the bit number [3-0] of the interrupt initial setting KIIS, a combination of maskable interrupt factor priorities is set. In the example shown in FIG. 17C, if any of “00H” to “02H” and “06H” is specified by the bit number [3-0] of the interrupt initial setting KIIS, the maskable interrupt factor from the CTC 508 is determined. A combination of priorities to be given the highest priority is set. On the other hand, if any one of “03H” and “07H” is specified, a combination of priorities that gives the highest priority to the maskable interrupt factor from the random number circuit 509 is set. If either “04H” or “05H” is specified, a combination of priorities that sets the maskable interrupt factor from the serial communication circuit 511 as the highest priority is set. Note that even if the priority combination has the highest priority for maskable interrupt factors from the same circuit, if the specified value is different, the type of maskable interrupt factor that has the highest priority, the priority combination in the second or lower order, etc. will differ. ing.

  The security time setting KSES stored in the program management area is the frequency at which an abnormality is detected when monitoring the frequency of the random number clock RCLK, the time of the security mode that is shifted to when the operation of the game control microcomputer 100 starts ( Indicates settings related to (security time). Here, when the operation mode of the game control microcomputer 100 is the security mode, a predetermined security check process is executed to check whether or not the content stored in the ROM 506 has been changed. FIG. 18A shows an example of setting contents in the security time setting KSES.

  Bit number [7-6] of security time setting KSES is a random number clock abnormality detection setting indicating a frequency at which an abnormality is detected when the frequency of random number clock RCLK is monitored. FIG. 18B shows an example of setting contents in the bit number [7-6] of the security time setting KSES. The bit number [7-6] of the security time setting KSES specifies a reference value (determination value) at which the frequency of the random number clock RCLK is detected as abnormal based on the frequency of the internal system clock SCLK. Whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the input state of the random number clock RCLK by comparing the input state of the random number clock RCLK with the internal system clock SCLK based on the setting of the security time setting KSES in the bit number [7-6]. It is possible to determine whether. The bit number “5” of the security time setting KSES is set to a fixed bit value “0”.

  The bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES indicates a time setting when the security time is extended by a random time every system reset. FIG. 18C shows an example of setting contents in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES. In the example shown in FIG. 18C, if the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is “00”, the setting is such that random time extension is not performed. On the other hand, if the bit value is “01”, the short mode is set, and if the bit value is “10”, the long mode is set. Here, when the short mode or the long mode is designated, for example, the count value of the free-run counter incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100 is set to a predetermined value provided in the game control microcomputer 100 when a system reset occurs. Store in the built-in register (variable security time register). Then, the security time can be reduced by using the stored value of the variable security time register as it is at the time of initial setting, or by using the value obtained by substituting the stored value into a predetermined arithmetic function (for example, a hash function). What is necessary is just to determine the extension time at the time of extending at random. As an example, when the frequency of the internal system clock SCLK is 6.0 MHz, the extension time is randomly determined in the range of 0 to 680 μs (microseconds) in the short mode, and in the range of 0 to 348, 160 μs in the long mode. The extension time is determined at random. As another example, when the frequency of the internal system clock SCLK is 10.0 MHz, the extension time is randomly determined in the range of 0 to 408 μs in the short mode, and in the range of 0 to 208,896 μs in the long mode. The extension time is determined at random. The variable security time register only needs to be backed up using a backup power source common to the backup location on the main board 11, such as a backup area in the RAM 507 of the game control microcomputer 100. Alternatively, the variable security time register may be backed up by a power source provided separately from a backup power source used for a backup area in the RAM 507 or the like. In this way, the variable security time register is backed up by the backup power supply, so that the stored value of the variable security time register is saved for a predetermined period even when the power supply is stopped. Note that the timing at which the count value in the free-run counter is read and stored in the variable security time register is not limited to when a system reset occurs, and may be any predetermined timing. Alternatively, the free run counter may be backed up by a backup power source, and the extension time for extending the security time using the stored value read from the free run counter at the initial setting may be determined at random.

  Further, the short mode or the long mode is set by the bit value [4-3] of the security time setting KSES, and the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is set to other than “000”. Thus, it is possible to set an extension time to be added to the fixed time. In this case, both the extension time corresponding to the bit value in the bit number [2-0] and the extension time randomly determined based on the bit value in the bit number [4-3] are fixed times. By adding, the security time during which the game control microcomputer 100 is in the security mode is determined.

  The external bus interface 501 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 13 is an interface function between an external bus and an internal bus of the chip constituting the game control microcomputer 100, an address bus, a data bus, and each control signal. A bus interface having a direction control function and the like. For example, the external bus interface 501 is connected to an external memory, an external input / output device or the like externally attached to the game control microcomputer 100, and address signals, data signals, various control signals, etc. with these external devices As long as it transmits and receives. In this embodiment, the external bus interface 501 includes an internal resource access control circuit 501A.

  The internal resource access control circuit 501A controls access to the internal data of the game control microcomputer 100 from an external device via the external bus interface 501, and for example, a game control program (game control processing program) stored in the ROM 506 And a circuit for limiting inappropriate external reading of internal data such as fixed data. Here, a circuit analysis device such as an in-circuit emulator (ICE; InCircuit Emulator) may be connected to the external bus interface 501 as an external device.

  As an example, according to the contents of the header KHDR stored in the program management area of the ROM 506, it is possible to switch between prohibiting or permitting reading of stored data in the ROM 506. For example, when the header KHDR is bus output mask invalid data, the ROM 506 can be read by an external device, and external reading of internal data is permitted. On the other hand, if the header KHDR is the bus output mask valid data, the ROM 506 can be read from the external device by masking the address bus output, data bus output and control signal output in the external bus interface 501, for example. Is disabled, and external reading of internal data is prohibited. In this case, when reading of internal data is requested from an external device connected to the external bus interface 501, a predetermined fixed value is output so that internal data cannot be read from the external device. . Further, when the header KHDR is ROM read prohibition data, the ROM 506 itself may not be read, and reading of stored data in the ROM 506 may be prevented. For example, in a ROM at the manufacturing stage, by making the header KHDR ROM read prohibition data, the ROM itself is made unreadable, and if it is a development ROM, bus output mask invalid data is written in the header KHDR, Allows verification of internal data by an external device. On the other hand, if the ROM for mass production is used, the bus output mask valid data is written in the header KHDR, so that the ROM 506 can be read by the CPU 505 and the like inside the game control microcomputer 100, while the external device It is only necessary to prevent the ROM 506 from being read.

  As another example, the internal resource access control circuit 501A is requested by an external device connected to the external bus interface 501 to read out internal data of the game control microcomputer 100 such as all or part of data stored in the ROM 506. Detect that. When this read request is detected, the internal resource access control circuit 501A determines whether or not reading of the internal data of the game control microcomputer 100 is permitted. For example, it is assumed that all or part of the stored data in the ROM 506 has been encrypted. In this case, if the read request from the external device is a read request for the encryption processing program or key data stored in the ROM 506, the internal resource access control circuit 501A rejects the read request, and the game control micro Reading of the internal data of the computer 100 is prohibited. In the external bus interface 501, a switch element is provided between the output port from which data stored in the ROM 506 is output and the internal bus. When the internal resource access control circuit 501 A prohibits reading of the internal data, the switch element May be controlled to be turned off. As described above, the internal resource access control circuit 501A reads the internal data depending on whether or not the read request from the external device requests reading of predetermined internal data (for example, a predetermined area of the ROM 506). You may make it determine whether it prohibits or permits.

  Alternatively, the internal resource access control circuit 501A may determine whether or not a predetermined authentication code has been input from an external device when detecting a read request for internal data. In this case, for example, a predetermined code pattern serving as an authentication code may be stored in advance in the internal resource access control circuit 501A or in a predetermined area of the ROM 506. When the authentication code is input from the external device, the authentication code is compared with the authentication code stored in the internal device. To give permission. On the other hand, if the authentication code input from the external device does not match the authentication code stored internally, the read request is rejected and reading of the internal data of the game control microcomputer 100 is prohibited. As described above, the internal resource access control circuit 501A determines whether to prohibit or permit reading of the internal data depending on whether or not the authentication code input from the external device matches the authentication code stored internally. You may make it do. Thereby, it is possible to read out the internal data of the game control microcomputer 100 using a correct authentication code known in advance by an inspection organization or the like, and to properly inspect the validity of the internal data. become.

  As yet another example, a read prohibition flag is provided in the internal resource access control circuit 501A, and reading of the ROM 506 by an external device is prohibited if the read prohibition flag is on. On the other hand, when the reading prohibition flag is in the off state, reading of the ROM 506 by the external device is permitted. Here, the read prohibition flag is off in the initial state, but once the read prohibition flag is turned on, the read prohibition flag cannot be cleared and returned to the off state. That's fine. That is, the read prohibition flag can be irreversibly changed from the off state to the on state. For example, the internal resource access control circuit 501A does not have a function of clearing the read prohibition flag to turn it off, and is set so that the read prohibition flag cannot be cleared by any instruction. Just do it. Then, the internal resource access control circuit 501A determines whether or not the read prohibition flag is on when the external device requests to read internal data of the game control microcomputer 100 such as data stored in the ROM 506. At this time, if the reading prohibition flag is on, the reading request from the external device is rejected, and reading of the internal data of the gaming control microcomputer 100 is prohibited. On the other hand, if the read prohibition flag is OFF, a read request from an external device is accepted and reading of the internal data of the game control microcomputer 100 is permitted. With such a configuration, a provider who creates a game control processing program for game control and stores it in the ROM 506 can load a program that has been debugged from the ROM 506 with the read prohibition flag off. Can be read. Then, when shipping after the debugging work is completed, by setting the read prohibition flag to the on state, external reading of the ROM 506 can be restricted thereafter, and by the user of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like Reading of the ROM 506 can be prevented. As described above, the internal resource access control circuit 501A may determine whether to prohibit or permit reading of internal data depending on whether an internal flag such as a read prohibition flag is off or on. .

  Note that the read prohibition flag is not set irreversibly but can be changed from the on state to the off state, while the read prohibition flag is changed from the on state to the off state to permit reading of internal data. In this case, external reading of the ROM 506 may be restricted by erasing the data stored in the ROM 506 (for example, flash erasure).

  The clock circuit 502 included in the game control microcomputer 100 is a circuit that generates the internal system clock SCLK by, for example, dividing the oscillation signal input to the control external clock terminal EXC by two. In this embodiment, the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 111 is input to the control external clock terminal EXC. The internal system clock SCLK generated by the clock circuit 502 is supplied to various circuits such as the CPU 505 that control the progress of the game in the game control microcomputer 100. The internal system clock SCLK is also supplied to the random number circuit 509 and used to monitor the frequency of the random number clock RCLK supplied from the random number clock generation circuit 112. Furthermore, the internal system clock SCLK may be output from the system clock output terminal CLKO connected to the clock circuit 502 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. It is desirable that the internal system clock SCLK is not output to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. As described above, by limiting the external output of the internal system clock SCLK, it becomes difficult to specify the operation cycle of the internal circuit (such as the CPU 505) of the game control microcomputer 100 from the outside, and numerical data that becomes a random value Can be prevented from being specified from the outside when the software is updated by software.

  The unique information storage circuit 503 included in the game control microcomputer 100 is a circuit that stores a plurality of types of unique information that is internal information of the game control microcomputer 100, for example. As an example, the unique information storage circuit 503 stores three types of unique information such as a ROM code, a chip individual number, and an ID number. The ROM 506 code is a 4-byte numerical value generated from stored data in a predetermined area of the ROM 506, and four numerical values with different generation methods may be prepared. The chip individual number is a 4-byte number assigned when the game control microcomputer 100 is manufactured, and shows a different numerical value for each chip constituting the game control microcomputer 100. The ID number is an 8-byte number assigned when the game control microcomputer 100 is manufactured, and indicates a different numerical value for each chip constituting the game control microcomputer 100. Here, the chip individual number may be read from the user program, while the ID number may be set so as not to be read from the user program. The unique information storage circuit 503 may be included in the ROM 506 by using a predetermined area of the ROM 506, for example. Alternatively, the unique information storage circuit 503 may be included in the CPU 505 by using a built-in register of the CPU 505, for example.

  The reset / interrupt controller 504 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 is for controlling various reset and interrupt requests generated inside or outside the game control microcomputer 100. Resets controlled by the reset / interrupt controller 504 include system resets and user resets. The system reset is a reset that occurs when a low level signal is input to the external system reset terminal XSRST for a certain period. The user reset is a reset that occurs due to a predetermined factor, such as a watchdog timer (WDT) time-out signal or a non-designated area travel prohibition (IAT).

  Interrupts controlled by the reset / interrupt controller 504 include a non-maskable interrupt NMI and a maskable interrupt INT. The non-maskable interrupt NMI is an interrupt that is unconditionally accepted even when the CPU 505 is in an interrupt-disabled state, and is an interrupt that is generated when a low-level signal is input to the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI (also used as the input port P4) for a certain period. is there. The maskable interrupt INT is an interrupt that can permit / prohibit acceptance of an interrupt request by a setting instruction of the CPU 505, and multiple interrupts can be executed by setting priority. The cause of the maskable interrupt INT is that a low level signal has been input to the external maskable interrupt terminal XINT (also used as the input port P3) for a certain period of time, a time-out has occurred in the timer circuit included in the CTC 508, A plurality of types of interrupt factors are determined in advance, such as the occurrence of an interrupt factor due to data reception or data transmission in the serial communication circuit 511 and the occurrence of an interrupt factor due to the acquisition of numerical data as a random value in the random number circuit 509. It only has to be done.

  The reset / interrupt controller 504 includes an interrupt mask register IMR (address 2028H), an interrupt wait monitor register IRR (address 2029H), among interrupted registers included in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. The monitor register ISR (address 202AH), the internal information register CIF (address 208CH), etc. are used to control interrupts and manage resets. The interrupt mask register IMR is a register that sets what is used and what is not used among maskable interrupts INT caused by a plurality of different factors. The interrupt wait monitor register IRR is a register for confirming the generation state of a maskable interrupt request signal for each maskable interrupt factor set by the interrupt initial setting KIIS. The in-interrupt monitor register ISR is a register for confirming the processing state of the maskable interrupt request signal for each maskable interrupt factor set by the interrupt initial setting KIIS. The internal information register CIF is a register for managing the reset factor generated immediately before and recording the frequency abnormality of the random number clock RCLK.

  FIG. 19A shows a configuration example of the internal information register CIF. FIG. 19B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of the internal information data stored in the internal information register CIF. The internal information data CIF4 stored in the bit number [4] of the internal information register CIF is a random number clock abnormality instruction indicating the presence or absence of a frequency abnormality in the random number clock RCLK. In the example shown in FIG. 19B, when the frequency abnormality of the random number clock RCLK is not detected, the bit value of the internal information data CIF4 becomes “0”, whereas when the frequency abnormality is detected, the bit value is “1”. The internal information data CIF2 stored in the bit number [2] of the internal information register CIF is a system reset instruction indicating whether or not the reset factor generated immediately before is a system reset. In the example shown in FIG. 19B, when the immediately preceding reset factor is not a system reset (system reset has not occurred), the bit value of the internal information data CIF2 is “0”, whereas when the system reset is a system reset (system reset) When the reset occurs), the bit value becomes “1”. As a first example of the operation using the internal information data CIF2, the CPU 505 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the bit value of the internal information data CIF2 when the power is turned on, and the bit value is “1” (set). If not, it is determined that the power is not turned on normally. At this time, for example, by transmitting a predetermined effect control command toward the effect control board 12, an illegal signal input action is performed aiming at a big hit gaming state immediately after the power is turned on in the pachinko gaming machine 1. You may notify that there exists possibility with a production | presentation apparatus etc. In addition, as a second example of the operation using the internal information data CIF2, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 notifies a special game state such as a short time state only when the power is turned on and does not notify the special game state during a normal time, The CPU 505 or the like of the gaming control microcomputer 100 may check the bit value of the internal information data CIF2, and if the bit value is not “1” (set), the gaming state may not be notified.

  The internal information data CIF1 stored in the bit number [1] of the internal information register CIF is a WDT timeout instruction indicating whether or not the reset factor generated immediately before is a user reset due to a watchdog timer (WDT) timeout. . In the example shown in FIG. 19B, when the previous reset factor is not a user reset due to a watchdog timer timeout (timeout has not occurred), the bit value of the internal information data CIF1 becomes “0”, while the watchdog When a user reset is caused by a timer timeout (timeout occurs), the bit value becomes “1”. The internal information data CIF0 stored in the bit number [0] of the internal information register CIF is an IAT generation instruction indicating whether or not the reset factor generated immediately before is a user reset due to prohibition of travel outside the designated area (IAT). . In the example shown in FIG. 19B, when the reset factor immediately before is not a user reset due to the occurrence of running out of the designated area (no IAT occurrence), the bit value of the internal information data CIF0 becomes “0”, while When the user reset is caused by the occurrence of out-of-area travel (the occurrence of IAT), the bit value becomes “1”.

  The CPU 505 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 executes a user program (game control processing program for game control) based on a control code read from the ROM 506, thereby executing a game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1. CPU. When such game control is executed, the CPU 505 reads the fixed data from the ROM 506, the CPU 505 writes the various data to the RAM 507 and temporarily stores the data, and the CPU 505 temporarily stores the data in the RAM 507. The CPU 505 receives the various data from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the external bus interface 501, the PIP 510, the serial communication circuit 511, and the like. A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the external bus interface 501 and the serial communication circuit 511 is also performed.

  As described above, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 505 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 506. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 100 (or CPU 505) is hereinafter referred to as executing (or performing processing). Specifically, the CPU 505 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 11.

  The ROM 506 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores a control code indicating a user program (game control processing program for game control), fixed data, and the like. The ROM 506 stores a security check program 506A. The CPU 505 reads the security check program 506A stored in the ROM 506 when the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to the security mode in response to the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the occurrence of a system reset. A security check process is executed to check whether or not the change has been made. Note that the security check program 506A may be stored in a built-in memory different from the ROM 506. Further, the security check program 506A may correspond to a security check process for inspecting the storage contents of an external memory externally attached to the game control microcomputer 100 via the external bus interface 501, for example.

  A RAM 507 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 provides a work area for game control. Here, at least a part of the RAM 507 may be a backup RAM that is backed up by a backup power source created in the power supply substrate 10. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, at least a part of the contents of the RAM 507 is stored for a predetermined period. As an example, data (such as the value of a special figure process flag and the value of a pending storage counter) according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls (such as the value of a prize ball output counter) are backed up. What is necessary is just to preserve | save at RAM. The data corresponding to the game state is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power state is restored after a power failure or the like occurs.

  The CTC 508 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 is configured, for example, by incorporating three channels (PTC0-PTC2) of 8-bit programmable timers, and includes a timer circuit that enables real-time interrupt generation and time measurement. Each programmable timer PTC0-PTC2 has a timer value that is updated in response to a change in the count clock signal generated based on the internal system clock SCLK (for example, a falling timing that changes from a high level to a low level). If it is. The CTC 508 may incorporate, for example, an 8-bit programmable counter with 4 channels (PCC0 to PCC3). Each of the programmable counters PCC0 to PCC3 only needs to have its count value updated in response to a signal change of the internal system clock SCLK or occurrence of a timeout in any of the programmable counters PCC0 to PCC3. The CTC 508 may include a free-run counter used to randomly determine an extension time (variable setting time) for extending the security time for each system reset. Alternatively, such a free-run counter may be included in an internal circuit of the game control microcomputer 100 different from the CTC 508, such as a backup area of the RAM 507, for example.

  The random number circuit 509 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 is a circuit that generates numerical data that is a random value having a predetermined update range, such as a 16-bit random number. In this embodiment, on the main board 11 side, for example, a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a hit type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern type, as shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern and the random value MR5 for determining the normal display result are controlled so that they can be counted (updated). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers. Based on the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 509, the CPU 505 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 509, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 594 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating all or part of the random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by processing or updating the data. Alternatively, the CPU 505 counts (updates) a part of numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR5 by software using only the random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 594, for example, without using the random number circuit 509. You may make it do. As an example, numerical data extracted by the CPU 505 from the random number circuit 509 serving as hardware is processed by software to update the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, and other random values The numerical data indicating MR2 to MR5 may be updated by software by the CPU 505 using a random counter or the like.

  The random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is determined whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as a big hit game state, whether the variable display result is "small hit" or not. This is a random value used to determine whether or not to control the gaming state. For example, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result takes a value in the range of “0” to “65535”. The random number MR2 for determining the hit type determines whether the big hit type is a plurality of types (for example, “first big hit” or “second big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”, When the variable display result is “small hit”, this is a random value used for determining whether there are multiple types of small hit types (for example, “first small hit” or “second small hit”). For example, the random value MR2 for determining the hit type takes a value in the range of “0” to “99”.

  The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random value used to determine the variation pattern type in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, for example, “0”. A value in the range of “251” is taken. The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine one of a plurality of types of variation patterns in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol, for example, “0” to “ It takes a value in the range of “997”. The random value MR5 for determining the general-purpose display result is used for determining whether the variable display result in the general-purpose game by the normal symbol display 20 is “per-normal” or “unusual for general-purpose”. For example, it takes a value in the range of “3” to “13”. That is, the random value MR5 for determining the normal display result is a state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the variable display result in the normal game (normally This is used to determine whether or not to change the game ball from a state where it is open (such as an open state) to a state where the game ball can pass (enter) (such as an enlarged open state).

  FIG. 21 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the random number circuit 509. As shown in FIG. 21, the random number circuit 509 includes a frequency monitoring circuit 551, a clock flip-flop 552, a random number generation circuit 553, a start value setting circuit 554, a free-run counter 554A, a random number sequence change circuit 555, and a random number sequence change setting circuit. 556, latch flip-flops 557A and 557B, random number latch selectors 558A and 558B, and random number value registers 559A and 559B. The random value register 559A and the random value register 559B are a random value register R1D (address 2038H-2039H) and a random value register R2D included in the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. (Addresses 203AH-203BH).

  The frequency monitoring circuit 551 is a circuit for monitoring the input state of the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112 to the random number circuit 509 and detecting the occurrence of an abnormality. The frequency monitoring circuit 551 monitors, for example, an oscillation signal input to the random number external clock terminal ERC, and compares it with the internal system clock SCLK. When the frequency abnormality according to 18 (B) is detected, the bit number [4] of the internal information register CIF is set to “1”. In this embodiment, the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112 is input to the random number external clock terminal ERC.

  The clock flip-flop 552 is configured using, for example, a D-type flip-flop, and the random number clock RCLK from the random number external clock terminal ERC is input to the clock terminal CK. Further, in the clock flip-flop 552, the negative phase output terminal (inverted output terminal) Q bar is connected to the D input terminal. The random number update clock RGK is output from the positive phase output terminal (non-inverted output terminal) Q, while the latch clock RC0 is output from the negative phase output terminal (inverted output terminal) Q bar. In this case, when the signal state of the random number clock RCLK input to the clock terminal CK changes a predetermined state, the clock flip-flop 552 has a positive phase output terminal (non-inverted output terminal) Q and a negative phase output terminal ( Inverted output terminal) Changes the signal state in the output signal from the Q bar. For example, the clock flip-flop 552 rises when the signal state of the random number clock RCLK changes from a low level to a high level, or rises when the signal state of the random number clock RCLK changes from a high level to a low level. The input signal at the D input terminal is captured at any one of the falling timings. At this time, from the positive phase output terminal (non-inverted output terminal) Q, the input signal captured at the D input terminal is output without being inverted, while the negative phase output terminal (inverted output terminal) Q bar is output. From the input signal captured by the D input terminal is inverted and output. Thus, the random number update clock RGK having an oscillation frequency (for example, 10 MHz) that is ½ of the oscillation frequency (for example, 20 MHz) of the random number clock RCLK from the positive phase output terminal (non-inverted output terminal) Q of the clock flip-flop 552. Is output from the negative phase output terminal (inverted output terminal) Q bar, that is, the reverse phase signal (inverted signal) of the random number update clock RGK, that is, the same frequency as the random number update clock RGK and the phase of the random number update clock RGK is π. A different latch clock RC0 is output by (= 180 °).

  The random number update clock RGK output from the clock flip-flop 552 is input to the clock terminal of the random number generation circuit 553 and used for incrementing the count value in the random number generation circuit 553. The latch clock RC0 output from the clock flip-flop 552 is branched into the latch clock RC1 and the latch clock RC2 at the branch point BR1. Therefore, the latch clock RC1 and the latch clock RC2 have the same oscillation frequency, and the signal state changes with a common cycle. Here, examples of changes in the signal state in the latch clock RC1 and the latch clock RC2 include a rising edge that changes from a low level to a high level and a falling edge that changes from a high level to a low level. The latch clock RC1 is input to the clock terminal CK of the latch flip-flop 557A, and becomes a random number acquisition clock used to generate the start winning latch signal SL1. The latch clock RC2 is input to the clock terminal CK of the latch flip-flop 557B and becomes a random number acquisition clock used to generate the start winning latch signal SL2.

  Here, the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK and the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 111 are different from each other, and one of the oscillation frequencies is the other. It is never an integral multiple of the oscillation frequency. As an example, while the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK is 11.0 MHz, the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK may be 9.7 MHz. Therefore, both the random number update clock RGK and the latch clocks RC1 and RC2 are oscillation signals whose signal states change at a different period from the control clock CCLK supplied to the CPU 505. That is, the clock flip-flop 552 is based on the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112, and the random number update clock RGK for updating the count value, and the latch clock that serves as a plurality of random number acquisition clocks. As RC1 and RC2, oscillation signals whose signal states change with a period different from the control clock CCLK and the internal system clock SCLK (the control clock CCLK divided by two) are generated.

  The random number generation circuit 553 is composed of, for example, a 16-bit counter and the like, and based on an input such as a random number update clock RGK output from the clock flip-flop 552, a predetermined initial value within a predetermined range in which numerical data can be updated. It is a circuit that cyclically updates to a predetermined final value. For example, the random number generation circuit 553 responds to the falling edge of the random number update clock RGK, which is an input signal to a predetermined clock terminal, from the initial value set within the range from “0” to “65535” to “65535”. The numerical data is counted up so that “1” is added to “1”. Then, after counting up to “65535”, the numerical data is updated cyclically by counting up from “0” to a numerical value that becomes a final value that is 1 smaller than the initial value.

  The start value setting circuit 554 sets the start value in the count value generated by the random number generation circuit 553 in accordance with the bit value (see FIG. 17B) in the bit number [1-0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2. Set. For example, the start value setting circuit 554 sets the start value to the default value “0000H” if the bit number [1-0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is “00”, and if it is “10”. The value is set based on the ID number. If “01”, the value is set based on the count value in the free-run counter 554A that is changed every time the system is reset. If “11”, the ID number and the free-run counter 554A are set. Set to a value based on the count value. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 21, a random number circuit 509 includes a free-run counter 554A. When the start value is changed at every system reset, the count value of the free-run counter 554A is used as it is at the initial setting, or the count value is substituted into a predetermined arithmetic function (for example, a hash function). The start value may be determined at random by using the obtained value. The free-run counter 554A only needs to be backed up using a backup power source common to the backup location on the main board 11, such as a backup area in the RAM 507 of the game control microcomputer 100. Alternatively, the free-run counter 554A may be backed up by a power source provided separately from a backup power source used for a backup area or the like in the RAM 507. In this way, the free-run counter 554A is backed up by the backup power source, so that the count value in the free-run counter 554A is stored for a predetermined period even when the power supply is stopped.

  The free-run counter 554A is not limited to the one backed up by the backup power source. For example, when a system reset occurs, the count value of the free-run counter 554A is stored in a predetermined built-in register (for example, a random number start value register). May be backed up by a backup power source. Then, the initial value is randomly determined by using the stored value of the random number start value register as it is or by using the value obtained by substituting the stored value into a predetermined arithmetic function. Also good. In this case, the timing at which the count value in the free-run counter 554A is read and stored in the random number start value register is not limited to when a system reset occurs, but may be any predetermined timing. The free-run counter 554A may be a dedicated free-run counter built in the random number circuit 509 and used to randomly determine the start value of numerical data. That is, the free-run counter 554A may be provided as a separate configuration from the free-run counter used for random determination of the extension time when extending the security time. Alternatively, as a free-run counter 554A, a free-run counter incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100 but provided outside the random number circuit 509 and used for random determination of the extension time when extending the security time. A common one may be used. In this case, in the process of determining the start value of the numerical data and the process of randomly determining the extension time in the security time, for example, the calculation function for substituting the count value is different from each other, or one of the determinations is made In the process, the count value is used as it is, while in the other determination process, the value obtained by substituting the count value into a predetermined arithmetic function is used. It may be different.

  Thus, the free-run counter 554A is not limited to the one built in the random number circuit 509, and may be included in the CTC 508, for example. Alternatively, it may be included in an internal circuit of the game control microcomputer 100 different from the CTC 508, for example, a backup area of the RAM 507. The free-run counter 554A may be the same counter as the free-run counter used for randomly determining the extension time for extending the security time for each system reset, or provided separately. It may be a counter.

  The random number sequence change circuit 555 is a circuit that allows the permutation of numerical data generated by the random number generation circuit 553 to be changed to a permutation according to a predetermined random number update rule. For example, the random number sequence change circuit 555 executes bit scramble processing such as bit replacement or transposition in numerical data output from the random number generation circuit 553. Further, the random number sequence change circuit 555 can change the permutation of numerical data, for example, by changing a bit scramble key or a bit scramble table used for bit scramble processing.

  The random number sequence change setting circuit 556 changes the random number update rule in the random number sequence change circuit 555 according to the bit value (see FIG. 17A) in the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1. It is a circuit for setting. For example, if the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is “00”, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 sets the random number update rule not to change after the second round, while “01” If so, the random number update rule is changed in response to a change request by software after the second round, and if it is “10”, the random number update rule is automatically changed.

  When the random number update circuit 556 changes the random number update rule by software in response to the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 being “01”, FIG. Of the built-in registers included in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown, the random number update rule RDSC (address 2034H) is used to control the change of the random number update rule. FIG. 22A shows a configuration example of the random number sequence change register RDSC. FIG. 22B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of the random number sequence change request data stored in the random number sequence change register RDSC. The random number sequence change request data RDSC0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random number sequence change register RDSC indicates the presence / absence of a random number sequence change request when the random number update rule is changed by software. In the example shown in FIG. 22B, when the random number sequence change request is not made by software, the bit value of the random number sequence change request data RDSC0 is “0”. The bit value is “1”.

  FIG. 23 shows an operation example when the random number update rule is changed by software. In this case, when the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553 is cyclically updated from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value, the response is that the random number sequence change request data RDSC0 is “1”. Then, change the random number update rule. In the operation example shown in FIG. 23, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 is “0 → 1 →... → 65535”. Thereafter, it is assumed that “1” is written to the bit number [0] of the random number sequence change register RDSC at a predetermined timing by the CPU 505 executing the user program stored in the ROM 506.

  In response to the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 being “01”, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 reads the random number sequence change request data RDSC0 and the bit value is “1”. In response to "," a setting for changing the random number update rule is made. At this time, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556, according to the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553 reaching a predetermined final value, for example, any one of a plurality of types of random number update rules prepared in advance. The random number update rule is changed, for example, by selecting. In the operation example shown in FIG. 23, after the random number sequence change circuit 555 outputs numerical data “65535” corresponding to the final value in the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553, the random number sequence change circuit 555 responds to the random number sequence change request data RDSC0. Change the random number update rule. Thereafter, the random number sequence change circuit 555 outputs “65535 → 65534 →... → 0” as the random number sequence RSN according to the changed random number update rule. The random number sequence change register RDSC is initialized when the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 reads the random number sequence change request data RDSC0. Therefore, until the bit value “1” is written to the bit number [0] of the random number sequence change register RDSC again, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 is “65535 → 65534 →... → 0”. Become.

  When the CPU 505 executes the user program stored in the ROM 506 and the bit value “1” is written again to the bit number [0] of the random number sequence change register RDSC, the random number update rule is changed again. In the operation example shown in FIG. 23, when the random number sequence change circuit 555 outputs the numerical data “0” corresponding to the final value in the random number sequence RSN, the bit value “1” is written as the random number sequence change request data RDSC0. Change the random number update rule accordingly. Thereafter, the random number sequence changing circuit 555 outputs “0 → 2 →... → 65534 → 1 →... → 65535” as the random number sequence RSN according to the changed random number update rule.

  FIG. 24 shows an operation example when the random number update rule is automatically changed. In this case, in response to the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553 being cyclically updated from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 automatically changes the random number update rule. To change. In the operation example shown in FIG. 24, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 first is “0 → 1 →... → 65535”.

  When the random number sequence RSN output from the random number change circuit 555 reaches a predetermined final value, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 follows a predetermined order from among a plurality of types of update rules prepared in advance. The update rule may be changed by selecting the update rule. Alternatively, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 may change the update rule by selecting an arbitrary update rule from among a plurality of types of update rules. In the operation example shown in FIG. 24, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 becomes “65535 → 65534 →. Thereafter, due to the second change in the random number update rule, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 becomes “0 → 2 →... → 65534 → 1 →. In the operation example illustrated in FIG. 24, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 is “65534 → 0 →. When the fourth random number update rule change is performed, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 becomes “16383 → 49151 →... → 49150”. When the fifth random number update rule change is performed, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 becomes “4 → 3 →... → 465553”.

  Thus, the random number sequence change circuit 555 changes the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553 based on a random number update rule predetermined by the setting of the random number sequence change setting circuit 556, thereby A random number sequence RSN in which data is updated by a predetermined procedure can be output.

  Each of the latch flip-flops 557A and 557B is configured using, for example, a D-type flip-flop. In the latch flip-flop 557A, a wiring from the input port P0 included in the PIP 510 is connected to the D input terminal, and a wiring for transmitting the latch clock RC1 is connected to the clock terminal CK. In this embodiment, the first start winning signal SS1 from the first start port switch 22A is input to the input port P0. The latch flip-flop 557A takes in the first start winning signal SS1 in response to the falling edge of the latch clock RC1, and outputs it as the start winning latch signal SL1. Accordingly, in the latch flip-flop 557A, the first start winning signal SS1 is output as the start winning latch signal SL1 in synchronization with the falling edge of the latch clock RC1. In the latch flip-flop 557B, a wiring from the input port P1 included in the PIP 510 is connected to the D input terminal, and a wiring for transmitting the latch clock RC2 is connected to the clock terminal CK. In this embodiment, the second start winning signal SS2 from the second start port switch 22B is input to the input port P1. The latch flip-flop 557B takes in the second start winning signal SS2 in response to the falling edge of the latch clock RC2, and outputs it as the start winning latch signal SL2. As a result, the latch flip-flop 557B outputs the second start winning signal SS2 as the start winning latch signal SL2 in synchronization with the falling edge of the latch clock RC2.

  The first start winning signal SS1 and the second start winning signal SS2 are not limited to those directly transmitted from the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B. As an example, the time during which the output signal from the first start port switch 22A and the output signal from the second start port switch 22B are in the ON state is measured, and the measured time becomes a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms). Sometimes, a timer circuit for outputting the first start winning signal SS1 and the second starting winning signal SS2 may be provided.

  The random number latch selector 558A is a circuit that takes in the start winning latch signal SL1 transmitted from the latch flip-flop 557A and the random number latch request signal by software, and selectively outputs one as the random number latch signal LL1. The random number latch selector 558B is a circuit that takes in the start winning latch signal SL2 transmitted from the latch flip-flop 557B and the random number latch request signal by software, and selectively outputs one as the random number latch signal LL1. The random number latch selector 558A and the random number latch selector 558B are a random value fetch register RDLT (address 2032H) and a random number latch selection register RDLS among the built-in registers included in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. (Address 2030H) is used to control the output of the random number latch signal LL1 and the random number latch signal LL2. The random value acquisition register RDLT is a register used for acquiring numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 into the random value register 559A or the random value register 559B by software. The random number latch selection register RDLS receives the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 into the random number value register 559A or the random number value register 559B by software, or by signal input to the input ports P0 and P1. It is a register which shows the taking-in method of taking-in.

  FIG. 25A shows a configuration example of the random value fetch register RDLT. FIG. 25B shows an example of the setting contents in each bit of the random value take-in designation data stored in the random value take-in register RDLT. The random value acquisition specification data RDLT1 stored in the bit number [1] of the random value acquisition register RDLT indicates whether or not the random value acquisition specification for the random value register 559B serving as the random value register R2D is present. In the example shown in FIG. 25 (B), when the random number value acquisition specification for the random value register R2D is not specified by software, the bit value of the random value acquisition specification data RDLT1 is “0”, while the random value acquisition is not performed. The bit value is “1” when an instruction is included. The random value acquisition specification data RDLT0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random value acquisition register RDLT indicates whether or not a random value acquisition specification is given to the random value register 559A serving as the random value register R1D. In the example shown in FIG. 25 (B), when there is no designation of fetching a random number value for the random number register R1D by software, the bit value of the random number fetch designation data RDLT0 is “0”, while the random value fetching is performed. The bit value is “1” when an instruction is included.

  FIG. 26A shows a configuration example of the random number latch selection register RDLS. FIG. 26B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of random number latch selection data stored in the random number latch selection register RDLS. The random number latch selection data RDLS1 stored in the bit number [1] of the random number latch selection register RDLS indicates a method of taking in the random number value register 559B serving as the random number value register R2D. In the example shown in FIG. 26B, when the numerical value data that becomes the random number value is loaded into the random number value register R2D in response to the writing of the random number value loading designation data RDLT1 by the software, the bit value of the random number latch selection data RDLS1 is set to “ 0 ”. On the other hand, when the numerical value data to be a random number value is taken into the random value register R2D in response to the signal input to the input port P1, the bit value of the random number latch selection data RDLS1 is set to “1”. The random number latch selection data RDLS0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random number latch selection register RDLS indicates a method of taking in the random number value register 559A serving as the random number value register R1D. In the example shown in FIG. 26B, when the numerical value data that becomes the random number value is loaded into the random value register R1D in response to the writing of the random value fetch specification data RDLT0 by software, the bit value of the random number latch selection data RDLS0 is set to “ 0 ”. On the other hand, when the numerical value data to be a random number value is taken into the random value register R1D in response to the signal input to the input port P0, the bit value of the random number latch selection data RDLS0 is set to “1”.

  The random value registers 559A and 559B are registers for storing numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence changing circuit 555 as random number values. FIGS. 27A and 27B show a configuration example of a random value register 559A serving as the random value register R1D. FIG. 27A shows the lower byte R1D (L) of the random value register R1D, and FIG. 27B shows the upper byte R1D (H) of the random value register R1D. FIGS. 27C and 27D show a configuration example of a random value register 559B serving as the random value register R2D. FIG. 27C shows the lower byte R2D (L) of the random value register R2D, and FIG. 27D shows the upper byte R2D (H) of the random value register R2D. Each of the random value registers 559A and 559B is a 16-bit (2-byte) register and can store a 16-bit random value.

  The random value register 559A takes in the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 as a random value in response to the random number latch signal LL1 supplied from the random number latch selector 558A being turned on. Store with. When the register read signal RRS1 supplied from the CPU 505 is turned on, the random value register 559A is in a readable (enable) state and outputs stored numerical data to an internal bus or the like. On the other hand, when the register read signal RRS1 is in the off state, the same value (for example, “65535H” or the like) is always output, and the reading is disabled (disabled). Further, the random value register 559A may be in a state in which the register read signal RRS1 cannot be received when the random number latch signal LL1 is in the ON state. Further, the random number register 559A may be configured to be in a state in which the random number latch signal LL1 cannot be received when the register read signal RRS1 is in the on state before the random number latch signal LL1 is in the on state. Good.

  The random value register 559B takes in the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 as a random value in response to the random number latch signal LL2 supplied from the random number latch selector 558B being turned on. Store with. When the register read signal RRS2 supplied from the CPU 505 is turned on, the random value register 559B enters a readable (enable) state and outputs stored numerical data to an internal bus or the like. On the other hand, when the register read signal RRS2 is in the OFF state, the same value (for example, “65535H” or the like) is always output, and the reading is disabled (disabled). Further, the random value register 559B may be in a state in which the register read signal RRS2 cannot be received when the random number latch signal LL2 is in the ON state. Further, the random value register 559B may be configured to be in a state in which the random number latch signal LL2 cannot be received when the register read signal RRS2 is in the on state before the random number latch signal LL2 is in the on state. Good.

  The random value register 559A and the random value register 559B are a random number latch flag register RDFM (address 2033H) and a random number interrupt control register RDIC (of the built-in registers included in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. Address 2031H) and enable operation management and interrupt control at the time of random number latching. The random number latch flag register RDFM is a register for storing a random number latch flag indicating whether or not numerical data to be a random number value is latched corresponding to each of the random number value register 559A and the random number value register 559B. For example, in the random number latch flag register RDFM, data indicating the state (ON or OFF) of the random number latch flag corresponding to each of the random number value register 559A and the random number value register 559B is stored, and numerical values are stored in the random number value register 559A and the random number value register 559B. The corresponding random number latch flag (bit value data) is turned on (first value) when data is captured and stored, and storage of new numerical data is restricted, while the random value register 559A and the random value register When the numerical data stored in 559B is read, the corresponding random number latch flag (bit value data) is turned off (second value), and storage of new numerical data is permitted. The random number interrupt control register RDIC is a register that sets permission / prohibition of an interrupt that occurs when numerical data that becomes a random value is latched in the random value register 559A or the random value register 559B.

  FIG. 28A shows a configuration example of the random number latch flag register RDFM. FIG. 28B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of random number latch flag data stored in the random number latch flag register RDFM. The random number latch flag data RDFM1 stored in the bit number [1] of the random number latch flag register RDFM becomes a random number latch flag indicating whether or not numerical data has been taken into the random number value register 559B serving as the random number value register R2D. In the example shown in FIG. 28B, when the numerical value data is not taken into the random value register R2D (no random value is taken), the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 is “0” (second value). While the random number latch flag is cleared to OFF state, when numeric data is fetched (random number fetched), the bit value is "1" (first value) and the random number latch flag is on Set to The random number latch flag data RDFM0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random number latch flag register RDFM is a random number latch flag indicating whether or not numerical data has been taken into the random number value register 559A serving as the random number value register R1D. In the example shown in FIG. 28B, when the numerical value data is not taken into the random value register R1D (no random value is taken), the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is “0” (second value). While the random number latch flag is cleared to OFF state, when numeric data is fetched (random number fetched), the bit value is "1" (first value) and the random number latch flag is on Set to

  When each random number latch flag is on, storage of new numerical data in the random value register R1D or the random number register R2D associated with each random number latch flag is restricted (prohibited). That is, when the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 indicating whether or not the numerical value data is taken into the random number value register R1D is “1” and the random number latch flag is in the ON state, the numerical value stored in the random number value register R1D Data cannot be changed, and storage (import) of new numerical data is restricted (prohibited). Further, when the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 indicating whether or not the random number value data is taken into the random number value register R2D is “1” and the random number latch flag is in the ON state, the random number value register R2D is stored in the random number value register R2D. Numerical data cannot be changed, and storage (import) of new numerical data is restricted (prohibited). On the other hand, when each random number latch flag is off, storage of new numerical data in the random number value register R1D or the random number value register R2D associated with each random number latch flag is permitted. That is, when the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is “0” and the random number latch flag is in the OFF state, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D can be changed, and new numerical data is stored ( Import) is allowed. Further, when the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 is “0” and the random number latch flag is in the OFF state, the numerical data stored in the random value register R2D can be changed, and new numerical data can be stored ( Import) is allowed.

  Note that the bit values of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 and the random number latch flag data RDFM1 are set to "0" to clear the corresponding random number latch flag to the off state, while being set to "1" to the on state. It is not limited to a positive logic type, and it may be a negative logic type that turns on when a corresponding random number latch flag is turned off when it is “1”. That is, each random number latch flag is turned on when numerical data is stored in the corresponding random value register R1D or random value register R2D, and the storage of new numerical data is restricted (prohibited), while the corresponding random value Any register that is turned off when reading of the register R1D or the random value register R2D is performed and storage of new numerical data is permitted.

  FIG. 29A shows a configuration example of the random number interrupt control register RDIC. FIG. 29B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of random number interrupt control data stored in the random number interrupt control register RDIC. The random number interrupt control data RDIC1 stored in the bit number [1] of the random number interrupt control register RDIC allows or prohibits an interrupt that occurs when numerical data is taken into the random value register 559B serving as the random value register R2D. Indicates the interrupt control setting for In the example shown in FIG. 29 (B), when the interrupt at the time of fetching into the random number value register R2D is prohibited (interrupt disabled), the bit value of the random number interrupt control data RDIC1 is set to “0”, while this interrupt is When enabling (interrupt enabled), the bit value is set to “1”. The random number interrupt control data RDIC0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random number interrupt control register RDIC allows or prohibits an interrupt that occurs when numerical data is taken into the random number value register 559A serving as the random number value register R1D. Indicates the interrupt control setting for In the example shown in FIG. 29B, when the interrupt at the time of fetching into the random value register R1D is prohibited (interrupt disabled), the bit value of the random number interrupt control data RDIC0 is set to “0”, while this interrupt is When enabling (interrupt enabled), the bit value is set to “1”.

  In the configuration example shown in FIG. 13, a random number circuit 509 is built in the game control microcomputer 100. On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 30, the random number circuit 509 may be externally attached to the game control microcomputer 100 as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. In this case, the first start winning signal SS1 from the first start port switch 22A is branched inside the switch circuit 114, and one is input to the input port P0 of the PIP 510 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, and the other May be input to the D input terminal of the latch flip-flop 557A included in the random number circuit 509. Further, the second start winning signal SS2 from the second start port switch 22B is branched inside the switch circuit 114, and one is input to the input port P1 of the PIP 510 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, and the other is input. The random number circuit 509 may be input to the D input terminal of the latch flip-flop 557B. Between the game control microcomputer 100, for example, the frequency monitor circuit 551 provided in the random number circuit 509 includes the internal system clock SCLK output from the clock circuit 502 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 via the system clock output terminal CLKO. The random value register R1D and the random value register R2D are input to the clock flip-flop 552 or via an address bus, a data bus, a control signal line, etc. connected to the external bus interface 501 provided in the game control microcomputer 100. The numerical data stored in the data may be read out.

  In addition, when the random number circuit 509 is externally attached to the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 30, the random number value register R1D and the random number value register R2D are selected according to the state (ON / OFF) of each random number latch flag. It is only necessary to limit (prohibit) or permit storage of new numerical data in the. Among the built-in registers shown in FIG. 15B, for example, the random number latch selection register RDLS, the random number interrupt control register RDIC, the random value fetch register RDLT, the random number latch flag register RDFM, the random number sequence change register RDSC, the random number value register R1D, random Various registers used by the random number circuit 509, such as the numerical register R2D, may not be built in the game control microcomputer 100, but may be built in the random number circuit 509 externally attached to the game control microcomputer 100. . In this case, the CPU 505 of the game control microcomputer 100 may write and read various registers built in the random number circuit 509 via, for example, the external bus interface 501 or the like.

  A PIP 510 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 13 is, for example, a 6-bit input dedicated port, and an input port P0 to input port P2 serving as a dedicated terminal, and an input port P3 to input port serving as a function shared terminal. P5 is included. The input port P3 is also used as an external maskable interrupt terminal XINT connected to the CPU 505 or the like. The input port P4 is also used as an external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI connected to the CPU 505 or the like. The input port P5 is also used as the first channel reception terminal RXA used by the serial communication circuit 511. The use setting of the input port P3 to the input port P5 is instructed by the function setting KFCS stored in the program management area.

  The PIP 510 uses the input port register PI (address 2090H) among the built-in registers included in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. Do. The input port register PI is a register that stores a bit value indicating the input state of the external signal corresponding to each of the input port P0 to the input port P5.

  FIG. 31A shows a configuration example of the input port register PI. FIG. 31B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of the input port data stored in the input port register PI. The input port data PI5 stored in the bit number [5] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P5 that is also used as the first channel receiving terminal RXA. The input port data PI4 stored in the bit number [4] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P4 that is also used as the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI. The input port data PI3 stored in the bit number [3] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P3 that is also used as the external maskable interrupt terminal XINT. The input port data PI2 stored in the bit number [2] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P2. The input port data PI1 stored in the bit number [1] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P1. The input port data PI0 stored in the bit number [0] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P0.

  The serial communication circuit 511 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 is a circuit that handles communication data in, for example, full duplex, asynchronous, standard NRZ (Non Return to Zero) format. As an example, the serial communication circuit 511 can only transmit serial data in a single direction between the external communication circuit and the first channel transmission / reception circuit capable of transmitting and receiving serial data bidirectionally with the external circuit. And a second channel transmission circuit. The first channel transmission / reception circuit included in the serial communication circuit 511 may be used for bidirectional serial communication with the payout control microcomputer 150 mounted on the payout control board 15. The second channel transmission circuit included in the serial communication circuit 511 may be used for unidirectional (only transmission) serial communication with the effect control microcomputer 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. Thereby, the signal input with respect to the main board | substrate 11 from the production control board | substrate 12 side can be prohibited, and an improper act can be prevented.

  In the serial communication circuit 511, for example, four types of errors, such as an overrun error, break code error, framing error, and parity error, may occur when communication data is received. As long as it can be generated. The overrun error is an error that occurs when the next communication data is received before the received communication data is read by the user program. A break code error is an error that occurs when a predetermined break code is detected during reception of communication data. The framing error is an error that occurs when the stop bit in the received communication data is “0”. The parity error is an error that occurs when the parity of the received communication data does not match a predetermined parity when the parity function is set to be used.

  The serial communication circuit 511 may include a first interrupt control circuit and a second interrupt control circuit. The first interrupt control circuit is a circuit for managing an interrupt generation factor in the first channel transmission / reception circuit included in the serial communication circuit 511 and controlling a communication interrupt request. Interrupts controlled by the first interrupt control circuit include a first channel transmission interrupt and a first channel reception interrupt. The first channel transmission interrupt includes an interruption due to transmission completion and an interruption due to transmission data empty. The first channel reception interrupt includes an interruption due to reception data full and an interruption due to the occurrence of a reception error such as a break code error, an overrun error, a framing error, and a parity error. The second interrupt control circuit is a circuit for managing an interrupt generation factor in the second channel receiving circuit included in the serial communication circuit 511 and controlling a communication interrupt request. The interrupt controlled by the second interrupt control circuit is a second channel transmission interrupt. The second channel transmission interrupt includes an interruption due to transmission completion and an interruption due to transmission data empty.

  The address decoding circuit 512 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 is a circuit for decoding each functional block in the game control microcomputer 100 and decoding a chip select signal which is a decode signal for an external device. . By the chip select signal, an internal circuit of the game control microcomputer 100 or an external device as a peripheral device is selectively operated effectively and can be accessed from the CPU 505.

  In the ROM 506 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, in addition to the game control user program and the control code to be the security check program 506A, various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game, etc. Is stored. For example, the ROM 506 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 505 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. In addition, the ROM 506 has a variation pattern for storing a plurality of types of table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 505 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and a variation pattern of decorative symbols. Table data constituting the table is stored.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variation pattern of a decorative design. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is “small hit” or a variable display result is “big hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”) and is variable. A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the display result is “losing” or “small hit” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 32, in this embodiment, variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4 are prepared in advance as non-reach variation patterns. Further, as the reach variation pattern, variation pattern PA2-1, variation pattern PA2-2, variation pattern PB2-1, variation pattern PB2-2, variation pattern PA3-1, variation pattern PA3-2, variation pattern PB3-1, variation A pattern PB3-2 is prepared in advance. As the big hit fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, the fluctuation pattern PA4-1, fluctuation pattern PA4-2, fluctuation pattern PB4-1, fluctuation pattern PB4-2, fluctuation pattern PA5-1, fluctuation A pattern PA5-2, a fluctuation pattern PB5-1, and a fluctuation pattern PB5-2 are prepared in advance.

  FIG. 33 shows the decorative pattern variation pattern type in this embodiment. Each variation pattern shown in FIG. 32 is included in at least one variation pattern type among the plurality of variation pattern types shown in FIG. That is, each variation pattern type may be configured to include one or a plurality of variation patterns classified (grouped) based on, for example, an effect operation performed during variable display of decorative symbols. As an example, a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern in which a variable display state of a decorative design does not become a reach state by classifying (grouping) a plurality of variation patterns according to the type of reach effect (effect mode), and a variation with normal reach What is necessary is just to divide into the fluctuation pattern classification in which the pattern is included, and the fluctuation pattern classification in which the fluctuation pattern with a super reach (super reach α or super reach β) is included. As another example, categorizing (grouping) multiple variation patterns according to the presence or absence of “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects and the number of executions of pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) to execute “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects A variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that is not included, a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern in which the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is 1 in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, and “pseudo-continuous” What is necessary is just to divide into the variation pattern classification in which the variation pattern which makes the frequency | count of execution of a pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation | variation (revariation) 2 or more is included in the variable display effect of this. As another example, a plurality of variation patterns may be classified (grouped) according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as “pseudo ream” or “slip”, or the variable display time of a decorative design. Among the plurality of variation pattern types, there may be one configured to include a common variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 33, the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-3 are prepared in advance in correspondence with the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. Yes. In addition, the variable pattern type CA2-1 to the variable pattern type CA2- corresponds to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach” or the variable display result is “small hit”. 4 is prepared in advance. Corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-3 are prepared in advance.

  The variation pattern type CA1-1 is a variation pattern type of “no shortening” in which the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is not shortened and variable display effects such as “pseudo-ream” and “slip” are not executed. , A variation pattern previously associated with “no shortening” is included. For example, when the total reserved memory number is “3” or more in the normal state, or when the total reserved memory number is “1” or more in the probability changing state or the short time state, the variation pattern type CA1-2 is, The variable display time of the decorative symbol is shortened, and the variation pattern type of “with shortening” in which a specific effect such as “pseudo-ream” or “slip” is not executed. Contains. The variation pattern type corresponding to the case where the variable display time is shortened in the normal state and the variation pattern type corresponding to the case where the variable display time is shortened in the probability variation state or the short time state, It may be provided separately. Further, in the normal state, the variation pattern type corresponding to the case where the total reserved memory number is “3” to “5” and the variable display time is shortened, and the total reserved memory number is “6” to “8”. The variation pattern type corresponding to the case where the variable display time is shortened may be provided separately. The variation pattern type CA1-3 is a variation pattern type of “slide, pseudo-continuity” in which a specific effect of “pseudo-run” or “slip” is executed when the variable display mode is “non-reach”. , A pseudo-ream ”is included in advance.

  The variation pattern type CA2-1 includes a normal reach that is a normal reach effect after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state without executing the “pseudo-ream” specific effect, and the reach effect ends. It is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (lack / small hit) pseudo-ream” that derives and displays a definite decorative symbol of reach combination, and a variation pattern pre-associated with “normal reach (lack / small hit) pseudo-ream” Contains. In the variation pattern type CA2-2, the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the specific effect of “pseudo ream” is one, and the reach display is performed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach state. Is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (losing / small hit) pseudo-continuous fluctuation once”, which displays a definite decorative symbol of reach combination when ending, “normal reach (losing / small hit) pseudo-continuous fluctuation once” Are included in advance.

  In the variation pattern type CA2-3, the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) in the “pseudo-ream” specific rendering is two times, and the reach display is performed with the normal reach after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state. Is the variation pattern type of “normal reach (losing / small hit) pseudo-continuous fluctuation 2 times”, which derives and displays a definite decorative symbol of reach combination when “end” is finished, and “normal reach (losing / small hit) pseudo-continuous fluctuation 2 times” Are included in advance. Fluctuation pattern types CA2-4 are accompanied by super reach (super reach α or super reach β) after the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach state, and when the reach production ends, the definite decorative symbols of the reach combination are derived and displayed. The variation pattern type of “super reach (losing / small hit)” includes a variation pattern associated with “super reach (losing / small hit)” in advance.

  In this embodiment, when the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) in the special symbol game is “small hit”, “left” and “ The same decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R, while the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L are displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display portion 5C. A decorative pattern different from 5R is derived and displayed. That is, the finalized decorative symbol for the small hit combination is a finalized decorative symbol for the reach combination. Therefore, a common variation pattern can be used when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach” and when the variable display result is “small hit”. On the other hand, in the case of the confirmed decorative pattern of the small hit combination, the same decorative pattern is displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R in the same manner as the confirmed decorative pattern of the big hit combination. The symbols may be derived and displayed together. In this case, a common variation pattern may be used for the case where the variable display result is “small hit” and the case where the variable display result is “big hit”. Or, when the variable display result is “small hit”, the variable display result is “lost” and the variable display mode is “reach”, or the variable display result is “big hit” Different dedicated variation patterns may be used. In this case, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit” may be prepared in advance.

  In the variation pattern type CA3-1, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is not executed, but the normal display is performed after the variable symbol display state of the decorative pattern is set to the reach state, and when the reach effect ends, the definite decoration of the jackpot combination is determined. It is a variation pattern type of “no normal reach (big hit) quasi-continuous” for deriving and displaying a symbol, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “no normal reach (big hit) quasi-continuous”. In the variation pattern type CA3-2, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, and then the normal reach is involved. Is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (big hit) quasi-ream” and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “normal reach (big hit) quasi-ream”. Fluctuation pattern type CA3-3 is a “super reach (big hit)” that displays a definite decorative symbol of a big hit combination when super reach is included after the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, and the reach effect is finished. It is a variation pattern type, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “super reach (big hit)”.

  FIG. 34 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 130 stored in the ROM 506. The special figure display result determination table 130 is variable in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol that is the display result is derived and displayed, whether or not the variable display result is controlled as a big hit gaming state as a “big hit”, and the variable display result is controlled as a small hit gaming state as a “small hit” It is a table referred to in order to determine whether to perform based on the random number value MR1 for a special figure display result determination. In the special figure display result determination table 130, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. ing. In the special figure display result decision table 130, the table data indicating the decision value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result indicates whether or not the special figure display result is set to “big hit” and controlled to the big hit gaming state. It is data for decision assigned to the decision result.

  In this embodiment, whether the game is a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Regardless, the special figure display result determination table 130 is used to determine the special figure display result. On the other hand, depending on whether the game is a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Thus, determination tables having different allocations of determination values may be prepared. As an example, in the special figure game using the first special figure, the decision value is set so that the special figure display result is determined as “small hit” at a higher rate than the special figure game using the second special figure. An allocated table may be used.

  In this embodiment, the gaming state is controlled to the short-time state after the jackpot gaming state ends, and is not controlled to the probability variation state. On the other hand, in the case where the control is changed to the probability change state after the big hit gaming state, the probability change flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 592 is turned on in the special figure display result determination table 130. If the probability variation flag is OFF, more decision values may be set to be assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” than when the probability variation flag is OFF. When the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability variation state, the probability variation flag is turned on. On the other hand, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a short time state, the probability variation flag is turned off. As a result, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is “big hit” and controlling to the big hit gaming state is higher than in the normal state or the short time state. Become. That is, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probable change state, the determination data is a big hit gaming state so that the probability that it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state is higher than in the normal state or the short time state. It may be assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control.

  FIG. 35 shows a configuration example of a hit type determination table stored in the ROM 506. In this embodiment, a jackpot type determination table 131A shown in FIG. 35 (A) and a jackpot type determination table 131B shown in FIG. 35 (B) are prepared in advance as the hit type determination table. The jackpot type determination table 131A, when it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state with the special figure display result as “big hit”, based on the random number value MR2 for determining the hit type, a plurality of jackpot types (“first big hit”). Or “second big hit”). When the small hit type determination table 131B determines that the special figure display result is “small hit” and is controlled to the small hit gaming state, a plurality of small hit types (“ This table is referred to in order to determine either “first small hit” or “second small hit”).

  In the jackpot type determination table 131A, whether the variation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 595 shown in FIG. 42 is “1” or “2”. Accordingly, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for determining the hit type is assigned to a plurality of types of big hit types such as “first big hit” and “second big hit”. Here, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “1” when the special figure game using the first special figure is started on the first special symbol display device 4A when the first start condition is satisfied. Thus, “2” is set when the second special symbol display device 4B starts the special figure game using the second special figure when the second start condition is satisfied. The jackpot type determination table 131A converts the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 595, into the jackpot type determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the hit type. Correspondingly, table data (setting data) for setting to “0” or “1” is included.

  In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table 131A shown in FIG. 35A, it is a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Depending on whether the game is a special figure game using the figure, the assignment of the decision value to each jackpot type is different. That is, in the special figure game using the first special figure, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of kinds at a different rate from the special figure game using the second special figure. On the other hand, regardless of whether the game is a special game using the first special figure or a special game using the second special figure, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types at the same rate. As described above, a table to which a decision value is assigned may be used.

  In the small hit type determination table 131B, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for determining the hit type, depending on whether the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”. It is assigned to a plurality of types of small hit types such as “first small hit” and “second small hit”. The small hit type determination table 131B uses the small hit type buffer value, which is a stored value of the small hit type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 595, to the small hit type determined based on the random number MR2 for determining the hit type. Corresponding to the type, table data (setting data) for setting to “0” or “1” is included.

  In the setting example of the small hit type determination table 131B shown in FIG. 35B, the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B by the second special symbol display device 4B. Depending on whether the game is a special figure game using a special figure, the assignment of the decision value to each small hit type is different. That is, in the special figure game using the first special figure, the small hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of kinds at a different rate from the special figure game using the second special figure. On the other hand, regardless of whether the game is a special game using the first special figure or a special game using the second special figure, the small hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types at the same rate. As described above, a table to which a decision value is assigned may be used.

  In this embodiment, by referring to the special figure display result determination table 130 based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the special figure display result is expressed as “big hit”, “small hit”, Decide which of “Lose”. When the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit”, the big hit type is set to “first big hit” by referring to the big hit type determination table 131A based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the hit type. Alternatively, it is determined as one of a plurality of types such as “second big hit”. When the special figure display result is determined to be “small hit”, the small hit type is set to “first” by referring to the small hit type determination table 131B based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for determining the hit type. It is determined to be one of a plurality of types such as “one small hit” or “second small hit”. On the other hand, whether the special figure display result is “hit” or “lost” using the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result based on the numerical data read from the random number circuit 509. When the special figure display result is determined to be “hit”, the special figure display result is set to “big hit” or “small hit” using numerical data indicating a random number value different from the random value MR1. You may make it determine in any one.

  Further, in this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 8B, the small hit type is associated with the V-winning round content, and the game ball that has entered the variable winning device 40 is in the specific area 49. The execution content of the round in the big hit gaming state based on the occurrence of the V winning through passing through is determined to one of a plurality of types by determining the small hit type by referring to the small hit type determination table 131B . On the other hand, by using numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value based on the numerical data read from the random number circuit 509, the execution content of the round in the big hit gaming state based on the occurrence of the V winning is determined. Also good. As an example, when a game ball that has passed through the specific area 49 is detected by the specific area switch 24, numerical data indicating a round decision random value set based on the numerical data read from the random number circuit 509 is acquired. By referring to a round determination table prepared in advance, the execution content of the round in the big hit gaming state may be determined as one of a plurality of types.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 8B, the small hit type is associated with the bonus release time and the number of releases, and the bonus opening / closing operation executed in the small hit gaming state. The number of times that the “left” and “right” accessory entrances 31L and 31R are opened and the number of times they are opened are determined by referring to the small hit type determination table 131B and determining the small hit type. Decide on one of the types. On the other hand, the accessory release time and the number of releases may be determined using numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value based on the numerical data read from the random number circuit 509. As an example, based on numerical data read from the random number circuit 509 when a game ball that has passed through the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening is detected by the first start opening switch 22A or the second start opening switch 22B. The numerical value data indicating the set random number for determining the opening / closing operation of the accessory is acquired, and by referring to the prepared accessory opening / closing operation determination table, the opening time and the number of releases of the accessory in the opening / closing operation of the accessory May be determined as one of a plurality of types.

  36 and 37 show a configuration example of a variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 506. FIG. In this embodiment, as the variation pattern type determination table, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 133A shown in FIG. 36 (A), the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133B shown in FIG. 36 (B), and FIG. ), A loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C and a loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 133D shown in FIG. 37B are prepared in advance.

  The jackpot variation pattern type determination table 133A, when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern type is changed according to the determination result of the jackpot type. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the numerical value MR3. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 133A, a numerical value (which is compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type depending on whether the determination result of the jackpot type is “first jackpot” or “second jackpot” ( Determined value) is assigned to any one of the variation pattern types CA3-1 to CA3-3. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 133A, the determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern type differs depending on which of the plurality of types of jackpot types is determined. Also good. For example, depending on whether the big hit type is “first big hit” or “second big hit”, the allocation of the decision values to the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-3 may be different. Accordingly, the degree of expectation as to whether the jackpot type is “first jackpot” or “second jackpot” varies depending on which variable pattern type includes variable patterns to be displayed. be able to.

  Further, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 133A, there may be a portion in which a determination value is assigned to a different variation pattern type depending on which of a plurality of types of jackpot types is determined. For example, when the big hit type is “first big hit”, the determined value is assigned to a predetermined fluctuation pattern type (any one of the fluctuation pattern type CA3-1 to the fluctuation pattern type CA3-3). Thus, when the big hit type is “second big hit”, it may be set so that the determined value is not assigned to the predetermined variation pattern. Alternatively, when the big hit type is “first big hit”, the determined value is not assigned to the predetermined fluctuation pattern type, while when the big hit type is “second big hit”, the predetermined fluctuation You may set so that a decision value may be assigned to a pattern. As a result, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the jackpot type when the special figure display result is “big hit”.

  When the big hit type is determined as “first big hit” or “second big hit”, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probable change state, or a short-time state. The assignment of the decision value to each variation pattern type may be made different. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same fluctuation | variation pattern classification can be varied according to which of a plurality of types of gaming states. Further, when the big hit type is determined to be “first big hit” or “second big hit”, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probable change state, or a short-time state The determination value may be assigned to different variation pattern types. Thereby, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states.

  Regardless of whether the big hit type is determined as “first big hit” or “second big hit”, a common determination value may be assigned to each variation pattern type. In this case, the degree of expectation as to whether the big hit type is “first big hit” or “second big hit” varies depending on which variable pattern type includes variable pattern execution. do not do.

  The small hit variation pattern type determination table 133B determines the variation pattern type according to the determination result of the small hit type when the special figure display result is determined to be “small hit” (preliminary determination). This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR3. In the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133B, it is compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variable pattern type depending on whether the determination result of the small hit type is “first small hit” or “second small hit”. The numerical value (determined value) to be assigned is assigned to one of the fluctuation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4. In the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133B, the determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern type varies depending on which of the plurality of small hit types is determined. It may be. For example, depending on whether the small hit type is “first small hit” or “second small hit”, the allocation of the decision values to the variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4 may be different. That's fine. As a result, the degree of expectation as to whether the small hit type is “first small hit” or “second small hit” depending on which variable pattern type includes variable pattern execution. Can be different.

  Further, in the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133B, there may be a portion in which a determination value is assigned to a different variation pattern type depending on which of a plurality of small hit types is determined. Thus, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the small hit type when the special figure display result is “small hit”. In addition, when the small hit type is determined as either “first small hit” or “second small hit”, whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probable change state, or a short-time state Depending on, the assignment of the decision value to each variation pattern type may be made different. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same fluctuation | variation pattern classification can be varied according to which of a plurality of types of gaming states. Depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probable change state, or a short-time state when the small hit type is determined as “first small hit” or “second small hit” Thus, the determined values may be assigned to different variation pattern types. Thereby, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states.

  Regardless of whether the small hit type is determined as “first small hit” or “second small hit”, a common determination value may be assigned to each variation pattern type. In this case, depending on which variation pattern type includes variable pattern execution, the small hit type is expected to be either “first small hit” or “second small hit”. The degree does not change.

  The loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 133D indicate that the change pattern type is determined when the special figure display result is determined to be “lost” (predetermined). This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. Here, the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C is selected as a use table when the gaming state is the normal state, for example. On the other hand, the loss variation pattern type determination table (medium time reduction) 133D is selected as a use table when time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed in the time reduction state, for example. Even when time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed in the probability variation state, the loss variation pattern type determination table (medium time reduction) 133D may be selected as the use table.

  In the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (during short time) 133D, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type according to the total reserved storage number ) Is assigned to any one of the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-3 and the variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4. In the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 133D, the determined values are assigned to the respective variation pattern types so that the ratios determined for the respective variation pattern types are different from each other. There is a part that. This makes it possible to vary the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the time-short state or the probability variation state, and whether the time reduction control is performed. it can. Note that in the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (during short time) 133D, there may be portions where determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types. As a result, different variation pattern types can be determined depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the time-short state or the probability variation state, and whether or not the time reduction control is performed.

  In this embodiment, by referring to either the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C or the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 133D, the variation pattern type CA1-1 to the variation pattern type CA1- 3 or variation pattern type CA2-1 to variation pattern type CA2-4. Here, as shown in FIG. 33, the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-3 are the variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. It is. The variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4 are variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach”. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern type based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type with reference to the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time medium) 133D, It is possible to determine whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state.

  In the setting example of the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 133D shown in FIGS. 37A and 37B, the value of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type Is any one of “230” to “251”, a variation pattern type CA2 in which at least a variation pattern with super reach (super reach α or super reach β) is classified regardless of the gaming state or the total number of reserved memories. -4. That is, when the variable display result is determined to be “losing”, at least a part of the determined values corresponding to the variation pattern types CA2-4 into which the variation pattern with super reach is classified is at the start of variable display. The same decision value is set regardless of the total number of pending storages.

  In the setting example of the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C shown in FIG. 37A, when the total number of reserved memories is “0” to “2”, “220” to “229”. When the determined value is also assigned to the variation pattern type CA2-4, and the total number of reserved memories is “3” to “5”, the determined values “225” to “229” are also assigned to the variation pattern type CA2-4. Assigned. In addition, in the setting example of the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 133D illustrated in FIG. 37B, when the total number of reserved storage is “0”, the determination values “225” to “229” also vary. It is assigned to pattern type CA2-4. As described above, the decision values corresponding to the variation pattern types CA2-4 in which the specific variation pattern with super reach is classified may include a decision value different from the same decision value. It suffices that at least some of the determined values are the same determined value. On the other hand, only the same decision value may be assigned to the variation pattern types CA2-4 in which specific variation patterns with super reach are classified, and decision values other than the same decision value may not be assigned.

  In the setting example of the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C shown in FIG. 37A, when the total number of reserved storage is any one of “0” to “2”, the variation pattern type CA1-2 is set. On the other hand, when the determined value is not assigned to the variable pattern type CA1-2 when the total reserved storage number is any of “3” to “5” and “6” to “8” A value has been assigned. In addition, when the total number of reserved memories is any one of “6” to “8”, a larger number of determination values is obtained than when the total number of reserved memories is any one of “3” to “5”. It is assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2.

  In the setting example of the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 133D shown in FIG. 37B, when the total number of reserved storage is “0”, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2. On the other hand, when the total number of reserved memories is “1” or “2” to “8”, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2. In addition, when the total number of reserved memories is any one of “2” to “8”, a larger number of determination values are assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2 than when the total number of reserved memories is “1”. Assigned.

  Here, in the variation pattern type CA1-2, a variation pattern with a shortened special pattern variation time of 3000 ms (milliseconds) corresponding to the variable display result “losing” and the variable display mode “non-reach”. PA1-2 is included (see FIG. 38). In other words, the variation pattern PA1-2 included in the variation pattern type CA1-2 is a variation pattern in which the decorative display variable display state does not become the reach state. It is a fluctuation pattern for shortening in which the figure fluctuation time is shortened. In the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C that is referred to in the normal state such as when the game state is a normal state, the total number of reserved memories at the start of variable display is any of “0” to “2”. If the determination value corresponding to the variation pattern PA1-2 is not set and the total reserved memory number is any of “3” to “5”, the total reserved memory number is “ In the case of any of “6” to “8”, a large number of decision values corresponding to the variation pattern PA1-2 is set. Further, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 133D that is referred to when shortening, such as when the time shortening control is performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, the total number of reserved storage at the start of variable display is “0”. If the determined value corresponding to the variation pattern PA1-2 is not set and the total reserved memory number is “1”, the total reserved memory number is any of “2” to “8”. In this case, a large number of determination values corresponding to the variation pattern PA1-2 are set.

  In this embodiment, even in the setting example of the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133B shown in FIG. 36B, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is any of “230” to “251”. If so, it is determined to be a variation pattern type CA2-4 into which variation patterns involving at least super reach (super reach α or super reach β) are classified. As described above, even when the variable display result is determined to be “small hit”, at least some of the determined values corresponding to the variation pattern types CA2-4 into which the variation pattern with super reach is classified are determined to be the same. Value is set.

  FIG. 38 shows a configuration example of the variation pattern determination table 134 stored in the ROM 506. The variation pattern determination table 134 is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern from the start of variable display of a special symbol in the special figure game until the fixed special symbol is derived and displayed to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. It is a table to be. In the variation pattern determination table 134, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is assigned to a single type or a plurality of types of variation patterns according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. .

  FIG. 39 shows an example of the configuration of the general diagram display result determination table 135 stored in the ROM 506. The general figure display result determination table 135 sets the normal figure display result to “per common figure” before the fixed normal symbol that becomes the normal figure display result is derived and displayed in the general figure game by the normal symbol display device 20. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to set “general map loss” based on the random number value MR5 for determining the general map display result.

  In the general map display result determination table 135, the numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR5 for determining the general map display result is “per normal map” depending on whether the time reduction flag is off or on. Or, it is assigned to the general map display result of “general map loss”. Here, the time reduction flag is set to the on state in response to the time reduction control being performed when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a special gaming state such as a probability change state or a time reduction state, while the time reduction is performed. It is cleared and turned off in response to the end of control. In the common figure display result determination table 135, the normal figure change time from the start of the normal pattern change display to the derivation and display of the fixed normal symbol corresponding to the general figure display result or the like is displayed in any of a plurality of types. Setting data for setting and an open state in which a game ball can pass through the normally variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) corresponding to the case where the result of the normal map display becomes “per normal map”. For example, setting data for setting the time (opening time) and the number of times (opening times) for performing the control may be included.

  In the setting example of the general map display result determination table 135 shown in FIG. 39, the determined value is assigned to the general map display result of “per common map” or “normal map loss” depending on whether the time flag is on. Is different. In other words, the decision value for each ordinary map display result is such that the ratio determined for the ordinary map display result of “per common map” is higher during the time when the time reduction control is performed than when it is not during the time reduction. Is assigned. With such a setting, the normal figure display result becomes “per normal figure” when the time reduction control is performed, and when the time reduction control is other than during the time reduction, the normally variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) ) Is opened more frequently. Also, when the time shortening control is performed, the normally variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) is set when the normal map display result is "per normal map" when the time shortening control is not performed other than during the time shortening. The time for opening (opening time) and the number of times (opening times) increase. Further, when the time shortening control is performed, the normal time from when the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display 20 is started to the time when the fixed normal symbol is derived and displayed is greater than when the time reduction control is not performed. The fluctuation time may be set to be short. By such setting, the second start condition is more easily established by increasing the possibility that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening when the time reduction control is performed than when it is not during the time reduction. To do.

  FIG. 40 shows an example of the structure of the start opening prize table stored in the ROM 506. In this embodiment, a first start opening winning table 136A shown in FIG. 40A and a second starting opening winning table 136B shown in FIG. 40B are prepared in advance as start opening winning tables. . In each start opening winning table, the game ball passes (enters) through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, and the start winning is generated. This table is sometimes referred to for performing various settings.

  The first start opening winning table 136A shown in FIG. 40 (A) is selected as a use table when a game ball passes (enters) through the first starting winning opening and a start winning is generated. The first start slot winning table 136A is composed of table data for designating a first reserved memory counter address, a random value register R1D address, a first special figure reserved memory section address, and the like. The first reserved memory counter address is an address assigned to the first reserved memory counter. The first reserved memory counter is provided in the game control counter setting unit 594 shown in FIG. 42 and counts the first special figure reserved memory number. The random value register R1D address is an address (for example, the start address 2038H) assigned to the random value register R1D in the built-in register area shown in FIG. The first special figure reservation storage unit address is an address (for example, the top address) assigned to the first special figure reservation storage unit 591A shown in FIG.

  The second start opening winning table 136B shown in FIG. 40B is selected as a use table when a game ball passes (enters) through the second starting winning opening and a start winning occurs. The second start opening winning table 136B is composed of table data for designating a second reserved memory counter address, a random number value register R2D address, a second special figure reserved memory section address, and the like. The second reserved memory counter address is an address assigned to the second reserved memory counter. The second reserved memory counter is provided in the game control counter setting unit 594 shown in FIG. 42 and counts the second special figure reserved memory number. The random value register R2D address is an address (for example, the head address 203AH) assigned to the random value register R2D in the built-in register area shown in FIG. The second special figure reservation storage unit address is an address (for example, a head address) assigned to the second special figure reservation storage unit 591B shown in FIG.

  FIG. 41 shows a configuration example of the accessory release control pattern stored in the ROM 506. In this embodiment, as a plurality of types of accessory release control patterns, an accessory release control pattern CYA shown in FIG. 41A and an accessory release control pattern CYB shown in FIG. 41B are prepared in advance. ing. The bonus release control pattern CYA includes “left” and “right” formed by the variable winning device 40 when the special figure display result is “small hit” and the small hit type is “first small hit”. This is a control pattern for performing control to change the accessory entry 31L, 31R between a closed state and an open state by an accessory opening / closing operation in the small hit gaming state. The bonus release control pattern CYB has the “left” and “right” formed by the variable winning device 40 when the special figure display result is “small hit” and the small hit type is “second hit”. This is a control pattern for performing control to change the accessory entry 31L, 31R between a closed state and an open state by an accessory opening / closing operation in the small hit gaming state.

  In the accessory release control pattern CYA, data indicating the accessory release control time T10 as the time during which opening / closing control is performed on the “left” and “right” accessory entrances 31L and 31R, and transmission to the release solenoid 53 is transmitted. Open solenoid output data indicating the state (ON / OFF) of the drive signal to be performed, and the accessory release time and the end code as the time for opening the “left” and “right” accessory entrances 31L and 31R. Data. By such an accessory release control pattern CYA, as shown in FIG. 8B, in response to the case where the small hit type is “first small hit”, the bonus release time is 3 seconds and the number of releases is one time. It is possible to perform the opening / closing operation of the accessory.

  In the accessory release control pattern CYB, data indicating the accessory release control time T10 as the time during which the opening / closing control is performed on the “left” and “right” accessory entrances 31L and 31R and the transmission to the release solenoid 53 are transmitted. Open solenoid output data indicating the state (ON / OFF) of a driving signal to be performed, and a function release time or an open state as a time for opening the “left” and “right” accessory entrances 31L and 31R. Data indicating an accessory closing time or an end code, which is an interval when changing a plurality of times (specifically, three times), is included. With such an accessory release control pattern CYB, as shown in FIG. 8 (B), the accessory release time is 1 second and the number of releases is 3 times corresponding to the case where the small hit type is “second small hit”. It is possible to perform the opening / closing operation of the accessory.

  The RAM 507 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 has a game control data holding area as shown in FIG. 42 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. 590 is provided. The game control data holding area 590 shown in FIG. 42 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 591A, a second special figure hold storage unit 591B, a general figure hold storage unit 591C, a game control flag setting unit 592, and a game. A control timer setting unit 593, a game control counter setting unit 594, and a game control buffer setting unit 595 are provided.

  The first special figure storage unit 591A satisfies the first start condition in response to the occurrence of the start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. The holding data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A) in which the first start condition is not established is stored. As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit 591A determines the special figure display result obtained by the CPU 505 based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the winning in association with the holding number in the order of winning in the first starting winning opening. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for use, the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the hit type, and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are reserved data. Store until it reaches (for example, “4”).

  The second special figure holding storage unit 591B satisfies the second start condition in response to the occurrence of the start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. However, the hold data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B) in which the second start condition is not established is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 591B determines the special figure display result obtained by the CPU 505 based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the winning in association with the holding number in the order of winning in the second starting winning opening. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for use, the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the hit type, and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are reserved data. Store until it reaches (for example, “4”).

  The usual figure hold storage unit 591C stores hold data of a usual figure game that has passed the passage gate 41 and has established the usual figure start condition but does not satisfy the usual figure start condition. As an example, the universal map storage unit 591C is used for determining the general map display result obtained by the CPU 505 based on the establishment of the general chart start condition by passing each game ball in association with the reservation numbers in the passing order of the passing gate 41. Numerical data indicating the random number MR5 is stored as pending data until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The first special figure reservation storage unit 591A and the second special figure reservation storage unit 591B may be provided separately, or a storage area combining these may be provided. As an example, a storage area including eight areas obtained by combining the start data storage area and the random value storage area may be provided. In such a configuration, continuous addresses in the RAM 507 may be assigned to the start data storage area and the random value storage area. In this case, for example, by updating the value of the pointer for designating the address of the data storage destination based on the total number of reserved storage, the start data (first start winning a prize opening and first (2) Data that can specify whether or not the start winning is generated due to the game ball passing (entering) through which start winning opening is set. At this time, in order to specify the head of the free space, for example, a value obtained by adding 1 to the value obtained by multiplying the total number of reserved memories by the number of data in one piece of reserved data (numerical data indicating start data and random number values) (start data storage) A value obtained by adding one area) is specified as an address offset value. The pointer value may be updated in accordance with the offset value thus specified. In this configuration, a total of two data storage areas, one start data storage area and one random value storage area, are provided corresponding to one hold data. Therefore, a value obtained by adding 1 to a value obtained by doubling the total number of reserved memories is specified as an address offset value. As an example, when the total number of reserved memories is “3”, “+7” (a value obtained by doubling the total number of reserved memories “3” and adding 1) is specified and corresponds to this offset value. The start data is set in the start data storage area. If a total of three data storage areas including one start-up data storage area and two random number value storage areas are provided corresponding to one reserved data, the total number of reserved memories is tripled. A value obtained by adding 1 (a value obtained by adding one start data storage area) may be specified as the offset value of the address.

  Further, when the initial position of the pointer for designating the data storage destination address is used as the start data storage area corresponding to the hold number “1”, a value obtained by multiplying the total hold storage number by the number of data in one hold data is The address offset value may be specified. For example, when two data storage areas, one start data storage area and one random value storage area, are provided corresponding to one hold data, the value obtained by doubling the total hold storage number is The address offset value may be specified. When a total of three data storage areas including one start-up data storage area and two random number value storage areas are provided corresponding to one hold data, a value obtained by multiplying the total hold storage number by three is obtained. The address offset value may be specified. After the start data is set in the start data storage area in this way, 1 is added to the value of the pointer specifying the address, and numerical data indicating the random number value is stored in the random value storage area of the address pointed to by the pointer after the addition. That's fine.

  The game control flag setting unit 592 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 592 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags. As an example, the game control flag setting unit 592 only needs to be provided with a special figure process flag, a common figure process flag, a big hit flag, a small hit flag, a short time flag, a V winning flag, and the like. In addition, the game control flag setting unit 592 may store data indicating various flag states used to control the progress of the game.

  The special figure process flag indicates the progress of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, the progress of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. In the step S96 of FIG. 43 executed for control and the special symbol process shown in FIG. 55, it is instructed which process should be selected and executed. The ordinary symbol process flag indicates which process in step S97 of FIG. 43 or ordinary symbol process shown in FIG. 65 executed for controlling the progress of the ordinary symbol game using the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol indicator 20. Indicates whether to select and execute.

  The big hit flag is set to an on state corresponding to a determination result that the special figure display result is “big hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, it is cleared and turned off in response to, for example, that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game. The small hit flag is set to an on state corresponding to the determination result that the special figure display result is “small hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, it is cleared and turned off in response to, for example, the small hit symbol being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game. The time reduction flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the time reduction state, and is cleared to the off state in response to the completion of the time reduction state. . The V winning flag indicates that a game ball that has entered the variable winning device 40 from the “left” and “right” accessory entrances 31L and 31R opened by the opening / closing operation of the accessory passes through the specific area 49 (entrance) In response to the occurrence of the V prize, the game is set to the on state. On the other hand, the V winning flag is cleared and turned off when the big hit gaming state ends after the small hit gaming state is controlled from the small winning gaming state based on the V winning.

  The game control timer setting unit 593 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 593 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. As an example, the game control timer setting unit 593 may be provided with a game control process timer, a special figure variation timer, a common figure variation timer, a backup monitoring timer, and the like.

  The game control process timer is for measuring, for example, the time for controlling the progress of the big hit game state or the small hit game state on the main board 11 side. As a specific example, the game control process timer stores, as a game control process timer value, data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. It is used as a down counter that counts down automatically. Alternatively, the game control process timer is used as an up-counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from a predetermined time point, such as a big hit game state or a small hit game state start point, and periodically counts up. May be.

  The special figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the special figure game such as a special figure fluctuation time which is the execution time of the special figure game. As a specific example, the special figure variation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured in order to control the progress of the special figure game as a special figure fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the special figure variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the special figure game and periodically counts up.

  The universal map change timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the normal game, such as the normal map change time which is the execution time of the normal game. As a specific example, the normal fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the normal figure game as a normal fluctuation timer value, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the normal time variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the normal time game and periodically counts up.

  The backup monitoring timer is for measuring an elapsed time after the power-off signal transmitted from the power monitoring circuit 303 mounted on the power board 10 is turned on. As an example, when the main board 11 detects a power-off signal output based on a decrease in the power supply voltage VSL supplied from the power supply monitoring circuit 303, measurement of the elapsed time by the backup monitoring timer is started. . The measurement by the backup monitoring timer is continued until the output of the power-off signal is stopped. When the elapsed time measured by the backup monitoring timer reaches a predetermined time, a predetermined preparation process corresponding to the stop of power supply, such as a process for protecting data in the backup area in the RAM 507, is executed.

  The game control counter setting unit 594 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 594 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. As an example, the game control counter setting unit 594 may be provided with a random counter, a first reserved memory counter, a second reserved memory counter, a round number counter, an in-game game ball counter, and the like.

  The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 594 counts a part of numerical data indicating a random value used for controlling the progress of the game separately from the random number circuit 509 so that the CPU 505 can be updated by software. belongs to. For example, the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 594 stores numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR5 as random count values. As for the random number values MR2 to MR5, numerical data indicating each random number value is updated regularly or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 505.

  The first reserved memory counter is for counting the first special figure reserved memory number that is the number of stored reserved data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 591A. For example, in the first reserved memory counter, data indicating the count value corresponding to the first special figure reserved memory number is stored as the first reserved memory count value, and corresponding to the increase or decrease of the first special figure reserved memory number Updated (for example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction). The second reserved memory counter is for counting the second special figure reserved memory number, which is the number of stored reserved data in the second special figure reserved memory unit 591B. For example, in the second reserved memory counter, data indicating a count value corresponding to the second special figure reserved memory number is stored as a special figure reserved memory count value, and updated in accordance with an increase or decrease in the special figure reserved memory number ( For example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction). A total reserved memory counter for counting the total number of reserved memories may be provided separately from the first and second reserved memory counters. Alternatively, the total number of reserved memories may be specified by adding the first reserved memory count value and the second reserved memory count value.

  The round number counter is for counting the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the round number counter, data indicating a count initial value “1” at the start of the big hit gaming state is set as the round number count value. When one round is completed and the next round is started, the round count value is incremented by 1 and updated. The round number counter may also count the number of executions of the variable winning operation in the small hit gaming state.

  The in-game game ball counter is for counting the number of game balls remaining in the variable winning device 40. For example, data that is incremented by 1 every time a game ball is detected by any one of the accessory count switches 23L, 23C, and 23R is set as an in-function winning ball count value in the accessory game ball counter. . Each time a game ball is detected by the discharge port switch 25, the prize winning ball count value in the bonus is updated by one.

  The game control buffer setting unit 595 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 595 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. As an example, the game control buffer setting unit 595 may be provided with a transmission command buffer, a variable special figure designation buffer, a big hit type buffer, a small hit type buffer, a switch-on buffer, and the like.

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store setting data for transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board. For example, the transmission command buffer is configured to include a plurality of (for example, “12”) buffer areas, and setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 506 of the command table corresponding to the control command to be transmitted is stored in each buffer area. The In addition, a buffer area where setting data is written and read in the transmission command buffer may be specified by a transmission command pointer or the like, and a plurality of buffer areas may be used as a ring buffer.

  The variable special symbol designation buffer includes a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. A buffer value indicating whether the special figure game is executed is stored. As an example, the value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) is “1” in response to the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Set to Further, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in response to the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “0” in response to the completion of the special figure game.

  In the big hit type buffer, the variable display mode (big hit type) of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit” is one of a plurality of big hit types such as “first big hit” or “second big hit”. A value corresponding to the determination result is stored as a jackpot type buffer value. As an example, based on the setting in the jackpot type determination table 131A as shown in FIG. 35A, when the jackpot type is “first jackpot”, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “0”, and the jackpot type is In the case of “second jackpot”, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “1”.

  In the small hit type buffer, the variable display mode (small hit type) of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “small hit” is set to a plurality of types of small hits such as “first small hit” and “second small hit”. A value corresponding to the determination result as one of the hit types is stored as a small hit type buffer value. As an example, based on the setting in the small hit type determination table 131B as shown in FIG. 35B, when the small hit type is “first small hit”, the small hit type buffer value is set to “0”. When the small hit type is “second small hit”, the small hit type buffer value is set to “1”.

  The switch-on buffer includes the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the accessory count switches 23L, 23C, 23R, the specific area switch 24, the discharge port switch 25, and the general winning port switches 27F, 27L. , 27R, a winning prize counter switch 28, a plurality of bit values corresponding to each switch are stored, and each bit value (for example, turned off) corresponding to the state (ON or OFF) of the detection signal transmitted from each switch is stored. Corresponding “0”, “1” corresponding to ON, etc.) are set to be changeable. That is, each bit value of the switch-on buffer is set to “1” when the on-state of a switch associated with the switch is detected in advance, and is set to “0” when the off-state of the switch is detected.

  As shown in FIG. 9, an effect control microcomputer 120 is mounted on the effect control board 12. The effect control board 12 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 121 that generates image data in response to a drawing command from the effect control microcomputer 120, the image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. An effect data memory 122 for storing various data used for controlling the effect operation by the effect device such as a light emitter is also mounted. The effect control microcomputer 120 is a one-chip microcomputer having the same configuration as the game control microcomputer 100, for example, and includes an external bus interface, a clock circuit, a unique information storage circuit, a reset / interrupt controller, a CPU, a ROM, and a RAM. , CTC, random number circuit, PIP, serial communication circuit, address decoding circuit, and the like. Further, all or part of the configuration of the effect control microcomputer 120 may be different from the configuration of the game control microcomputer 100. As an example, in the case where all the numerical data serving as random number values used on the side of the effect control board 12 are updated by software, the effect control microcomputer 120 may not include the random number circuit. Further, the serial communication circuit only needs to be provided with a receiving circuit capable of receiving at least an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and data and commands for the image display device 5, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14 are provided. Signal transmission may be performed using an external bus interface or an address decoding circuit.

  In the effect control microcomputer 120, the CPU executes the effect control program read from the ROM, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electrical component (effect device). At this time, a fixed data reading operation in which the CPU reads fixed data from the ROM, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU writes various fluctuation data in the RAM and temporarily stores the data, and various fluctuation data in which the CPU is temporarily stored in the RAM. Fluctuating data reading operation for reading out, receiving operation for receiving various signals input from the outside of the production control microcomputer 120 via the external bus interface, PIP, serial communication circuit, etc., CPU for external bus interface, serial communication circuit, etc. A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control microcomputer 120 is also performed. It should be noted that the one-chip microcomputer constituting the effect control microcomputer 120 only needs to incorporate RAM in addition to at least the CPU, and ROM, random number circuit, PIP, etc. are incorporated even if they are externally attached. May be used. A control signal, which is an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 18, is supplied to a predetermined serial reception terminal provided in the effect control microcomputer 120, and a serial signal built in the effect control microcomputer 120 is provided. What is necessary is just to receive in a communication circuit. Or the control signal used as an effect control command may be transmitted / received in parallel in a direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via a plurality of signal lines (for example, eight effect control signal lines). .

  The ROM of the effect control microcomputer 120 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 120 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination table, various data The pattern data constituting the effect control pattern is stored.

  As an example, in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 120, the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 has various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, the effect LED). An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect control patterns used for controlling the effect operation by an accessory etc. is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control pattern table only needs to store, for example, an effect control pattern at the time of special figure fluctuation and various effect control patterns.

  The special-control variation production control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special-sign game until the finalized special symbol that is the special-sign display result is derived and displayed. It is composed of data indicating control contents of various effect operations such as a variable display operation of decorative symbols, an effect display operation in a reach effect, or various effect display operations not accompanied by a variable display of decorative symbols. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 43A shows a configuration example of various effect control patterns. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 43A, the effect control pattern is derived from process data including, for example, an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, an end code, and the like. It is configured.

  The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with an effect control process timer value that is a stored value of an effect control process timer provided in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 120, for example. A determination value corresponding to the execution time (production time) of the production operation is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is performed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120. Data indicating the switching timing of the effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content such as being executed.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes data indicating the voice output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects in conjunction with the variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol, for example. Yes. That is, the audio control data is data that designates an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitter, such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED. That is, the lamp control data is data for designating the lighting operation of the light emitter. The operation detection control data is, for example, an operation valid period for effectively detecting a player's instruction operation (for example, a pressing operation) with respect to an operation button, or data for designating control contents of a rendering operation when it is detected effectively. Data indicating a presentation operation mode using a button (which may include a stick controller) is included.

  Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern including a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be. Further, in the plural types of process data included in the effect control pattern, the types of control data constituting each process data may be different according to the contents of the effect operation executed at each timing. That is, there may be process data configured to include all of the display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and operation detection control data, or process data configured to include a part of these. Furthermore, other various control data such as, for example, effect model control data indicating an operation mode in the movable member provided in the effect accessory may be included.

  FIG. 43B shows various rendering operations that are executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. The CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 determines the control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches one of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image in the display area of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner specified by the sound control data, and control is performed to flash a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp control data. Control for receiving the operation on the operation button or the like in the operation valid period specified by the detection control data and determining the content of the effect is performed. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that is not a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  In the effect control microcomputer 120, for example, when starting variable display of decorative symbols, the CPU sets the effect control pattern based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 120 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM. It is also possible to temporarily store the storage address of the pattern data constituting the effect control pattern to be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM and designate the reading position of the storage data in the ROM. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer judgment values. If they match, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data Control. Thus, in the effect control microcomputer 120, according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern, the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game) The control of the light emitter such as the effect lamp 9 is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  The VDP 121 has an image data processing function such as a high-speed drawing function and a moving image decoding function for displaying various images in the display area of the image display device 5, and an image according to a display control command from the effect control microcomputer 120. An image processor that executes data processing. Note that the VDP 121 may be a graphics processing unit (GPU), a graphics controller LSI (GCL), or a microprocessor for image processing, more commonly referred to as a digital signal processor (DSP). The effect data memory 122 may be configured using a non-volatile recording medium such as a semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, a magnetic memory, or an optical memory.

  On the voice control board 13, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like are mounted. As an example, in the voice control board 13, the sound number data indicated in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate voice and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM may be composed of data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

  For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the lamp control board 14. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the electrical decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electric decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 and the like.

  On the payout control board 15, a payout control microcomputer 150, a switch circuit 151, and the like are mounted. The switch circuit 151 receives detection signals from various switches and sensors, such as the full tank switch 26, the ball-out switch 27, the payout motor position sensor 71, the payout count switch 72, and the error release switch 73. The switch circuit 151 takes these detection signals and transmits them to the payout control microcomputer 150. The payout control microcomputer 150 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer similar to the game control microcomputer 100, and includes an external bus interface, a clock circuit, a specific information storage circuit, a reset / interrupt controller, a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a CTC, A random number circuit, PIP, serial communication circuit, address decoding circuit, and the like may be provided. Further, all or part of the configuration of the payout control microcomputer 150 may be different from the configuration of the game control microcomputer 100. As an example, when numerical data that is a random number value is not used on the payout control board 15 side, the payout control microcomputer 150 may not include a random number circuit. Further, in the serial communication circuit, it is only necessary to provide at least one transmission / reception circuit capable of bidirectional serial communication with the main board 11, and data for the payout motor 51, the error display LED 74, and the launch control board 17. The command signal may be transmitted using an external bus interface or an address decoding circuit.

  In the payout control microcomputer 150, the CPU executes a payout control program read from the ROM, thereby executing processing for controlling the payout operation by the payout device including the payout motor 51 and the like. At this time, a fixed data reading operation in which the CPU reads fixed data from the ROM, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU writes various fluctuation data in the RAM and temporarily stores the data, and various fluctuation data in which the CPU is temporarily stored in the RAM. Data reading operation for reading out, receiving operation for receiving various signals input from the outside of the payout control microcomputer 150 via the external bus interface, PIP, serial communication circuit, etc., CPU for external bus interface, serial communication circuit, etc. A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the payout control microcomputer 150 is also performed. It should be noted that the one-chip microcomputer constituting the payout control microcomputer 150 may include at least RAM in addition to the CPU, and ROM, PIP, and the like may be externally attached or incorporated. Good.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when the power supply from the power supply board 10 is started and the reset signal to the game control microcomputer 100 becomes high level (off state), the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, Based on the security check program 506A read from the ROM 506 by the CPU 505, a security check process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 44 is executed. At this time, the game control microcomputer 100 is in the security mode, and the game control user program stored in the ROM 506 is not yet executed.

  When the security check process shown in FIG. 44 is started, the CPU 505 first executes a process for determining a time (security time) in which the game control microcomputer 100 is in the security mode by executing the security check process. . At this time, the CPU 505 reads the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES stored in the program management area of the ROM 506 (step S1). Then, it is determined whether or not the read value is “000” (step S2).

  If it is determined in step S2 that the read value is “000” (step S2; Yes), the steady set time is set to a predetermined fixed time (step S3). Here, the regular setting time is constant regardless of the number of times of security check processing based on the occurrence of a system reset in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the number of times that the gaming control microcomputer 100 enters the security mode). Is a time component. The fixed time is an invariant time component that is predetermined based on the specifications of the game control microcomputer 100 in the security time, and may be any minimum value that can be set as the security time, for example.

  If it is determined in step S2 that the read value is other than “000” (step S2; No), in addition to the fixed time, the read value is selected according to the setting contents shown in FIG. The extended time is set to the steady set time (step S4). In this way, when the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is a value other than “000”, the security time as the execution time of the security check process can be selected in advance in addition to the fixed time. It can be set to any one of a plurality of extension times.

  After executing one of the processes of steps S3 and S4, the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is read (step S5). Then, it is determined whether or not the read value is “00” (step S6).

  If it is determined in step S6 that the read value is “00” (step S6; Yes), the steady setting time is set as the security time (step S7). On the other hand, when it is determined that the read value is other than “00” (step S6; No), the variable setting time determined in accordance with the read value is added to the steady setting time to obtain the security time. (Step S8). Here, the variable setting time is a time component that changes every time the security check process is executed, and the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is “01” (short). Mode) or “10” (long mode), and changes in different predetermined time ranges. For example, when a count value in a predetermined free-run counter is stored in a variable security time register built in the game control microcomputer 100 when a system reset occurs, in the process of step S8, for the variable security time By using the stored value of the register as it is or by using the value obtained by substituting the stored value for a predetermined arithmetic function (for example, hash function) It may be determined so as to change randomly. Thus, when the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is a value other than “00”, the security time that is the execution time of the security check process is set as the security based on the occurrence of the system reset or the like. Each time the check process is executed, it can be changed within a predetermined time range.

  Here, the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is a value other than “000”, and the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is other than “00”. In this case, both the extension time set in step S4 and the variable setting time set in step S8 are added to the fixed time, and the security time is determined. .

  After executing one of the processes in steps S7 and S8, the security code stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 is read (step S9). Here, in a predetermined area of the ROM 506, a security code of a calculation result obtained by calculating the data of the stored content by a predetermined calculation formula is stored in advance. As a security code generation method, for example, a hash value is generated using a hash function, an error detection code (CRC code) is used, or an error correction code (ECC code) is used. A generation method may be used. In a predetermined area different from the security code storage area of the ROM 506, an arithmetic expression for specifying the security code by calculation is encrypted and stored in advance.

  Following the processing in step S9, the encrypted arithmetic expression is decrypted and restored (step S10). Thereafter, the storage code in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 is calculated by the arithmetic expression decrypted in step S10 to specify the security code (step S11). At this time, the storage data used for the calculation for specifying the security code is, for example, program data corresponding to all or part of the user program different from the security check program 506A among the storage data of the ROM 506, or predetermined table data May be all or a part of the fixed data constituting the. Then, the security code read in step S9 is compared with the security code specified in step S11 (step S12). At this time, it is determined whether or not the security codes match in the comparison result (step S13).

  If the security codes do not match in step S13 (step S13; No), it is determined that an unauthorized change has been made to the ROM 506, and the operation of the CPU 505 is shifted to a halt state (HALT). On the other hand, if the security codes match in step S13 (step S13; Yes), it is determined whether or not the security time set in the processing of step S7 or step S8 has elapsed (step S14). . If the security time has not elapsed (step S14; No), the process of step S14 is repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the security time has elapsed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S14 that the security time has elapsed (step S14; Yes), for example, the value of the program counter built in the CPU 505 is set to the start address (address 0000H) of the user program in the ROM 506. The execution of the game control main process is started by setting or the like. At this time, the execution of the game control is started from the beginning of the control code constituting the user program stored in the ROM 506, so that the operation state of the game control microcomputer 100 shifts from the security mode to the user mode, and the game Execution of the control main process is started.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process executed by the CPU 505 of the game control microcomputer 100. Each process described below is executed by the CPU 505 provided in the game control microcomputer 100. An interrupt request based on various interrupt factors generated by the CTC 508, the random number circuit 509, the serial communication circuit 511, etc. provided in the game control microcomputer 100 is for causing the CPU 505 to execute predetermined interrupt processing. The concept including the CPU 505 and various circuits other than the CPU 505 is sometimes referred to as a game control microcomputer 100.

  When the game control main process shown in FIG. 45 is started, the CPU 505 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S21) and sets the interrupt mode (step S22). For example, in step S22, the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of the game control microcomputer 100 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: the least significant bit is “0”) output from the built-in device are synthesized. As a result, the interrupt mode [2] of the maskable interrupt in which the interrupt address is generated is set. When an interrupt that can be masked occurs, the CPU 505 performs a setting for automatically disabling the interrupt, and the contents of the program counter may be saved in the stack.

  Subsequently, settings relating to the stack pointer, such as setting of a stack pointer designation address, are performed (step S23). Further, the internal register is set (initialized) as shown in FIG. 15B (step S24). As an example, in the process of step S24, the operation setting in the serial communication circuit 511 may be performed by setting the first channel communication setting register SAFM, the second channel communication setting register SBFM, and the like. Subsequent to step S24, the CTC 508 and PIP 510 are set (step S25). After executing the processing of step S25, it may be determined whether or not the power-off signal is in an off state, for example, by checking the terminal state at the input port IP0.

  Thereafter, the RAM 507 is set to be accessible (step S26). Subsequently, based on the signal state of the switch signal (clear signal) transmitted from the clear switch 304 installed on the power supply board 10, it is determined whether the clear switch 304 is turned on (step S27). In the process of step S27, the clear signal transmitted from the clear switch 304 may be checked a plurality of times, and it may be determined that the clear switch 304 has been turned on when the clear signal is continuously turned on. For example, once it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is off, the state of the clear signal is confirmed once again after a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed. At this time, if the clear signal is off, it is determined that the clear signal is off. On the other hand, if the state of the clear signal is on at this time, the state of the clear signal may be confirmed again after a predetermined time has elapsed. Note that the number of times of reconfirming the state of the clear signal may be one time or may be a plurality of times. Further, it is possible to check twice and check again when the check results do not match.

  When the clear switch 304 is off in step S27 (step S27; No), it is determined whether or not a backup flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 592 or the like is on (step S28). The state of the backup flag is set in the game control flag setting unit 592 or the like when power supply to the game control microcomputer 100 is stopped. The backup flag setting location is backed up by the backup power source, so that the state of the backup flag is saved even when the power supply is stopped. In step S28, for example, if “55H” is set in the game control flag setting unit 592 as the value of the backup flag, it is determined that there is a backup (ON state). On the other hand, if a value other than “55H” is set, it is determined that there is no backup (OFF state).

  If the backup flag is on in step S28 (step S28; Yes), data check of the RAM 507 is performed to determine whether the check result is normal (step S29). In the process of step S29, for example, a checksum is calculated using data stored in a specific area of the RAM 507, and the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum stored in the main checksum buffer. Here, the main checksum buffer stores a checksum calculated by the same processing when the power supply was stopped last time. If the comparison results do not match, the data in the specific area of the RAM 507 is different from the data at the time of stopping the power supply, and therefore it is determined that the check result is not normal.

  When the check result in step S29 is normal (step S29; Yes), for example, the control state of the main board 11 such as the internal state of the game control microcomputer 100 or the sub-side control board (for example, the effect control board 12). A setting at the time of restoration for returning the control state to the state when the power supply is stopped is performed, and the gaming state before the power interruption is restored (step S30). As a specific example, in the process of step S30, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 506 is set as a pointer, and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area in the RAM 507. Here, the work area of the RAM 507 is backed up by a backup power source, and initialization data for an area that may be initialized among the work areas may be set in the backup time setting table.

  When the clear switch 304 is on in step S27 (step S27; Yes), the backup flag is off in step S28 (step S28; No), or the check result is not normal in step S29. Sometimes (step S29; No), initialization processing corresponding to power-on or system reset that is not during a power failure recovery is executed. In this initialization process, the RAM 507 is cleared (initialized) (step S31), and a work area to be a work area is set (step S32). In the process of step S31, predetermined data (for example, stored data in a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 594) may be set to an arbitrary value or a predetermined initial value. Further, the entire area of the RAM 507 may be initialized, or a part of the area may be initialized while the predetermined data is left as it is. When the process of step S31 is executed, the operation state of the random number circuit 509 may be initialized. The initial value may be set in the game control flag setting unit 592, the game control timer setting unit 593, the game control counter setting unit 594, the game control buffer setting unit 595, and the like by the process of step S <b> 32. At this time, a control command (initialization designation command) for initializing each sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 may be transmitted. For example, the presentation control board 12 displays an image for notifying that the control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized in the display area of the image display device 5 in response to receiving the initialization designation command. It suffices if initialization notification is executed.

  After the game state before the power interruption is restored in step S30, or after the processing of step S32 is executed, various circuits built in the game control microcomputer 100 are stored based on the stored data in the program management area of the ROM 506. Operation setting is performed (step S33). As an example, in the process of step S33, the first random number initial setting KRS1 and the second random number initial setting KRS2 stored in the program management area are read, and the random number circuit setting process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 46 is executed. The Note that the process of step S33 may be executed when the process of step S24 or the process of step S25 is executed.

  In the random number circuit setting process shown in FIG. 46, first, the CPU 505 performs setting for using the random number circuit 509 based on the bit value in the bit number [3] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 (step S51). In this embodiment, the bit value in the bit number [3] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is set to “1” in advance, and setting to use the random number circuit 509 is performed corresponding to this bit value. Subsequently, the random number update clock RGK in the random number circuit 509 is set based on the bit value in the bit number [2] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 (step S52). For example, in response to the bit value [2] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 being set to “1” in advance, the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112 is divided by two. As a result, the random number update clock RGK is set.

  After the setting in step S52, the random number update rule is set in the random number circuit 509 based on the bit value in the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 (step S53). For example, when the bit value in the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is set to “00” in advance, the random number update designating the update order of the numerical data that becomes the random value in the random number sequence RSN The rule is set so as not to change after the second round. If the bit value in the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is set to “01” in advance, the random number update rule in the random number sequence RSN is set to be changed by software after the second round. Is made. Further, when the bit value [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is set to “10” in advance, the random number update rule in the random number sequence RSN is automatically changed after the second round. Is made.

  Subsequently, based on the bit value in the bit number [1] of the second random number initial setting KRS2, the start value at start-up in the numerical data that becomes the random value is determined (step S54). For example, when the bit value [1] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is set to “0” in advance, the random value start value is set to the default value “0000H”. If the bit value [1] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is set to “1” in advance, the random number start value is set to a value based on the ID number.

  Further, based on the bit value in the bit number [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2, it is set whether or not to change the start value of the numerical data serving as the random value every time the system is reset (step S55). For example, when the bit value [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is set to “0” in advance, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated when the power is initially turned on (activation after backup is disabled). Regardless of whether the system is reset due to system reset, the start value set in step S54 may be used as it is as the start value in the random number circuit 509. In addition, when the bit value in the bit number [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is set to “1” in advance, a setting for changing the start value of the random number at every system reset is made. For example, when a count value in a predetermined free-run counter such as the free-run counter 554A is stored in a random number start value register built in the game control microcomputer 100 at a predetermined timing such as when a system reset occurs. In the process of step S55, a random number is used by using the stored value of the random number start value register as it is or by using a value obtained by substituting the stored value into a predetermined arithmetic function (for example, a hash function). Is determined so as to change randomly within a predetermined numerical range (for example, a range including all or part of the numerical data included in the count value permutation RCN generated by the random number generation circuit 553) at each system reset. Just do it.

  After executing the processing of step S55, the bit number [1] or bit number [0] of the random number latch flag register RDFM is read by reading the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D, for example. The bit values of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 and the random number latch flag data RDFM0 stored in are set to “0”, and each random number latch flag is cleared to an off state (step S56). As an example, it is determined whether each of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 and the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is “1” or “0”, and if the value is “1”, the corresponding random number value The random number latch flag may be turned off by reading the register. Alternatively, each random number latch flag may be turned off by reading the random number value register R1D and the random number value register R2D regardless of the values of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 and the random number latch flag data RDFM0. Note that the numerical data read from the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D in the process of step S56 is used for determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state with the special figure display result as “big hit”. It can be discarded (erased) as it is. When the setting by the process of step S56 is completed, the random number circuit 509 may start the random value generation operation.

  Note that part or all of the setting by the random number circuit setting process may be autonomously performed by the random number circuit 509 based on the stored data in the program management area without the processing of the CPU 505 being involved. In this case, when the game control microcomputer 100 is in the security mode, the random number circuit 509 may not perform the initial setting and may not perform the random value generation operation. Then, when the CPU 505 reads out the user program stored in the ROM 506 in the game control microcomputer 100 and the execution of the game control main process is started, the CPU 505 instructs the random number circuit 509 to perform initial setting, for example. In response to the signal being transmitted, the random number circuit 509 may perform the initial setting and then start the random value generation operation. Alternatively, particularly when the random number circuit 509 is externally attached to the game control microcomputer 100, the random number circuit 509 is independent of the processing in the CPU 505 even when the game control microcomputer 100 is in the security mode. Thus, the random number generation operation may be started after the initial setting based on the stored data in the program management area. 45 includes a process for reading the interrupt initial setting KIIS stored in the program management area and setting the priority control of maskable interrupt factors in the reset / interrupt controller 504. May be. When setting the priority order of the maskable interrupt factor, the highest priority interrupt is set according to the bit value in the bit number [3-0] of the interrupt initial setting KIIS. For example, by setting the bit value [3-0] of the interrupt initial setting KIIS to “04H” or “05H” in advance, the interrupt processing due to the interrupt factor generated in the serial communication circuit 511 has the highest priority. Can be executed. Thus, by performing priority control of maskable interrupt factors according to the bit value in bit number [3-0] of interrupt initial setting KIIS, the priority order of interrupt processing can be arbitrarily set, and the degree of freedom of design is increased. be able to.

  After the setting in step S33, random number circuit abnormality inspection processing for inspecting the presence or absence of operation abnormality in the random number circuit 509 is executed (step S34). FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the random number circuit abnormality inspection process executed in step S34.

  47, first, the CPU 505 clears the random number clock abnormality determination counter provided in, for example, the game control counter setting unit 594, and the random number clock abnormality determination count that is the count value thereof. The value is initialized to “0” (step S61). Subsequently, the internal information data CIF4 stored in the bit number [4] of the internal information register CIF is read (step S62). Then, it is determined whether or not the read value in step S62 is “1” (step S63). The frequency monitoring circuit 551 provided in the random number circuit 509 compares the input state of the random number clock RCLK at the random number external clock terminal ERC with the internal system clock SCLK. When a frequency abnormality corresponding to the setting contents as shown in FIG. 18B is detected in the input state of the random number clock RCLK, the bit value “1” is written as the internal information data CIF4.

  Therefore, when it is determined in step S63 that the read value is “1” (step S63; Yes), the random number clock abnormality determination count value is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S64). At this time, it is determined whether or not the count value after the update in step S64 has reached a predetermined clock abnormality determination value (step S65). Here, the clock abnormality determination value may be a numerical value determined in advance in order to determine that the clock abnormality is detected when the frequency monitoring circuit 551 continuously detects the frequency abnormality of the random number clock RCLK. If the clock abnormality determination value has not been reached in step S65, the process returns to step S62, and determination based on the bit value of the internal information data CIF4 is performed again.

  When the clock abnormality determination value is reached in step S65 (step S65; Yes), a predetermined random number clock error process is executed (step S66), and the random circuit abnormality inspection process is terminated. In the random number clock error process, for example, a setting for transmitting a predetermined effect control command to the effect control board 12 is performed, and the effect device detects that a frequency abnormality of the random number clock RCLK has been detected. In addition, the processing may not be continued until a predetermined error canceling procedure (for example, system reset, error canceling switch operation, etc.) is taken, or at the end of random number clock error processing After the random number circuit abnormality inspection process is finished, the game control or the like that is almost the same as the normal time when the random number clock error process is not executed may be executed. Here, when the game control or the like is executed after executing the random number clock error process in step S66, the error occurrence state corresponding to the execution of the random number clock error process is stored, for example, In the main-side error process of step S93 shown in FIG. 48, an effect control command for notifying the frequency abnormality of the random number clock RCLK may be transmitted. Further, the operation of the CPU 505 may be shifted to the halt state (HALT) without executing the random number clock error process.

  When the read value is determined to be “0” in step S63 (step S63; No), for example, the random value abnormality determination counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 594 or the like is cleared, and the count value is used. A certain random value abnormality determination count value is initialized to “0” (step S67). In the process of step S63, the read value is “0” when the bit value of the internal information data CIF4 read in step S62 is continuously “0” a plurality of times (for example, twice). May be determined.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S67, the check value used for checking whether there is an abnormality in the random number value is set to an initial value “0000H” (step S68). Then, the stored numerical data as the random value is read from the random value register 559A as the random value register R1D and the random value register 559B as the random value register R2D provided in the random number circuit 509 (step S69). For example, in the process of step S69, the bit values of the random number latch selection data RDLS1 and the random number latch selection data RDLS0 stored in the bit number [1] and the bit number [0] of the random number latch selection register RDLS are set to “0”. Specifies fetching random values by. Subsequently, the bit values of the random number acquisition specification data RDLT1 and the random value acquisition specification data RDLT0 stored in the bit number [1] and the bit number [0] of the random value acquisition specification register RDLT are set to “1”. Specifying loading into the random value register R2D or the random value register R1D. Note that setting the bit value in the bit number [1] or bit number [0] of the random number fetch specification register RDLT to “1” instructs the CPU 505 to fetch (latch) numerical data to the random number circuit 509. This corresponds to outputting a latch signal. After that, by turning on the register read signal RRS2 supplied to the random value register R2D or turning on the register read signal RRS1 supplied to the random value register R1D, the numerical data that becomes the stored random value May be read out. Note that the numerical data stored in each of the random value register R2D and the random value register R1D may be read simultaneously to check whether there is an abnormality in the random number value, or after checking whether there is an abnormality in one of the registers. The other register may be checked for abnormality.

  After reading the numerical data in step S69, the read value is set as a random number inspection reference value (step S70). Subsequently, numerical data that becomes a random value is read from the random value register 559A and the random value register 559B (step S71). Note that the read operation in step S71 may be performed in the same procedure as the read operation in step S69. In addition, a sufficient delay time may be provided between the read operation in step S69 and the read operation in step S71 so that the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN generated by the random number circuit 509 changes. After reading the numerical data in step S71, an exclusive OR operation is performed on the random number inspection reference value and the read value in step S71 (step S72). Further, a logical sum operation between the calculation result in step S72 and the check value is executed, and the calculation result is updated to be a new check value (step S73). For example, the check value may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 507, and each time the process of step S73 is executed, the calculation result obtained by the process may be saved as a new check value. As a result, changes in all the bits in the numerical data read from the random value register 559A and the random value register 559B are recorded, and if the bit has changed at least once during a plurality of readings, the check value corresponds. The bit value is “1”.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the check value is “FFFFH” (step S74). If it is (step S74; Yes), since the change of the bit value is recognized for all bits, the random number value is normal. It is determined that the update has been made, and the random number circuit abnormality inspection process is terminated. When it is confirmed that the random number value has been updated normally, the random number latch selection data RDLS1 and the random number latch selection stored in the bit number [1] and the bit number [0] of the random number latch selection register RDLS are selected. The bit value of the data RDLS0 is set to “1”, the random value is taken into the random value register R2D according to the signal input to the input port P1, and the random value register R1D according to the signal input to the input port P0 You may make it instruct | indicate numerical value acquisition. In this embodiment, a wiring for transmitting the first start winning signal SS1 from the first start port switch 22A is connected to the input port P0, and the second start winning signal SS2 from the second start port switch 22B is connected to the input port P1. Are connected. Thereby, when the first start winning signal SS1 is turned on, the random number value is taken into the random value register R1D, while when the second starting winning signal SS2 is turned on, the random value register R2D is entered. It is possible to take in random values.

  When it is determined in step S74 that the check value is other than “FFFFH” (step S74; No), the random number abnormality determination count value is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S75). At this time, it is determined whether or not the count value after the update in step S75 has reached a predetermined random value abnormality determination value (step S76). Here, the random value abnormality determination value is determined so that all bits of the numerical data read from the random value register 559A and the random value register 559B change at least once if the random number circuit 509 is operating normally. It may be a predetermined numerical value so as to be the number of times. If the random number abnormality determination value has not been reached in step S76, the process returns to step S71, and determination for reading numerical data as a random value from the random number circuit 509 and checking for abnormality is performed.

  If the random number abnormality determination value is reached in step S76 (step S76; Yes), a predetermined random value error time process is executed (step S77), and the random number circuit abnormality inspection process is terminated. In the random value error process, for example, a setting for transmitting a predetermined effect control command to the effect control board 12 is performed to notify that an abnormality in the random value is detected by the effect device. Until the error release procedure (for example, system reset, error release switch operation, etc.) is taken, the subsequent processing may not proceed, or the random number circuit error check processing will be performed at the end of the random number error processing. After that, game control or the like that is almost the same as the normal time when the random number error process is not executed may be executed. Here, when the game control or the like is executed after executing the random value error process in step S77, an error occurrence state corresponding to the execution of the random value error process is stored, for example, as will be described later. When a customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted based on the processing of step S237 shown in FIG. 55, a customer waiting demonstration designation command for notifying the occurrence state of the error may be transmitted. Further, the operation of the CPU 505 may be shifted to the halt state (HALT) without executing the process at the time of random value error.

  As described above, in the random number circuit abnormality inspection process, for example, the numerical data stored in the random number value register R1D (559A) or the random number value register R2D (559B) of the random number circuit 509 is obtained by repeatedly executing the process of step S71. Read multiple times. Then, all the bits of the numerical data read out by executing the processing of step S72 to step S74 are monitored, and an abnormality occurs in the operation state of the random number circuit 509 in step S76 based on the presence or absence of bit data that does not change. Determine whether or not. As a result, it is possible to reliably and easily detect that an abnormality has occurred in the operating state of the random number circuit 509 and prevent fraud.

  The random number circuit abnormality inspection process in step S34 is not limited to that executed by the CPU 505, and the random number circuit abnormality inspection process may be executed by a built-in circuit in the game control microcomputer 100 other than the CPU 505. As an example, the random number circuit 509 has a function of executing a random number circuit abnormality inspection process. When a frequency abnormality of the random number clock RCLK is detected or when an abnormality of the random number value is detected, the CPU 505 May be notified. The random number circuit abnormality inspection process is not limited to the process executed only in step S34. For example, every time a timer interrupt occurs in the game control microcomputer 100, a game control timer interrupt process (see FIG. 48), part or all of the random number circuit abnormality inspection process may be executed. That is, the random number circuit abnormality inspection process in step S34 may be executed after the process in step S35 shown in FIG. 45 is executed. As an example, when the random number circuit abnormality inspection process is executed in the game control timer interrupt process, for example, the processes of steps S61 to S66 shown in FIG. 47 are executed, while the processes of steps S67 to S77 are performed. It may not be executed. The processing of step S67 to step S77 may take a long processing time, for example, to repeatedly execute the processing of step S69 and repeatedly read numerical data from the random number circuit 509. May occur. Therefore, in this case, by executing only the processing of step S61 to step S66, the processing amount in the game control timer interrupt processing can be reduced, and the occurrence of processing failure can be prevented.

  After executing the random number circuit abnormality inspection process as described above in step S34 shown in FIG. 45, the interrupt permission state is set (step S35), and the generation of various interrupt requests is awaited. After executing the process of step S35, for example, based on the setting of the CTC 508 in step S25, a timer interrupt for game control may be generated every 2 ms (milliseconds). After executing the process of step S35, the game random number update process is repeatedly executed (step S36).

  Before executing the process of step S35, it is determined whether or not the game start switch 31 is turned on based on the signal state of the switch signal transmitted from the game start switch 31 installed on the main board 11. You may make it do. In this case, the switch signal transmitted from the game start switch 35 may be checked a plurality of times, and it may be determined that the game start switch 31 has been turned on when the switch signal is continuously turned on. In addition, the process of checking the on operation of the game start switch 31 is executed only when starting from an initial state without recovery (cold start), for example, when the processes of steps S31 and S32 are executed. For example, a game control timer interrupt process is performed regardless of the operation of the game start switch 31 at the time of starting to restore the gaming state before power interruption (at the time of hot start), for example, when the process of step S30 is executed. You may make it progress to the process which controls progress of a game. Here, in the RAM 507 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, when an area to be a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 594 is backed up by a backup power source, if it is a hot start, before power interruption Since the update of numerical data serving as a random value is started using the stored data in the random counter, it is difficult to specify the random value stored in the random counter from the operation start timing of the pachinko gaming machine 1. On the other hand, at the time of cold start, for example, the random counter is cleared (initialized) in the process of step S31, so that updating of the random number value is started from a certain initial value (for example, “0” or the like) There is a possibility that the random value stored in the random counter is specified from the operation start timing of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Therefore, at a cold start, the game start switch 31 is kept waiting until it is turned on, so that it is difficult to specify the random value stored in the random counter from the operation start timing of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by connecting a so-called “hanging board” particularly when the random number value for jackpot determination (for example, the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination) is updated only by software. Even if an illegal signal is input at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing, an illegal big hit gaming state can be prevented. Further, when it is determined that the game start switch 31 is not turned on, a game random number update process may be executed to update the random number value stored in the random counter by software. Accordingly, in addition to the elapsed time from the timing when the game start switch 31 is turned on, the elapsed time from the operation start timing of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to when the game start switch 31 is turned on cannot be specified. Even at cold start, it becomes difficult to specify the random value stored in the random counter, and it is possible to reliably prevent actions such as illegally generating a big hit gaming state by aiming or inputting illegal signals it can.

  After entering the interrupt enabled state by executing the processing of step S35 in this manner, for example, when a plurality of maskable interrupt factors occur simultaneously in part or all of the CTC 508, random number circuit 509, serial communication circuit 511, etc. Based on the designation by the bit value in the bit number [3-0] of the initial setting KIIS, the reset / interrupt controller 504 accepts an interrupt factor having a high priority. When the reset / interrupt controller 504 receives an interrupt factor, for example, an interrupt request signal in an on state is output to an I class interrupt (IRQ) terminal provided in the CPU 505. When an on-state interrupt request signal is input to the IRQ terminal by the CPU 505, the generated interrupt factor is identified based on, for example, the result of checking the data stored in the internal register, and the vector address corresponding to the identified interrupt factor By executing the program having the first address as the interrupt address, interrupt processing based on each interrupt factor can be started.

  If any of the four types of errors such as an overrun error, break code error, framing error, and parity error occurs during reception of communication data by the first channel transmission / reception circuit included in the serial communication circuit 511, the first A channel receive interrupt occurs. At this time, the CPU 505 may execute a predetermined serial communication error interrupt process. In this serial communication error interrupt processing, for example, the bit values corresponding to the predetermined bit number in the predetermined first channel communication setting register and the predetermined bit number in the second channel communication setting register are both set to “0”. For example, the transmission function and the reception function in the serial communication circuit 511 may be set not to be used. Here, the first channel communication setting register and the second channel communication setting register may be included in the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 100. Further, when an error occurs during reception of communication data by the first channel transmission / reception circuit, control may be performed to prohibit the payout of game balls by the payout device including the payout motor 51. Thereby, when an abnormality such as a reception error of communication data occurs, it is possible to prevent an excessive payout of game balls that are prize balls.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, for example, based on the fact that the reset / interrupt controller 504 has received an interrupt request from the CTC 508, the CPU 505 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. In the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 48, the CPU 505 first executes the predetermined power-off process after setting the interrupt disabled state (step S91). Further, by executing a predetermined switch process, the state of a detection signal (winning detection signal) input from each switch for detecting the game ball via the switch circuit 114 is determined (step S92).

  Subsequent to the switch process in step S92, a predetermined main-side error process is executed to perform an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S93). . For example, in the main-side error processing, settings for notifying the occurrence of an abnormal operation may be performed in response to excessive prize balls, insufficient prize balls, or other operation errors. After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S94).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed (step S95). Thereafter, the CPU 505 executes special symbol process processing (step S96). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 592 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 60 in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S97). The CPU 505 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, thereby allowing the normal symbol variable display and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B to move. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade. After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 505 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls according to the input of the winning detection signal based on the execution result of the switch process in step S92, for example (step S98). ). Subsequent to the prize ball process, the main side communication control process is executed, so that a control command is transmitted from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 or the payout control board 15 or the payout control is performed. Communication control for receiving a control command transmitted from the board 15 is performed (step S99).

  As an example, in the main-side communication control process, serial communication corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the storage data of the payout transmission command buffer included in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 595 The payout control command can be transmitted by sending a transmission operation instruction to the first channel transmission / reception circuit included in the circuit 511. Further, the storage contents of the payout reception command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 595 and the like are checked to determine whether or not the reception command is stored. When the reception command is stored, the reception command is read out. The reception command is stored in the payout reception command buffer based on the first channel reception interrupt generated in response to reception of communication data as a payout notification command by the first channel transmission / reception circuit in the serial communication circuit 511. What is necessary is just to be performed by the interrupt process performed. As another example, in the main-side communication control process, the second channel transmission included in the serial communication circuit 511 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the storage data of the effect transmission command buffer included in the transmission command buffer. The production control command can be transmitted, for example, by sending a transmission operation instruction to the circuit. After executing such a main-side communication control process, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated after the interrupt is permitted.

  In the game random number update process executed in step S36 of FIG. 45 or step S95 of FIG. 48, the hit type is determined by updating the stored data in a predetermined area of the random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 594, for example. The random value MR2 for use may be incremented by one. As a result, the random number value MR2 for determining the hit type is updated to be incremented by one each time the game random number update process is executed. In the game random number update process, among the numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR5 that are the game random numbers, the numerical data indicating the random values MR3 to MR5 are sequentially set as random numbers to be updated. Here, for example, for the random values MR3 to MR5, an addition value, an addition determination value, or a maximum determination value may be determined. As an example, the range of the addition value may be set to “0” to “7”, the addition determination value is “8”, and the maximum determination value is “240” corresponding to the reach determination random value MR3. . Corresponding to the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type, the range of the addition value may be set to “0” to “7”, the addition determination value is “8”, and the maximum determination value is “242”. Corresponding to the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, the range of the addition value may be set to “0” to “7”, the addition determination value is “8”, and the maximum determination value is “998”.

  The added value is a value to be added to each random number value corresponding to one timer interruption, and the value only needs to be different every time the game random number update process is executed. For example, the addition value is obtained on the basis of numerical data that becomes a random value for determining the addition value, and an area for storing the addition value as a temporary variable may be provided in the RAM 507 or the like. The addition determination value is a value used to acquire an addition value corresponding to each random value by comparison with a random value for determining the addition value. More specifically, after the random value for determining the addition value is read as the initial value of the addition value corresponding to each random value, until it is determined that the current addition value is smaller than the addition determination value, A value obtained by subtracting the addition determination value from the current addition value is updated as a new addition value. The random number determination value is a value used to determine whether each updated random number value obtained by adding the finally obtained addition value is within a range of possible values. When each updated random number value exceeds the corresponding random number determination value, a value obtained by subtracting the random number determination value from the updated random number value is set as a new random number value. For example, the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 may be updated so as to be incremented by one each time a timer interrupt occurs in the game control microcomputer 100.

  In the game random number update process, numerical data indicating a random value for determining an addition value is read, and it is determined whether or not the read value is less than an addition determination value determined for each random value to be updated. If it is less than the addition determination value, the read value is set to the addition value. On the other hand, if it is equal to or greater than the addition determination value, a value obtained by subtracting the addition determination value from the read value is set as the addition value. Thereafter, the addition value is added to the random number value to be updated to obtain a random number value after addition. At this time, it is determined whether the random number value after addition is less than the maximum determination value determined for each random number value to be updated. If it is less than the maximum judgment value, the random number value after addition is set to the updated random number value. On the other hand, if it is equal to or greater than the maximum determination value, a value obtained by subtracting the maximum determination value from the added random number value is set as the updated random number value. The updated random number value thus set is set in a predetermined area for storing the random number value to be updated by the random counter, thereby completing the update of the random number value.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process executed in step S91 of FIG. 48 as the power-off process. In this power-off process, the CPU 505 first determines whether or not the power-off signal is in an on state, that is, whether or not the power-off signal is output from the power monitoring circuit 303 mounted on the power board 10. (Step S111). At this time, if the power-off signal is off and the power-off signal is not output (step S112; No), the backup monitoring timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 593 is cleared and the stored value is used. A backup monitoring timer value is set to “0” as an initial value (step S112). On the other hand, when the power-off signal is on and the power-off signal is output (step S111; Yes), the backup monitoring timer value is updated by 1 (step S113). Then, it is determined whether or not the updated backup monitoring timer value in step S113 has reached a predetermined backup determination value (for example, “2” or the like) (step S114). When the backup determination value is not reached in step S114 (step S114; No), the power-off process is terminated.

  When the backup determination value is reached in step S114 (step S114; Yes), the processing after step S115 is executed as a preparation process for responding to the stop of the power supply. When such a preparation process is executed, the state shifts from a state in which the progress of the game is controlled to a state in which a power supply stop process (a power-off control process) for saving the game state is executed. By executing the preparation process only when the backup judgment value is reached in the process of step S114, even if the power supply voltage drops momentarily due to noise or the like and the power-off signal is turned on, the power supply is erroneously stopped. It is possible to prevent the processing from starting.

  In the power supply stop process, a checksum is calculated and stored, for example, in a main checksum buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 595 (step S115). As an example, in the process of step S115, the start address of the predetermined area in the RAM 507 is set as the checksum calculation start address, and the checksum calculation count is set corresponding to the final address of the predetermined area. The predetermined area of the RAM 507 specified by the checksum calculation start address and the address used for setting the checksum calculation count may be a content storage area that is predetermined as a storage area in which the content should be stored even when power supply is stopped. That's fine. Then, the stored data in this content storage area is sequentially read and exclusive OR is calculated. For example, after setting the checksum calculation start address to the pointer, the storage data of the address pointed to by the pointer is read in the RAM 507, and the exclusive OR with the checksum data whose initial value is “00” is calculated. The calculation result is stored as new checksum data. At this time, the pointer value is incremented by 1 and the checksum calculation count is decremented by 1. Subsequently, if the checksum calculation count is a value other than “0”, the stored data at the address pointed to by the pointer is read, and an exclusive OR operation with the checksum data is performed, or the pointer value is set to 1. The process of adding and subtracting 1 from the checksum calculation count may be repeated until the checksum calculation count reaches “0”. When the checksum calculation count reaches “0”, each bit value of the checksum data is inverted, and the obtained value is stored in the main checksum buffer and stored. The data stored in the main checksum buffer in this way is used as parity data to be checked when the power is turned on.

  When the checksum data is stored by executing the process of step S115, the backup flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 592 may be set to the on state. Thereafter, access to the RAM 507 is prohibited thereafter, for example, by setting an access prohibition value in a predetermined RAM access register (step S116). When the power supply voltage decreases, the stored contents of the RAM 507 may be erroneously changed due to a runaway operation of the CPU 505 or the like, or signal levels (voltage levels) on various signal lines becoming unstable. There is sex. Therefore, by setting the state in which access to the RAM 507 is prohibited by the processing in step S116, it is possible to prevent erroneous change (damage) of the storage contents in the backup storage area provided in the RAM 507. Further, the CPU 505 performs a clear setting such as setting “00” as clear data to a predetermined output port provided in the game control microcomputer 100 (step S117). Further, the CPU 505 sets the timer interrupt disabled state by setting “00” in the control register of the CTC 508, for example (step S118). Here, the control registers of the CTC 508 may be those included in the built-in registers of the game control microcomputer 100. Note that the clear setting of the output port by the process of step S117 and the setting of the timer interrupt prohibited state by the process of step S118 may be executed before the checksum is calculated by the process of step S115. When the interrupt disabled state is set when the execution of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 48 is started, the setting of the timer interrupt disabled state by the process of step S118 may not be executed.

  Following the setting in step S118, a loop process for monitoring whether the power-off signal is turned off is entered (step S119). Then, while the power-off signal is in the ON state (step S119; No), the process of step S119 is repeatedly executed and waits. On the other hand, when the power-off signal is turned off in step S119 (step S119; No), a process for clearing the random number latch flag is executed.

  That is, the random number latch flag corresponding to the random value register R1D is turned on according to whether or not the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random number latch flag register RDFM is “1”. It is determined whether or not there is (step S120). If this random number latch flag is on (step S120; Yes), the random value register R1D is read to clear the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 to “0”, and the corresponding random number latch flag is set. An off state is set (step S121). In addition, when the random number latch flag specified by the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is OFF in step S120 (step S120; No), after executing the process of step S121, the bit number [1 of the random number latch flag register RDFM is set. ], It is determined whether or not the random number latch flag corresponding to the random number value register R2D is on (step S122). At this time, if the random number latch flag is on (step S122; Yes), the random value register R2D is read to clear the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 to “0”, and the corresponding random number latch flag is set. An off state is set (step S123). By such processing in step S121 and step S123, the random number latch flag is turned off, and the random number value register R1D and the random number value register R2D can be set to a state where storage of new numerical data is permitted. Note that the numerical data read from the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D by the processing of step S121 or step S123 determines whether or not to control the big hit gaming state with the special figure display result as “big hit”, etc. It can be discarded (erased) as it is. Further, instead of the processing of step S120 to step S123, each random number latch flag is set by reading the random number value register R1D and the random number value register R2D regardless of the values of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 and the random number latch flag data RDFM1. Processing to turn off may be performed.

  When the random number latch flag specified by the random number latch flag data RDFM1 is OFF in Step S122 (Step S122; No), or after performing the process of Step S123, after setting for a predetermined power failure recovery is performed. (Step S124), the process returns to the head of the game control main process. As an example, in the process of step S124, the storage address of the power-off recovery vector table is stored in the stack pointer built in the CPU 505, and is returned (returned) from the game control timer interrupt process. Here, the power-off recovery vector table may be any table that specifies the start address of the control code (game control program) stored in the ROM 506. When returning from an interrupt process such as a game control timer interrupt process, the stored data at the address specified by the stack pointer is read as a return address. Thus, after executing the processing of step S124, the CPU 505 can start (restart) the execution of the game control from the top of the control code stored in the ROM 506.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S96 shown in FIG. 48 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 505 first executes a start winning determination process (step S131). FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S131.

  When the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 51 is started, the CPU 505 first checks the detection state of the game ball in the first start port switch 22A (step S201). As an example, in the process of step S201, the stored value in the switch-on buffer is loaded, and the bit value [0] associated with the first start port switch 22A is “0” or “1”. Determine if it exists. At this time, if the checked bit value is “0”, the first start port switch 22A indicates that the game ball is not detected and is in an off state, while if it is “1”, the first start port switch 22A. May be any indicating that it is in an on state by detecting a game ball. When the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A is reflected in the stored value of the switch-on buffer with negative logic, if the checked bit value is “0”, the first start port switch 22A is a game. On the other hand, if it is “1”, it indicates that the first start-up switch 22A does not detect a game ball and indicates that it is in an OFF state. Subsequent to the process of step S201, the first start opening winning table 136A is selected and set in the use table (step S202). As an example, in the process of step S202, the storage address (first address) of the first start opening winning table 136A in the ROM 506 is stored in a predetermined table pointer so that the first starting opening winning table 136A can be referred to as a use table. Should be set. Hereinafter, in the process of selecting various tables and setting them in the use table, the same setting may be performed.

  Following the processing in step S202, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state based on the check result in step S201 (step S203). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in an ON state (step S203; Yes), a predetermined random value acquisition process is executed (step S204) and a winning random number determination process is executed (step S205). .

  When it is determined in step S203 that the first start port switch 22A is in the OFF state (step S203; No), after the winning random number determination process is performed in step S205, the second start port switch 22B. The game ball detection state at is checked (step S206). The process in step S206 may be any process as long as the process in step S201 is adapted to the second start port switch 22B. Subsequently, the second start opening prize table 136B is selected and set in the use table (step S207). Furthermore, based on the check result in step S206, it is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step S208). If the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step S208; Yes), the random number acquisition processing is executed in the same manner as in step S204 (step S209), and the random number value determination at the time of winning is performed in the same manner as in step S205. After execution (step S210), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S208 that the second start port switch 22B is in the OFF state, the start is performed without executing the random value acquisition process in step S209 or the winning random number determination process in step S210. The winning determination process is terminated.

  The random value acquisition process executed in step S204 or step S209 is a process realized by a control code included in a user program (game control process program for game control) prepared in advance as a common process routine. Good. In this random value acquisition process, depending on whether the first start opening prize table 136A set in the process of step S202 is used or the second start opening prize table 136B set in the process of step S207 is used, One of various processes corresponding to the case where the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening and the various processes corresponding to the case where the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening is executed. can do.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step S204 or step S209 of FIG. 51 as the random value acquisition processing. In this random value acquisition process, the CPU 505 first reads a pending storage count value corresponding to the start winning opening through which the game ball has passed (entered) (step S501). That is, when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening, the first held memory count value is read from the game control counter setting unit 594, while the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening. If it is, the second hold storage count value is read from the game control counter setting unit 594. At this time, for example, the first reserved storage counter address specified in the first start opening prize table 136A set in the process of step S202 shown in FIG. 51, or the second start opening prize table set in the process of step S207. Corresponding to the second reserved storage counter address designated by 136B, the storage address of the RAM 507 from which the reserved storage count value is read may be specified.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the read value in the process of step S501 is greater than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (eg, “4”) (step S502). At this time, if it is less than the upper limit value (step S502; No), the pending storage count value read out in the process of step S501 is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S503). Further, the storage position of the holding data in the special figure holding storage unit corresponding to the start winning opening through which the game ball has passed (entered) is specified (step S504). That is, when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening, the storage position of the hold data in the first special figure holding storage unit 591A is specified, while the game ball passes the second start winning opening ( In the case of entering, the storage position of the hold data in the second special figure hold storage unit 591B is specified. At this time, for example, the first special figure reservation storage unit address specified in the first start opening winning table 136A set in the process of step S202 shown in FIG. 51, or the second start opening set in the process of step S207. By adding the address addition value corresponding to the reserved storage count value read out in the processing of step S501 or the like to the second special figure reservation storage unit address designated in the winning table 136B, the storage location of the reserved data is obtained. It suffices if the storage addresses of the 1 special figure reservation storage unit 591A and the second special figure reservation storage unit 592B can be specified.

  After the process of step S504 is executed, a random value register from which numerical data that becomes the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is read is specified (step S505). That is, when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening, the random number value register R1D is used as a reading source of numerical data, while the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening. Uses the random number value register R2D as a reading source of numerical data. At this time, for example, the random number value register R1D address specified in the first start opening prize table 136A set in the process of step S202 shown in FIG. 51, or the second start opening prize table 136B set in the process of step S207. Corresponding to the random number value register R2D address specified in (2), it is only necessary to specify the address of the random number value register from which the numerical data is read out.

  Then, by reading out the random value register specified in step S505, numerical data that becomes the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is extracted (step S506). That is, when the random number value register R1D is set as a reading source in the process of step S505, numerical data is read and extracted from the random number value register 559A as the random number value register R1D included in the random number circuit 509. On the other hand, when the random number value register R2D is set as the reading source in the process of step S505, the numerical value data is read and extracted from the random number value register 559B as the random number value register R2D included in the random number circuit 509. At this time, the random number latch flag corresponding to the random number value register R1D or the random number value register R2D from which the numerical data has been read is turned off. That is, when the random value register R1D is set as the reading source in the process of step S505, the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is updated from “1” to “0” by reading the numerical data in the process of step S506. Then, the random number latch flag associated with the random value register R1D is turned off. On the other hand, when the random number value register R2D is set as the reading source in the process of step S505, the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 is changed from “1” to “0” by reading the numerical data in the process of step S506. The random number latch flag associated with the random value register R2D is turned off. Then, based on the numerical data read in step S506, the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is stored as the reserved data in the storage position of the special figure storage unit identified in the process of step S504. (Step S507).

  The numerical data read from the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D is directly stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 591A or the second special figure reservation storage unit 591B as the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It may be stored, or may be stored after performing a predetermined arithmetic process using numerical data read from the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D as the predetermined processing. As an example, numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 509 is temporarily stored in a 16-bit general-purpose register of the CPU 505 or the like. Subsequently, a refresh register value that is a stored value of a refresh register built in the CPU 505 is read as numerical data that becomes a random number value for processing. In this case, the refresh register value may be added to the upper byte in the general-purpose register, while the lower byte may be left as it is. Here, instead of adding the refresh register value, predetermined arithmetic processing such as one of four arithmetic operations such as subtraction, multiplication and division, or one of logical operations such as logical sum and logical product is executed. May be. Alternatively, the refresh register value may be added to the lower byte in the general-purpose register. Further, as predetermined arithmetic processing, the upper byte and the lower byte of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 509 may be exchanged and then stored as the upper byte or the lower byte in the general-purpose register. In addition, after adding the refresh register value to the upper byte or lower byte in the general-purpose register, or without performing processing such as addition to the upper byte or lower byte in the general-purpose register, the upper byte and lower byte are switched. May be. As the predetermined arithmetic processing, data of a specific bit out of the upper byte and the lower byte of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 509 may be replaced with data of other bits. In this case, for example, in a bus connecting the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D in the random number circuit 509 and the upper byte or lower byte of the general-purpose register, data of a specific bit is replaced with data of another bit. In addition, the wiring may be crossed. Thereafter, the CPU 505 performs an AND operation on the stored value of the general-purpose register and a predetermined logical value (for example, “FFFFH”), or outputs the stored value of the general-purpose register as it is and stores it in a predetermined area of the RAM 507. Thus, numerical data indicating the 16-bit random value MR1 may be set. For example, when setting numerical data indicating a 14-bit random number value, a 14-bit value can be acquired by performing an AND operation on the stored value of the general-purpose register and “7F7FH”. . Further, a logical sum operation may be executed instead of the logical product operation. At this time, the area of the RAM 507 in which numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is stored may be included in, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 594. Alternatively, the stored value of the general-purpose register may be output to the first special figure reservation storage unit 591A or the second special figure reservation storage unit 591B and used as the reservation data indicating the random value MR1.

  Further, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the addition value may be set based on the stored value of the general-purpose register. As an example, when the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the addition value takes a value in the range of “0” to “7”, the logical value of the storage value of the general-purpose register and “C0C0H” is calculated, Numerical data indicating a 4-bit random value may be set by storing it in a predetermined area of the RAM 507.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S507, for example, from a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 594, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the hit type and numerical values indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type The data is extracted and stored together with the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 stored in step S507 as the storage data in the storage position of the special figure storage unit specified in the process of step S504 (step S508).

  After performing the process of step S508, after performing the setting for transmitting the pending storage number notification command to the effect control board 12 (step S509), the random value acquisition process is terminated. In the process of step S509, for example, the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 506 may be set in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer.

  If it is determined in step S502 that the read value is greater than or equal to the upper limit value (step S502; Yes), the random number latch flag is cleared by reading the random number value register (step S510), and the random value acquisition process is terminated. To do. Here, in the process of step S510, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D is read out in response to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening, while the game ball is in the second start winning prize. Corresponding to the case of passing (entering) the mouth, the numerical data stored in the random value register R2D is read. At this time, as in the process of step S505, for example, the random number value register R1D address specified by the first start opening winning table 136A set in the process of step S202 shown in FIG. 51 or set in the process of step S207. In addition, it is only necessary to be able to specify the address of the random value register from which the numerical data is read out in correspondence with the random value register R2D address specified in the second start opening winning table 136B.

  When the first start winning signal SS1 or the second start winning signal SS2 is input from the first start port switch 22A or the second start port switch 22B to the random number circuit 509 without passing through the CPU 505 or the like, the first special figure Regardless of the number of stored hold data in the hold storage unit 591A or the second special figure hold storage unit 591B, the random number value register R1D or the random value corresponds to the input of the first start winning signal SS1 or the second start winning signal SS2. Numerical data serving as a random number value is stored in the register R2D. At this time, the random number latch flag corresponding to the random number value register in which numerical data is stored is turned on, and storage of new numerical data is restricted. Therefore, when the number of stored data is equal to or greater than the upper limit value, if the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D is left without being read, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening are set. When a new game ball passes (enters), new numerical data corresponding to this game ball pass (entry) cannot be taken in and stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D. The numerical data stored corresponding to the game ball that has passed (or entered) may be read out, and an accurate random value may not be acquired. Therefore, even when the number of stored data reaches the upper limit, the process of step S510 is executed, and the random number latch flag is cleared by reading the random number value register, so that a new game ball can be passed (entered). Thus, it is possible to obtain numerical data that is an accurate random value. Note that the numerical data read from the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D by the processing of step S510 is not used for the determination processing whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit”, but is discarded as it is. (Erase) is sufficient.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step S205 or step S210 in FIG. 51 as the winning random number determination processing. In this embodiment, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol display result is displayed as “big hit” or “small hit” in special symbol normal processing (step S140 in FIG. 50, FIG. 55) described later. ”Or whether or not the big hit type or the small hit type is determined. In the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S141 in FIG. 50, FIG. 56) described later, the fluctuation pattern type is determined and the fluctuation pattern is determined. A decision is made. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 505 determines the random number value at the time of winning at step S205 or step S210 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). By executing the processing, it is specified in advance whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” and whether or not the decorative pattern variation pattern is at least a variation pattern with super reach. Thereby, before the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, the special figure display result becomes “big hit” or the reach effect of super reach is executed. It is predicted that, based on the prediction result, whether or not the continuous notice effect is executed over a plurality of variable displays by the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 on the effect control board 12 side is determined. it can.

  In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 53, the CPU 505 first determines whether or not the first starting winning prize has been passed (entered) through the first starting winning opening (step S521). At this time, if it is the first start opening winning (step S521; Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a big hit in the big hit gaming state (step S522). For example, in the process of step S522, the CPU 505 may determine that the big hit is being hit if the value of the special figure process flag is any of “4” to “7”.

  When it is determined in step S522 that the big hit is not made (step S522; No), it is determined whether or not the time reduction control is being performed in the time reduction state (step S523). For example, in the process of step S523, the CPU 505 may check the state of the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 592 and determine that the time reduction control is being performed if the time reduction flag is on. When it is determined in step S522 that the game is a big hit (step S522; Yes), or in the case where it is determined in step S523 that the time reduction control is being executed (step S523; Yes), a big hit / short time / win prize is notified. After the setting for transmitting the command B103H (see FIG. 12C), which is the first start opening winning designation command, to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S524), the time of winning is changed. The numerical value determination process ends. In response to the first start opening winning designation command for notifying such a big hit / short / short win, the production control board 12 sets the first special figure reserved storage number in the start winning storage display area 5H of the image display device 5. The display of the effect image that can be specified can be updated, and among the stored storage information corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure, there is one based on the start winning during the big hit or the short-time control Can be specified if included.

  When it is determined in step S523 that the time reduction control is not being performed (step S523; No), the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result based on the numerical data read in step S506 of FIG. Is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step S525). For example, in the process of step S525, the special figure display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. 34 is selected and set in the use table. Subsequently, by referring to the special figure display result determination table 130 set in the use table, whether the special figure display result corresponding to the random value MR1 based on the numerical data read in step S506 is “big hit”. It is determined whether or not. More specifically, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is compared with the determined value stored in the special figure display result determination table 130, and the special figure display to which the determined value matching the random value MR1 is assigned. It is determined whether or not the result is a “big hit”.

  When it is determined in step S525 that the random value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range (step S525; Yes), the winning jackpot determination is based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening. After the setting for transmitting the command B102H (see FIG. 12C) serving as the first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the main board 11 has been made from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step) S526), winning random number determination process is terminated. By means of the first start opening winning designation command for notifying such a big hit determination at the time of winning, the production control board 12 can specify the first special figure reserved memory number in the start winning memory display area 5H of the image display device 5. It is possible to update the display of the effect image and to indicate that the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” in the hold storage information corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure. It can be specified that things are included.

  If it is determined in step S525 that the random value MR1 is not within the jackpot determination range (step S525; No), the numerical value indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S508 of FIG. It is determined whether the data is within the specific pattern common range (step S527). Here, in the setting example of the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C shown in FIG. 37A and the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 133D shown in FIG. Regardless of the number of reserved memories, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the range of “230” to “251”, a specific variation pattern involving at least super reach (super reach α or super reach β) is present. The included variation pattern types CA2-4 are determined. Therefore, in the process of step S527, for example, as shown in FIG. 54, if the random value MR3 is within the range of “230” to “251”, it may be determined that it is within the specific pattern common range. In other words, the CPU 505 determines any one of the same determined values “230” to “251” set as at least a part of the determined value corresponding to the variation pattern type CA2-4 including the specific variation pattern with super reach and the random value. By determining whether or not SR3 matches, it is possible to determine whether or not the variation pattern with super reach is determined. Note that the decision value corresponding to the variation pattern type CA2-4 may include a decision value different from the same decision value, or only the same decision value is set and a decision other than the same decision value is determined. It may be set such that no value is assigned.

  When it is determined in step S527 that the random value MR3 is within the specific pattern common range (step S527; Yes), the random pattern MR3 is within the specific pattern common range based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening. Is set to transmit the command B101H (refer to FIG. 12C), which is the first start opening winning designation command for notifying that, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S528). ), The winning random number determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S527 that the random value MR3 is not within the specific pattern common range (step S527; No), based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening. A setting is made to transmit a command B100H (see FIG. 12C) serving as a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the pattern is outside the specific pattern common range from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. (Step S529), the winning random number determination process is terminated. In response to the first start opening prize designation command for notifying whether or not the specific pattern is within the common range, the effect control board 12 side stores the first special figure hold memory in the start prize storage display area 5H of the image display device 5. The display of the effect image that can specify the number can be updated. In addition, it is possible to specify whether or not the on-hold storage information corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure includes information indicating that the specific fluctuation pattern is determined.

  When it is determined in step S525 that the random value MR1 is not within the big hit determination range, it is determined whether or not the random value MR1 is within the small hit determination range, and the first start port corresponding to the determination result is determined. A winning designation command may be transmitted. As an example, when it is determined that it is within the small hit determination range, a setting for transmitting the command B102H similar to the process of step S526 to the effect control board 12 may be performed. In this case, the command B102H includes information indicating that the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small win” among the hold storage information corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure. The first start opening winning designation command for notifying the winning time determination. If it is determined that it is not within the small hit determination range, the process proceeds to step S527, and it may be determined whether or not the random value MR3 is within the specific pattern common range. Alternatively, if it is determined that it is within the small hit determination range, a first start opening winning designation command having a different EXT data setting from that determined to be within the big hit determination range in step S525 is transmitted. You may do it. In this case, on the side of the effect control board 12, among the stored storage information corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure, the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit”. The case where it is included and the case where it is included that indicates that the special figure display result is determined to be “small hit” can be distinguished and specified.

  If it is not the first start opening winning in step S521 (step S521; No), for example, the special figure display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. Then, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result based on the numerical data read out is within the jackpot determination range (step S530).

  If it is determined in step S530 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S530; Yes), the winning jackpot determination has been made based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening. Is set to transmit the command B202H (see FIG. 12 (C)) serving as the second start opening prize designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 from the main board 11 (step S531), and then winning. The random number value determination process ends. By means of the second start opening winning designation command for notifying the winning jackpot determination, the production control board 12 can specify the second special figure reserved storage number in the start winning storage display area 5H of the image display device 5. It is possible to update the display of the effect image and to indicate that the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” in the hold storage information corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure. It can be specified that things are included.

  If it is determined in step S530 that the random value MR1 is not within the jackpot determination range, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S508 of FIG. 52 is the specific pattern common range. It is determined whether it is within the range (step S532). At this time, similarly to the process of step S527, if the random value MR3 is within the range of “230” to “251”, it may be determined that it is within the specific pattern common range.

  When it is determined in step S532 that the random number MR3 is within the specific pattern common range (step S532; Yes), the random pattern MR3 is within the specific pattern common range based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening. After the setting for transmitting the command B201H (see FIG. 12C), which is the second start opening winning designation command for notifying that, is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S533). ), The winning random number determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S532 that the random number MR3 is not within the specific pattern common range (step S532; No), based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening. A setting is made to transmit a command B200H (see FIG. 12C), which is a second start opening winning designation command notifying that the specific pattern is out of the common range, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. (Step S534), the winning random number determination process is terminated. By the second start opening winning designation command for notifying whether or not it is within the specific pattern common range, on the side of the effect control board 12, the second special figure hold memory is stored in the start winning storage display area 5H of the image display device 5. The display of the effect image that can specify the number can be updated. In addition, it is possible to specify whether or not the on-hold storage information corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure includes information indicating that the specific fluctuation pattern is determined.

  When it is determined in step S530 that the random number MR1 is not within the big hit determination range, it is determined whether or not the random value MR1 is within the small hit determination range, and the second start port according to the determination result. A winning designation command may be transmitted. As an example, when it is determined that it is within the small hit determination range, a setting for transmitting the command B202H similar to the process of step S531 to the effect control board 12 may be performed. In this case, the command B202H includes information indicating that the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small win” among the hold storage information corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure. The second start opening winning designation command for notifying the winning time determination. If it is determined that it is not within the small hit determination range, the process proceeds to step S532, and it may be determined whether or not the random value MR3 is within the specific pattern common range. Alternatively, if it is determined that it is within the small hit determination range, a second start opening winning designation command having a different EXT data setting from that determined in step S531 as being within the big hit determination range is transmitted. You may do it. In this case, on the side of the effect control board 12, among the stored storage information corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure, the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit”. It is possible to distinguish and specify the case where it is included and the case where it is included that the special figure display result is determined to be “small hit”.

  When the winning random number determination process as described above is executed, when a game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening is detected (at the time of the first start winning or second Whether or not the special figure display result is determined as “big hit” regardless of the gaming state in the pachinko machine 1 or the special figure holding memory number that is the reserved memory number of the special figure game, It is determined whether or not a specific variation pattern with reach is determined, and different first start port winning designation commands and second start port winning designation commands are sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board according to these determination results. 12 can be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, among the determination values corresponding to the variation pattern types CA2-4 by assignment of the determination values in the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 133D. At least a part of is set with the same determined values “230” to “251” regardless of the total number of reserved storage at the start of variable display based on the establishment of the first start condition and the second start condition. Then, by determining whether or not the random value MR3 matches any one of the same determined values, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern with super reach is determined. The determination to be determined can be made with certainty. That is, even when it is determined in step S527 or step S532 that it is not within the specific pattern common range, it may be determined to be a variation pattern with super reach, while it is determined to be within the specific pattern common range. Sometimes, it is always determined to be a variation pattern with super reach and not a variation pattern without super reach.

  The determination values corresponding to the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-3 and the variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-3 different from the variation pattern type CA2-4 with super reach are the first start condition and the second start condition. Different decision values are set according to the total number of reserved memories at the start of variable display based on the establishment of. Among these, the decision value corresponding to the variation pattern type CA1-2 including the variation pattern PA1-2 that is a non-reach variation pattern for shortening is the total retention when the total retention storage number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. The number of memories is set to be larger than when the number is less than the predetermined number. For example, when the gaming state is a normal state, when the total number of reserved memories is “3” or more or “6” or more, it is more than when it is less than “3” or less than “6”. The determined value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2. In addition, when the time reduction control is performed when the game state is a probabilistic state or a short time state, when the total number of reserved memories is “1” or more or “2” or more, it is less than “1” or less than “2”. Compared with a certain case, many determination values are assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2. Therefore, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the average variable display time (such as special figure fluctuation time) is shortened compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number, and the operation rate in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced. Can be prevented.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S131 of FIG. 50, one of the processes of steps S140 to S150 is selected according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 592. And execute.

  The special symbol normal process of step S140 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In the special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol storage unit 591A and the second special symbol storage unit 591B. It is determined whether or not to start the special game using the display device 4B. Further, in the special symbol normal process, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. The variable display result is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) Either a small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is set.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S141 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a pre-decision result on whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, a reach decision result on whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, etc. The process includes determining a variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types, and determining a variation pattern as a plurality of types in accordance with the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  The special symbol variation process of step S142 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation process includes a process for performing setting for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, every time the special symbol variation process is executed in step S142, the value (special diagram variation timer value) in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 593 is subtracted by 1 or added by 1, Regardless of whether the game is a special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special game using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 4B. The elapsed time is measured by. It is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol variation processing uses the special symbol variation in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. This is a process for controlling the variation of special symbols in the special figure game by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S143 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the change of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol which is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed. A process for setting is included. Then, a determination is made as to whether one of the big hit flag and the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 592 is on. If the big hit flag is on, the special process flag The value is updated to “4”, and when the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S144 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In this big hit release pre-processing, the special symbol variable display result (special figure display result) in the special figure game is “big hit”, and the “left” and “right” released by the opening / closing operation of the accessory The setting for starting a round game in the big hit gaming state is made based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the variable winning device 40 from either of the winning entry 31L or 31R has passed (entered) the specific area 49. Done. As an example, the variable winning device 40 is provided corresponding to the big hit type when the special figure display result is “big hit” or the small hit type when the big win gaming state is caused by the occurrence of the V win. “Left” and “Right” bonus entry points 31L, 31R (in the case of “second big hit” or “second small hit”), or big prize opening 60 (“first big hit” or “first small hit” In the case of "", control for changing the closed state to the open state is performed.

  The big hit release process in step S145 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In the big hit release process, a process for controlling the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state is executed. As an example, the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the “left” and “right” accessory entrances 31L and 31R provided in the variable prize winning device 40, or after the big prize opening 60 is opened. Based on the process of measuring the elapsed time, the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the accessory count switches 23L, 23C, 23R or the big prize count switch 28, the “left” and “right” A process of determining whether or not it is time to return the winning combination entrance 31L, 31R or the special winning opening 60 from the open state to the closed state is performed.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S146 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In the big hit release post-processing, it is determined whether to shift to the next round in the big hit gaming state or to end the big hit gaming state.

  The big hit end process in step S147 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot ending process, an ending effect as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed by an effect electric component (effect device) such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. A process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period of time elapses, a process of performing various settings corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, and the like. Further, in the big hit end process, setting for controlling the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is ended to the short time state may be performed. As an example, the time reduction flag is set to the ON state, and a predetermined count initial value (for example, “100”) corresponding to the upper limit value of the special game that can be executed in the time reduction state is set in the time reduction counter The process to perform is performed.

  The small hit release pre-processing in step S148 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. In this small hitting pre-processing, the execution of the accessory opening / closing operation is started in the small hitting gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, etc. ”And“ Right ”accessory entrances 31L, 31R, and the like are included.

  The small hit releasing process in step S149 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hitting opening process, based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the “left” and “right” accessory entrances 31L, 31R are opened, the measured elapsed time, etc. ”And“ Right ”accessory entrances 31L and 31R are included to determine whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state.

  The small hit end process in step S150 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In this small hit end processing, a period during which an effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed by an electric component (effect device) for effects such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 The process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the elapses is included. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the state of the time flag may not be changed, and the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state may be continued.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S140 of FIG. 50 as the special symbol normal process. In this special symbol normal process, the CPU 505 first determines whether or not the second reserved memory count value indicating the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special diagram is “0” (step S221). . For example, in the process of step S221, it may be determined whether or not the second reserved storage count value read from the game control counter setting unit 594 is “0”. When the second reserved memory count value is other than “0” in step S221 (step S221; No), for example, the value of the variation special figure designation buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 595 is updated to “2”. (Step S222).

  When the second hold memory count value is “0” in step S221 (step S221; Yes), the first hold memory count value indicating the number of hold memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is “0”. It is determined whether or not (step S223). For example, in the process of step S223, it may be determined whether or not the first pending storage count value read from the game control counter setting unit 594 is “0”. When the first pending storage count value is other than “0” in step S223 (step S223; No), for example, the value of the variation special figure designation buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 595 is updated to “1”. (Step S224). Thus, in the process of step S223, when it is determined in step S221 that the second reserved memory count value is “0”, it is determined whether or not the first reserved memory count value is “0”. To do. Therefore, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

  It should be noted that the special game using the second special figure is not limited to a game that starts with priority over the special graphic game using the first special figure, and the first start prize opening and the second start prize opening are played. Each special game may be executed sequentially according to the order in which the balls have passed (entered). In other words, the execution may be started sequentially from the special game corresponding to the previously established start condition without distinguishing between the first start condition and the second start condition. Alternatively, it is determined which one of the first reserved memory count value and the second reserved memory count value is larger, and the special game using a special symbol corresponding to the larger count value is preferentially executed. You may make it do. In this case, the first reserved memory count value is compared with the second reserved memory count value, and when the first reserved memory count value is larger, the value of the variable special figure designation buffer is set to “1”. On the other hand, if the second reserved storage count value is larger, the value of the variable special figure designation buffer may be updated to “2”. If the first reserved memory count value and the second reserved memory count value match, the special game using the first special figure may be executed with priority, or the second special figure will be used. The special figure game that has been given may be executed with priority. In this way, by giving priority to the special figure game using the special symbol corresponding to the person with the larger reserved memory count value, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of invalid start winnings.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S222 and S224, the hold data is read from the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the variable special figure designation buffer value (step S225). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the special figure display result determination result is stored as the hold data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit 591A. Numeric data indicating the random value MR1, the random number MR2 for determining the hit type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are read out. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the special figure display result is shown as the hold data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the second special figure hold storage unit 591B. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determination, the random value MR2 for determining the hit type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are read out. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for variation provided in the game control buffer setting unit 595 or the like and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S225, the reserved memory count value corresponding to the variable special figure designation buffer value is decremented by one, and the special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to the variable special figure designation buffer value is subordinate to the holding number “1”. The stored contents of the hold data stored in the entries (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted up by one entry (step S226). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the first hold storage count value is decremented by 1, and the storage content of the hold data in the first special figure hold storage unit 591A is increased by one entry. Shift to. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory count value is decremented by 1, and the storage content of the reserved data in the second special figure reservation memory unit 591B is set to 1 Shift entries up one place.

  Thereafter, the special figure display result determination table 130 is selected and set as a use table for determining whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” (step S227). ). The CPU 505 refers to the special figure display result determination table 130 set in this way, and based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination included in the pending data read in step S225. Then, the special figure display result is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S228). Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result determined in step S228 is “big hit” (step S229).

  If it is determined in step S229 that the game is a “hit” (step S229; Yes), the big win flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 592 is set to the on state (step S230). At this time, the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types such as “first big hit” or “second big hit” (step S231). For example, in the process of step S231, the jackpot type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the hit type included in the pending data read in step S225, the big hit type is set to “first big hit” by referring to the big hit type determination table 131A. Alternatively, it is determined as “second big hit”. Also, the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 595, is set to a value corresponding to the determined jackpot type. As an example, the big hit type buffer value may be “0” if the big hit type is “first big hit”, and “1” if the big hit type is “second big hit”.

  When it is determined in step S229 that it is not “big hit” (step S229; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result determined in step S228 is “small hit” (step S232). ). When it is determined that the game is “small hit” (step S232; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 592 is set to the on state (step S233). At this time, the small hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types such as “first small hit” or “second small hit” (step S234). For example, in the process of step S234, the small hit type determination table 131B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, by referring to the small hit type determination table 131B based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the hit type included in the hold data read out in step S225, the small hit type is set to “No. It is determined to be “per small portion” or “second small portion”. Also, the small hit type buffer value, which is the stored value of the small hit type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 595, is set to a value corresponding to the determined small hit type. As an example, if the small hit type is “first small hit”, the small hit type buffer value may be “0”, and if it is “second small hit”, it may be “1”.

  When it is determined in step S232 that it is not “small hit” (step S232; No), after executing any of the processing of steps S231 and S234, whether to control the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state? In response to the pre-determined result of whether or not, the determination result of the big hit type in the case of the big hit gaming state, the determination result of the small hit type in the case of the small hit gaming state, etc., a fixed special symbol is set ( Step S235). As an example, when it is determined in step S232 that the special figure display result is not “small hit”, a lost pattern is obtained corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the special figure display result is “lost”. The special symbol of the number indicating “0” is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S232 that “small hit”, the numbers indicating “1” and “2” which are the small hit symbols according to the determination result of the small hit type in step S234. One of the special symbols is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the small hit type is “first small hit”, the special symbol of the number indicating “1” is set as the confirmed special symbol, while the small hit type is “second small hit”. Depending on the determination result, the special symbol of the number indicating “2” is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, if it is determined in step S229 that it is a “big hit”, according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S231, among the special symbols of the numbers indicating “3” and “5” that become the big hit symbols , Set one of them as a confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “first jackpot”, the special symbol of the number “3” is set as the confirmed special symbol, while the jackpot type is “second jackpot” according to the determination result Then, the special symbol of the number indicating “5” is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S235, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S236), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . Further, when the first reserved storage count value is “0” in step S223 (step S223; Yes), a predetermined demonstration display setting is performed (step S237), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. In the demonstration display setting in step S237, for example, a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In contrast, it is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not yet transmitted, the transmission setting of the customer waiting demonstration designation command may be performed by setting the storage address of the customer waiting demonstration designation command table in the ROM 506 in the transmission command buffer, for example.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S141 in FIG. 50 as the variation pattern setting process. In this variation pattern setting process, the CPU 505 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S251). If the big hit flag is on (step S251; Yes), the big hit variation pattern type determination table 133A is selected and set as a use table for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types (step S252). ). At this time, for example, by reading a big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 595 or the like, it is specified whether the big hit type is a plurality of types such as “first big hit” or “second big hit”. (Step S253).

  When the big hit flag is off in step S251 (step S251; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S254). If the small hit flag is ON (step S254; Yes), the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133B is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types (step S254; Yes). Step S255). At this time, for example, by reading the small hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 595 or the like, the small hit type is any of a plurality of types such as “first small hit” or “second small hit”. Whether it exists is identified (step S256).

  When the small hit flag is OFF in step S254 (step S254; No), for example, adding the first reserved memory count value and the second reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 594, Alternatively, the total number of reserved memories is specified by reading the total reserved memory count value (step S257). Then, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is on (step S258). At this time, if the time reduction flag is off (step S258; No), the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C is selected corresponding to the normal time when the time reduction control is not performed, The change pattern type is set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types (step S259). If the time reduction flag is ON in step S258 (step S258; Yes), the loss variation pattern type determination table (medium time reduction) 133D is selected corresponding to the time reduction control being performed. The variation pattern type is set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types (step S260).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S253, S256, S259, and S260, the usage table is updated based on, for example, numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type stored in the random number buffer for variation. By referring to the set variation pattern type determination table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S261). Here, in the process of step S261, the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the establishment of the first start condition is determined. Whether or not to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied. First, using the numerical data indicating the common random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type updated by a common random counter or the like, the variation pattern type may be determined as one of a plurality of types by a common processing module. it can.

  In the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C shown in FIG. 37A and the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 133D shown in FIG. In addition, as compared with the case where the total number of reserved memories is less than the predetermined number, more determined values are assigned to the variation pattern types CA1-2. For example, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C, when the total reserved memory number is “3” or more, the variation pattern type CA1 is compared to the case where the total reserved memory number is less than “3”. -2 is assigned a large number of decision values, and when the total number of reserved memories is “6” or more, the variation pattern is larger than when the total number of reserved memories is less than “6”. Many decision values are assigned to the type CA1-2. In the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time medium) 133D, when the total reserved memory number is “1” or more, the variation pattern is compared with the case where the total reserved memory number is “0” less than “1”. Many decision values are assigned to the type CA1-2, and when the total number of reserved memories is “2” or more, compared to the case where the total number of reserved memories is less than “2”, Many determination values are assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2. The variation pattern type CA1-2 includes a variation pattern PA3-1, a variation pattern PA3-2, a variation pattern PB3-1, and a variation pattern PB3-2 with super reach, and a non-reach variation pattern with a short special pattern variation time. Variation pattern PA1-2 is included. Accordingly, when the special figure display result is “losing”, the total reserved memory is stored when the total reserved memory number when the start condition (first start condition or second start condition) is satisfied is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. The variation pattern type is determined using a decision value in which the number of decision values corresponding to the variation pattern PA1-2 is set larger than when the number is less than the predetermined number. As a result, the average special figure fluctuation time can be made different according to the total number of reserved memories when the start condition is satisfied, especially when the number of special figure pending memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. By shortening the time, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the situation in which the operating rate of variable display decreases.

  After the variation pattern type is determined in step S261 in this way, the variation pattern determination table 134 is selected as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. Is set (step S262). Subsequently, by referring to the variation pattern determination table 134 set in step S262 based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random number MR4, the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is started. The variation pattern until the finalized special symbol or finalized decorative symbol as a result is derived and displayed is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S263). The numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern may be extracted from the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 594 when the process of step S263 is executed, 2 In the first special figure reservation storage unit 591A and the second special figure reservation storage unit 591B, together with the random numbers MR1 to MR3, the game balls that have passed through (entered) the start winning opening are detected. It may be stored as reserved data.

  In the process of step S263, whether or not the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol is determined by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the establishment of the first start condition, Regardless of whether or not the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed by using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second starting condition is satisfied, Using the numerical data indicating the common random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern updated by the counter or the like, the fixed special symbol or the fixed decorative symbol that becomes a variable display result after the variable symbol special display or decorative symbol is started to be displayed. The variation pattern until is derived and displayed is determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in the process of step S263, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to the determination table stored at the address of the ROM 506 set in the determination table pointer.

  Subsequent to the determination of the variation pattern in step S263, a special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determination result is set (step S264). Thereafter, according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the above (step S265). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B.

  After the process of step S265 is executed, settings are made to transmit various commands for starting the special symbol fluctuation (step S266). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 505 sequentially issues a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a display result designation command, etc. from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to transmit, setting data indicating a storage address (first address) in the ROM 506 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is set in the transmission command buffer. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 505 sequentially issues a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a display result designation command, etc. from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to transmit, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 506 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is set in the transmission command buffer. When the setting in step S266 is performed, every time the main-side communication control process in step S99 shown in FIG. 48 is executed after the special symbol process process is completed, the main board 11 changes to the effect control board 12. On the other hand, the first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the display result designation command, and the like are sequentially transmitted. It should be noted that the order in which the plurality of types of effect control commands are transmitted may be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like.

  Following the setting in step S266, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (step S267), and then the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S143 of FIG. 50 as the special symbol stop process. In this special symbol stop process, the CPU 505 first determines whether or not a special figure confirmation display flag provided, for example, in the game control flag setting unit 592 is on (step S281). Here, the special figure confirmation display flag is set to the ON state by the process of step S285 described later in response to the definite special symbol that is the special figure display result in the special figure game being derived and displayed.

  When the special figure confirmation display flag is OFF in step S281 (step S281; No), for example, among the special figure display control data stored in the ROM 506, the control data corresponding to the confirmed special symbol is set to be read. The setting for deriving and displaying the confirmed special symbol is performed (step S282). At this time, a setting for transmitting the symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S283). Further, a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) is set as the special figure confirmation display time (step S284). For example, in the process of step S284, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the special figure confirmation display time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 593. Then, after the special figure confirmation display flag is set to the on state (step S285), the special symbol stop process is terminated. In this way, after the fixed special symbol is derived and displayed by the process of step S282, the special symbol process processing corresponding to the occurrence of the timer interrupt is performed until the special symbol fixed display time set in step S284 elapses. Each time the stop process is executed, it is determined in step S281 that the special figure fixed display flag is on.

  When the special figure confirmation display flag is ON in step S281 (step S281; Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step S286). For example, in the process of step S286, the game control process timer value that is the stored value of the game control process timer in which the timer initial value is set by the process of step S284 is read, and whether or not the timer value has become “0”. Accordingly, it may be determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed. If the timer value is a value other than “0”, the game control process timer value is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the game control timer interrupt process is executed based on the occurrence of the timer interrupt. That's fine. At this time, if the special figure confirmation display time has not elapsed (step S286; No), the special symbol stop process is terminated to wait until the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed. When the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed in step S286 (step S286; Yes), after clearing the special figure confirmation display flag to turn it off (step S287), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is on. Determination is made (step S288).

  When the big hit flag is ON in step S288 (step S288; Yes), the big hit type buffer value is read (step S289). Then, a setting for controlling execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the read value in step S289 is performed (step S290). For example, when the jackpot type buffer value is “0”, the number of rounds for jackpot is set in the jackpot opening counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 594 corresponding to the jackpot type “first jackpot”. “15” (see FIG. 8A) may be set. On the other hand, when the big hit type buffer value is “1”, the big hit hour round is added to the accessory release counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 594 corresponding to the big hit type “second big hit”. The number “16” (see FIG. 8A) may be set. Thereafter, the CPU 505 sets a big hit state start waiting time (step S291). For example, in the process of step S291, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big hit state start waiting time may be set in the game control process timer. Thereafter, for example, a big hit state pre-start flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 592 or the like is set to an on state (step S292).

  Subsequent to the processing in step S292, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S293). In addition, a setting for ending the time saving state is performed (step S294). For example, in the process of step S294, if a process for clearing the time flag and turning it off, or a process for clearing the special figure variation counter for counting the number of times the special figure game is executed in the time reduction state, are executed. Good. Thereafter, the special symbol process flag value is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the big hit release pre-processing (step S295), and then the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

  When the big hit flag is off in step S288 (step S288; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S296). At this time, if the small hit flag is ON (step S296; Yes), the waiting time for starting the opening of the accessory is set (step S297). For example, in the process of step S297, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the bonus release start waiting time may be set in the game control process timer. Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S298). Also, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”, which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for small hits (step S299).

  When the small hit flag is OFF in step S296 (step S296; No), the special process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S300). After performing either of the processes of steps S299 and S300, it is determined whether or not to end the time-saving state (step S301), and the special symbol stop process is ended. For example, in the process of step S301, the special figure fluctuation count value, which is the stored value of the special figure fluctuation count counter, is updated by, for example, subtracting 1 or adding 1, and the updated special figure fluctuation count value is predetermined. It is determined whether or not the special game state end determination value matches. At this time, if it matches the special game state end determination value, the time reduction state may be ended and controlled to the normal state by clearing the time reduction flag and turning it off. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end determination value, the state of the time reduction flag may be maintained.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S148 of FIG. 50 as the small hit release pre-processing. In the small hit release pre-processing, the CPU 505 first determines whether or not the accessory release start waiting time has elapsed (step S311). For example, in the process of step S311, the game control process timer value in which the timer initial value is set by the process of step S297 shown in FIG. 57 is read, and depending on whether or not the timer value has become “0”, What is necessary is just to determine whether the opening start waiting time passed. At this time, if the accessory release start waiting time has not elapsed (step S311; No), it is sufficient to wait until the accessory release start waiting time elapses by ending the small hit release pre-processing.

  If the waiting time for starting the opening of the accessory has elapsed in step S311 (step S311; Yes), the small hit type is read as “first small hit” or “second small hit” by reading the small hit type buffer value. Which of the plurality of types is specified (step S312). Then, the control pattern previously associated with the read value in step S312 is selected from the accessory release control pattern CYA and the accessory release control pattern CYB, and set as a use pattern (step S313). For example, when the read value of the small hit type buffer is “0”, the accessory release control pattern CYA is set corresponding to the case where the small hit type is “first small hit”, while the read value is When “1”, the accessory release control pattern CYB is set corresponding to the case where the small hit type is “second small hit”. When the waiting time for starting the opening of an accessory has elapsed in step S311, a predetermined time (for example, 3000 ms) may be set as a game ball discharge waiting time. The game ball discharge waiting time is determined in step S333 (see FIG. 59), which will be described later, after the bonus release control time has elapsed, and when it is determined that the bonus has elapsed, It is determined whether or not the inner game ball count value is “0”.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S313, by clearing the in-function game ball counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 594, the in-function game ball count value as the stored value is initialized to “0”. (Step S314). And the setting for transmitting the hit start designation | designated command which notifies the start of the small hit game state with respect to the production | presentation control board 12 is performed (step S315). After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9” which is a value corresponding to the small hit release processing (step S316), and the small hit release pre-processing is terminated.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S149 of FIG. 50 as the small hit release process. In the small hit release process, the CPU 505 first determines whether or not the accessory release control time has elapsed (step S331). The accessory release control time is specified in advance in the accessory release control pattern CYA and the accessory release control pattern CYB set in the process of step S313 shown in FIG. If the accessory release control time has not elapsed (step S331; No), based on the accessory release control pattern CYA and the accessory release control pattern CYB set as the usage pattern, for example, drive control of the release solenoid 53, The accessory opening / closing operation is controlled (step S332). For example, in the process of step S332, the drive signal for the release solenoid 53 is determined according to whether the release solenoid output data read from the accessory release control pattern is “01 (ON)” or “00 (OFF)”. The output is started or stopped, and the output state of the drive signal is maintained until the accessory opening time or the accessory closing time elapses. Then, when the accessory release time or the accessory close time has elapsed, the next release solenoid output data is read to change the output state of the drive signal, and the output control of the drive signal may be repeated until the end code is reached. That is, in the process of step S332, output of the drive signal to the opening solenoid 53 is started or stopped, and the “left” and “right” accessory entry 31L, 31R provided in the variable winning device 40 is “left”. In addition, the control to change from the closed state to the open state and the control to change from the open state to the closed state are performed by the “right” blade members 32L and 32R.

  In step S331, if the waiting time for starting to release an accessory has elapsed (step S331; Yes), it is determined whether or not the waiting time for game ball discharge has elapsed (step S333). When the game ball discharge waiting time has not elapsed in step S333 (step S333; No), or after executing the process of step S332, drive control is set for the model solenoids 52L and 52R and the motor 56. (Step S334). For example, in the process of step S334, the output state is changed until a predetermined time elapses after starting or stopping the output of the drive signals to the model solenoids 52L, 52R and the motor 56 based on the distribution operation control pattern prepared in advance. Just keep it.

  Following the processing in step S334, it is determined whether any of the accessory count switches is on based on the detection signals from the accessory count switches 23L, 23C, and 23R (step S335). At this time, if any of the accessory count switches 23L, 23C, and 23R is on (step S335; Yes), a winning ball payout setting at the time of winning an accessory is performed (step S336). Note that when the prize ball payout setting is performed collectively in the prize ball process of step S98 shown in FIG. 48, the process of step S336 may not be executed. Alternatively, in the process of step S336, a flag indicating that a game ball that has entered the variable prize-winning device 40 has been detected from one of the “left” and “right” bonuses 31L and 31R is set to an on state. Just be fine.

  When the process of step S336 is executed, it is updated so as to add 1 to the in-function game ball count value (step S337). In addition, a setting for transmitting a prize winning detection command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S338). In addition, when any of the accessory count switches 23L, 23C, and 23R is on in step S335, a setting for updating the game ball discharge waiting time may be performed. Here, the game ball discharge waiting time corresponds to the start of the small hit gaming state, and when it is determined in step S311 shown in FIG. May be set. When a game ball that has entered the variable winning device 40 is detected by any of the accessory count switches 23L, 23C, and 23R, the variable winning device is updated by updating the game ball discharge waiting time to be extended. What is necessary is just to secure time for detecting the game ball etc. discharged | emitted from 40. FIG. On the other hand, when a game ball that has entered the variable winning device 40 is not detected, when the game ball discharge waiting time set corresponding to the start of the small hit gaming state has elapsed. The setting for ending the small hit gaming state may be performed. In addition, as a game ball discharge waiting time set in response to the start of the small hit game state, the time required for the game ball that has entered the variable winning device 40 to be discharged (design time) A sufficiently longer time is set so that the game ball discharge waiting time is not updated even when any of the accessory count switches 23L, 23C, and 23R is on in step S335. Good.

  If a plurality of accessory count switches among the accessory count switches 23L, 23C, and 23R are on in step S335, steps S335 to S338 are performed according to the number of accessory count switches that are turned on. The above process may be repeated. When all of the accessory count switches 23L, 23C, and 23R are off in step S335 (step S335; No), after executing the process of step S338, it is determined whether or not the specific area switch 24 is on. Determination is made (step S339). At this time, if the specific area switch 24 is on (step S339; Yes), the V winning flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 592 is set to the on state (step S340). Moreover, the setting for transmitting the V winning detection command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S341).

  When the specific area switch 24 is off in step S339 (step S339; No), after executing the process of step S341, it is determined whether or not the discharge port switch 25 is on (step S342). At this time, if the discharge port switch 25 is OFF (step S342; No), the small hit opening process is terminated. On the other hand, when the discharge port switch 25 is on (step S342; Yes), it is updated to subtract 1 from the in-game game ball count value (step S343), and then the small hit release process is terminated. To do.

  When the game ball discharge waiting time has elapsed in step S333 (step S333; Yes), it is determined whether or not the in-function game ball count value is “0” (step S344). At this time, if the game ball count value in the bonus game is “0” (step S344; Yes), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10” corresponding to the small hit end process ( In step S345), the small hit opening process is terminated. On the other hand, when the in-function game ball count value is other than “0”, the processing in step S345 is not executed and the small hit releasing process is terminated, and the in-function game ball count value is “0”. Wait until In addition, when the predetermined time has passed without the in-function game ball count value being “0” in step S344, it is determined that an abnormal discharge of the game ball that has entered the variable winning device 40 has occurred, For example, a setting for transmitting an abnormality notification designation command to the effect control board 12 may be performed by executing predetermined error processing.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S150 of FIG. 50 as the small hit end process. In this small hitting end process, the CPU 505 first determines whether or not the small hitting end effect waiting flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 592 is on (step S361). Here, the small hit end effect waiting flag is set to the ON state by the process of step S365 described later in response to the execution of the effect operation at the end of the small hit gaming state.

  When the small hit end effect waiting flag is OFF in step S361 (step S361; No), setting for stopping driving of the model solenoids 52L and 52R and the motor 56 is performed (step S362). Here, for example, after setting for starting the driving of the model solenoids 52L and 52R and the motor 56 by the processing of step S334 shown in FIG. 59, before it is determined that the driving is stopped, in step S344 There is a case where it is determined in the process that the game ball count value in the accessory is “0” and the process of step S334 is not executed. Even in this case, the driving of the model solenoids 52L and 52R and the motor 56 can be reliably stopped by the process of step S362.

  After the process of step S362 is executed, a setting for transmitting a hit end designation command for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S363). Also, a small hit end effect waiting time is set (step S364). Then, after setting the small hitting end effect waiting flag to the on state (step S365), the small hitting end process is temporarily ended. In this way, after the hit end designation command transmission setting is performed in step S363, until the small hit end effect waiting time set in step S364 elapses, the special symbol process processing corresponding to the occurrence of the timer interrupt is performed. Each time the post-discharge setting process is executed, it is determined in step S361 that the small hit end effect waiting flag is on.

  When the small hit end effect waiting flag is ON in step S361 (step S361; Yes), it is determined whether or not the small hit end effect waiting time has elapsed (step S366). At this time, if the small hit end effect waiting time has not elapsed (step S366; No), the small hit end processing is once ended. On the other hand, when the small hit end effect waiting time has elapsed (step S366; Yes), after the small hit end effect waiting flag is cleared and turned off (step S367), the V winning flag is on. It is determined whether or not (step S368). When the V winning flag is off (step S368; No), the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S369), and then the small hit end processing is terminated.

  When the V winning flag is ON in step S368 (step S368; Yes), the small hit type buffer value is read (step S370). And the setting for controlling execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the read value in step S370 is performed (step S371). For example, when the small hit type buffer value is “0”, the big control provided in the game control counter setting unit 594 corresponds to the fact that the V hit is generated with the small hit type being “first small hit”. It is only necessary to set “15” (see FIG. 8 (A)) as the number of rounds at the big hit in the winning opening opening counter. On the other hand, when the small hit type buffer value is “1”, it is provided in the game control counter setting unit 594 in response to occurrence of the V winning when the small hit type is “second small hit”. It is only necessary to set “16” (see FIG. 8A), which is the number of rounds at the big hit, in the bonus release counter.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S371, a big hit state start waiting time is set (step S372). Further, the big hit state pre-start flag is set to the on state (step S373). Then, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the big hit release pre-processing (step S374), the small hit end processing is ended.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S97 of FIG. 48 as normal symbol process processing. In this normal symbol process, the CPU 505 first executes a gate passage determination process (step S161). For example, in the gate passage determination process in step S161, it is determined whether or not a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 has been detected based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21, and if there is no detection, the gate passage determination process is performed as it is. finish. On the other hand, if there is a detection of a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41, a general-purpose reserved storage count value indicating the number of reserved general-purpose memories stored in the general-purpose reserved storage unit 591C It is determined whether or not the value is a predetermined value (for example, “4”) as the holding upper limit value. At this time, if the usual figure holding upper limit value has been reached, the passage of the current game ball at the passing gate is invalidated and the gate passing determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the usual figure hold upper limit value has not been reached, the random number value MR5 for determining the usual figure display result is indicated from among the numerical data updated by the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 594, for example. Extract numerical data. The numerical value data indicating the random value MR5 extracted at this time is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the general-purpose reserved storage unit 591C, whereby the random value MR5 is stored. In this case, after updating so as to add 1 to the usual reserved memory number count value, the gate passage determination process is terminated.

  After executing the gate passage determination process of step S161, the CPU 505 selects any of the processes of steps S170 to S173 shown in FIG. And run.

  The normal symbol normal process in step S170 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “0”. In this normal symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display device 20 starts the normal symbol game based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the normal symbol storage unit 591C. At this time, for example, when there is pending data stored in the universal figure storage unit 591C, the universal figure display result, which is a variable display result of the normal symbol in the usual figure game, is set to “per common figure” or “normal figure” After the general map display result determination process for determining whether to “miss” is performed, the value of the general map process flag is updated to “1”.

  In the general map display result determination process, the general map display result determination table 135 is referred to based on numerical data indicating the random number MR5 for determining the general map display result included in the reserved data read from the general map storage unit 591C. To determine the normal map display result. Here, in the general map display result determination table 135, when the time reduction flag is on, the ratio of the decision to make the general map display result “per map” is higher than when the time reduction flag is off. As described above, the determined value is assigned to the normal map display result. As a result, when the time reduction control is performed in the special game state such as the short time state, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in the normal game is compared with the case where the time reduction control is not performed in the normal state or the like. Becomes more likely to be “per game”, so that the frequency of the normally variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port) is increased, and the game ball easily passes (enters) the second starting winning port. .

  In the general map display result determination process, the general map change time corresponding to the general map display result is also determined. At this time, when the time reduction flag is on, the normal time fluctuation time is set to be shorter than when the time reduction flag is off. As a result, when the time reduction control is performed in the special game state such as the short-time state, the interval for deriving and displaying the normal symbol variable display result in the normal game is shortened. The interval at which the display result is derived and displayed is also shortened, the frequency with which the normally variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port) is opened is increased, and the game ball easily passes (enters) the second starting winning port. . Further, in the general map display result determination process, when the general map display result is “per normal map”, the time (open time) or the time during which the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B (second start winning port) is opened You may set the frequency | count (opening frequency) made into a state. At this time, when the time reduction flag is on, the opening time and the number of times of opening are set to be larger than when the time reduction flag is off. Thereby, when the time reduction control is performed in the special game state such as the short time state, the game ball is increased by increasing the time and the number of times that the normally variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port) is opened. Can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening. It should be noted that the setting for opening the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B (second start winning opening) may be performed in the normal symbol stop process in step S172 or the normal electric accessory actuating process in step S173.

  The normal symbol variation process of step S171 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “1”. In this normal symbol variation process, the normal symbol display 20 is set to vary the normal symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the normal symbol is measured. Further, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time thus measured has reached a predetermined normal time fluctuation time.

  The normal symbol stop process in step S172 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “2”. In this normal symbol stop process, the normal symbol display 20 stops the change of the normal symbol based on the elapse of the normal symbol change time, and the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). ) To make settings. The ordinary electric accessory actuating process of step S173 is executed when the value of the usual process flag is “4”. In this ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the movable wing piece (left and right) provided in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B corresponding to the fact that the variable display result (the general map display result) in the general game is "per normal map". The pair of opening / closing blades) is moved from the vertical position to the tilting position, and settings for changing the normally variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port) from the closed state to the open state are performed.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 is activated, and the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 62 is executed. Also in the production control microcomputer 120, the security check process may be executed by the CPU when the power is turned on or the system is reset, and the production control microcomputer 120 may be in the security mode. In this case, after it is determined in the security check process that no unauthorized changes have been made to the ROM, after the security time has elapsed, the process shifts to a user mode in which execution of the effect control main process is started. That's fine. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 62 is started, the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S401), and is built in or externally attached to the effect control microcomputer 120. The RAM is cleared, various initial values are set, and the register of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the microcomputer 120 for effect control is set.

  Thereafter, the effect random number update process is executed (step S402), and numerical data indicating random values counted by a random counter provided in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 120 as various random values used for effect control. Is updated by software. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S403). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) elapses based on the CTC register setting in the effect control microcomputer 120, for example.

  On the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the production control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interruption that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt may be an interrupt generated when the received data is full in the serial communication circuit included in the production control microcomputer 120, for example. Alternatively, when a signal line for transmitting an effect control INT signal is wired between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12, an interrupt is generated when the effect control INT signal is turned on. Also good. In response to the occurrence of such an interrupt, the CPU of the production control microcomputer 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt prohibition state is used, an interrupt prohibition instruction (DI It is desirable to issue an order). The CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt due to reception data full or an interrupt due to the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, communication data stored in a communication data register or the like provided corresponding to the serial communication circuit of the effect control microcomputer 120 is fetched. Alternatively, in the command reception interrupt process, a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 18 among the input ports included in the PIP or the like included in the effect control microcomputer 120. A control signal that becomes an effect control command may be captured. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 120, for example. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is off in step S403 (step S403; No), the process returns to step S402. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on in step S403 (step S403; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S404), and command analysis processing is executed (step S405). . In the command analysis process executed in step S405, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S405, an effect control process is executed (step S406). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a lighting operation in the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are performed. With respect to the control content of the effect operation using the (effect device), determination, determination, setting, and the like according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 are performed. After performing the effect control process, the process returns to step S402.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process executed in step S404 of FIG. 62 as the effect control command analysis process. In this effect control command analysis process, the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 first determines whether or not a first start opening winning designation command has been received (step S551). For example, the effect control command received on the side of the effect control board 12 is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, and the command stored in the effect control command receiving buffer is read to confirm the contents. It is only necessary to be able to identify the effect control command.

  When it is determined in step S551 that the first start opening winning designation command has been received (step S551; Yes), display update setting corresponding to the first starting opening winning is set (step S552). For example, in the process of step S552, one of the display parts corresponding to the first start winning opening that is not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H provided in the display area of the image display device 5 is displayed in the first place. A display setting for changing to blue display may be performed in accordance with the establishment of the first start condition by detecting the game ball that has passed (entered) the 1 start winning opening.

  Following the processing of step S552, for example, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice fluctuation count value, which is the stored value of the continuous notice fluctuation counter provided in a predetermined area in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 120, is “0”. (Step S553). Here, the continuous notice variation counter is notified that the winning jackpot determination or the specific pattern is within the common range by the first starting port winning designation command or the second starting port winning designation command transmitted from the main board 11. Sometimes, the total number of reserved memories and the second special figure reserved memory number after the start winning are set, and the decorative symbols are variably displayed corresponding to the start of the execution of the special figure game until the count value becomes “0”. It is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time it is started. Therefore, when the continuous notice fluctuation count value is other than “0”, the variable storage in which the winning jackpot determination is made or the variable display in which the determination is made within the specific pattern common range is included in the hold storage information.

  When the continuous notice fluctuation count value is other than “0” in step S553 (step S553; No), the winning storage jackpot determination or the determination within the specific pattern common range is performed on the stored storage information based on the start winning that has occurred previously. Therefore, the effect control command analysis process is terminated. When the continuous notice variation count value is “0” in step S553 (step S553; Yes), whether or not the winning big hit determination is notified by reading the EXT data in the first start opening winning designation command, for example. Is determined (step S554). At this time, if the winning jackpot determination is not notified (step S554; No), it is determined whether it is notified that it is within the specific pattern common range (step S555).

  If it is not notified in step S555 that it is within the specific pattern common range (step S555; No), the effect control command analysis process is terminated. When the winning jackpot determination is notified in step S554 (step S554; Yes), or when it is notified in step S555 that it is within the specific pattern common range (step S555; Yes), for example, production control The continuous notice flag provided in a predetermined area or the like in the RAM of the microcomputer 120 is set to the on state (step S556).

  After the process of step S556 is executed, the total reserved storage number after the start winning is set as the continuous notice variation count value (step S557), and the effect control command analysis process is terminated. When the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, the total number of reserved memories is set to the continuous notice fluctuation count value in the process of step S557. By setting, it is possible to specify the number of variable displays to be executed before the variable display based on the pending storage information for which the winning jackpot determination or the determination within the specific pattern common range is performed. The total reserved memory number only needs to be specified, for example, by reading the EXT data of the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11.

  When it is determined in step S551 that the first start opening winning designation command has not been received (step S551; No), it is determined whether or not the second starting opening winning designation command has been received (step S558). And when it determines with having received the 2nd start opening winning designation | designated command (step S558; Yes), the setting of the display update corresponding to the 2nd starting opening winning is performed (step S559). For example, in the process of step S559, one of the display parts corresponding to the second start winning opening that is not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H provided in the display area of the image display device 5 is displayed in the first place. The display setting for changing to red display may be performed in accordance with the establishment of the second start condition by detecting the game ball that has passed (entered) the 2 start winning opening.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S559, whether or not the continuous notice fluctuation count value is “0”, that is, whether or not the winning storage jackpot determination based on the start winning that has occurred previously, determination within the common pattern common range determination It is determined whether or not has been made (step S560). At this time, if the continuous notice variation count value is other than “0” (step S560; No), the effect control command analysis process is terminated. When the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, the first special figure to be notified by the continuous notice effect is used. If the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the special game using the second special figure is executed before the special figure game is started, This causes a shift in the variable display. Therefore, even when the continuous notice fluctuation count value is other than “0” in the process of step S560, as in the case where the continuous notice fluctuation count value exceeds the second special figure holding storage number, the big hit judgment at the time of winning is determined. If the reserved storage information that has been determined within the specific pattern common range is based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening, for example, the continuous notice variation count value is cleared and “ After the initialization to “0”, the process may proceed to step S561.

  When the continuous notice fluctuation count value is “0” in step S560 (step S560; No), for example, whether or not the winning jackpot determination is notified by reading the EXT data in the second start opening winning designation command or the like. Is determined (step S561). At this time, if the winning jackpot determination is not notified (step S561; No), it is determined whether it is notified that it is within the specific pattern common range (step S562).

  If it is not notified in step S562 that it is within the specific pattern common range (step S562; No), the effect control command analysis process is terminated. When the winning jackpot determination is notified in step S561 (step S561; Yes), or when it is notified in step S562 that it is within the specific pattern common range (step S562; Yes), the continuous notice flag Is set to the ON state (step S563).

  After executing the process of step S563, after setting the second special figure holding memory number after the start winning prize as the continuous notice variation count value (step S564), the effect control command analysis process is ended. When the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, the number of the second special figure reservation memory is continuously changed in the process of step S564. By setting the count value, it is possible to specify the number of variable displays that are executed before the variable display based on the pending storage information that has been determined to be a winning jackpot determination or within a specific pattern common range. The second special figure reserved storage number only needs to be specified based on, for example, the difference between the reception number of the second start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the reception number of the second variation start command. For example, the second special figure hold specific count value, which is the stored value of the second special figure hold specific counter, is updated so as to be incremented by 1 every time the second start opening winning designation command is received, and the second variation start command is received. It is only necessary to update so that 1 is subtracted every time so that the second special figure reservation storage number can be specified.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S406 of FIG. 62 as the effect control process. In this effect control process, the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 performs the following steps S180 to S186 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 120, for example. Select one of the processes to execute.

  The decorative symbol variation start waiting process in step S180 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In the decorative symbol variation start waiting process, the image display device 5 depends on whether one of the first variation start command and the second variation start command is received as the variation start command transmitted from the main board 11. Including a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area It is. At this time, if it is determined to start variable display, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The decorative symbol variation setting process in step S181 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this decorative symbol variation setting process, the start of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the start of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to perform various production operations including variable display of decorative symbols, the final decorative symbols and temporary stop symbols that are the final stop symbols according to the variation pattern and variable display results, etc. And a process of selecting and setting one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns prepared in advance as usage patterns according to the determination result. After such determination and setting are performed, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”.

  The decorative pattern changing process in step S182 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the decorative symbol variation processing, for example, an effect control pattern to be used corresponding to a value of an effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 120 or the like A process for reading out various control data from, and performing various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols is included. Then, for example, the decoration control process timer value becomes a predetermined variable display end value (for example, “0”), or the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. A final decorative symbol as a final stop symbol that is a variable display result of the symbol is displayed in a completely stopped state. If the effect control process timer value is set to the variable display end value and the fixed decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped state, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. Sometimes, without depending on the effect control command from the main board 11, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the determined decorative symbol on the effect control board 12 side. When the confirmed decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The decorative symbol variation end process in step S183 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. This decoration symbol variation end process includes a process of determining whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. At this time, if it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to “4” when the variable display result specified from the hit start designation command is “big hit”. Is done. On the other hand, when the variable display result specified from the hit start designation command is “small hit”, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the hit start designation command, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the variable display result being “lost”.

  The effect process during the big hit control in step S184 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the effect processing during the big hit control, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” or the like is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Or by outputting sound number data to the sound control board 13 and outputting sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, and turning on the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED by outputting an electric decoration signal to the lamp control board 14 This includes processing for controlling various performance operations in the big hit gaming state such as turning off / off / flashing. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The effect process during small hit control in step S185 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In the effect process during the small hit control, for example, an effect control pattern is set in response to the variable display result being “small hit”, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the image display device 5. Displaying in the area, outputting sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the sound number data to the sound control board 13, and outputting the electric decoration signal to the lamp control board 14 for the game effect lamp 9 and decoration Processing for controlling various performance operations in the small hit gaming state such as turning on / off / flashing the LED is included. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to, for example, the end of the small hit gaming state specified by the hit end specifying command transmitted from the main board 11. If the control of the effect operation that notifies the end of the small hit gaming state is executed in the effect process during the small hit control, the effect process flag is cleared and the value is initialized to “0”. It may be. On the other hand, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” in response to, for example, the start of the big hit gaming state is designated by the hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The ending effect process in step S186 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this ending effect process, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. In addition, sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the sound number data to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are turned on / off by outputting an electric decoration signal to the lamp control board 14. This includes processing for controlling various performance operations corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, such as blinking / flashing. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the end of the effect operation.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S181 shown in FIG. 64 as the decorative symbol variation setting processing. In this decorative pattern variation setting process, the CPU of the production control microcomputer 120 first reads the EXT data in the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and the special figure display result is “lost”. It is determined whether or not (step S601). At this time, if it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost” (step S601; Yes), it is designated by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to a case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” (step S602).

  If it is determined in step S602 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S602; Yes), a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S603). As an example, in the process of step S603, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like built in the effect control microcomputer 120 is extracted, and the effect control microcomputer 120 is extracted. By referring to a predetermined left determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM or the like, the left that is stopped and displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols. Determine the final decorative pattern. Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like is extracted, and a predetermined decorative symbol is determined by referring to a predetermined right determined symbol determining table stored in advance in a ROM or the like. Among these, the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like and referring to a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in a ROM or the like, the fixed decorative symbol is Among them, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed on the “medium” decorative symbol display portion 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined.

  When it is determined in step S602 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S602; No), a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting a reach combination is determined (step S604). As an example, in the process of step S604, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a left / right fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like built in the effect control microcomputer 120 is extracted, and the effect control microcomputer 120 is extracted. The left and right decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols by referring to a predetermined left / right determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM or the like. The decorative symbols having the same symbol number that are stopped and displayed at the same time are determined. Further, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like and referring to a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in a ROM or the like, Among them, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display unit 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not the jackpot combination but the reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S601 that the special figure display result is not “losing” (step S601; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S605). . At this time, if it is determined that the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S605; Yes), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the small hit combination is determined (step S606). As an example, in the process of step S606, the combination of the determined decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the reach combination may be determined by executing the same process as the process of step S604.

  When it is determined in step S605 that the special figure display result is not “small hit” (step S605; No), the final stop constituting the big hit combination corresponding to the special figure display result being “big hit” A combination of the determined decorative symbols to be symbols is determined (step S607). As an example, in the process of step S607, first, numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the big hit fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like incorporated in the production control microcomputer 120 is extracted, and the production control microcomputer 120 is used. By referring to a predetermined jackpot fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM or the like, the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, A decorative symbol having the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed in line with 5R is determined.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S603, S604, S606, and S607, settings for executing variable display effects such as “pseudo-continuous” and “slip” are performed (step S608). For example, in the process of step S608, variable display effects such as “pseudo-continuous” and “slip” are executed in accordance with the variation pattern specified by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not. At this time, if it is determined that the variable display effect of “pseudo train” or “slip” is to be executed, the variable display effect of “pseudo train” is temporarily stopped and displayed as one of a plurality of types of pseudo train chances. And the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the variable display effect of “slip” are determined.

  After executing the processing of step S608, continuous notice setting processing is executed (step S609). Subsequently, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S610). At this time, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command or the like, any one of a plurality of special figure variation production control patterns is selected and set as a use pattern. Further, in response to the setting of the variable display effect in step S608 and the setting of the continuous notice effect in step S609, any one of a plurality of special figure changing time effect control patterns may be selected and set as a use pattern. .

  Subsequent to the processing in step S610, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer built in the effect control microcomputer 120 is set corresponding to the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command (step S611). And the setting for starting the fluctuation | variation of the decoration design in the image display apparatus 5 is performed (step S612). At this time, for example, the display control command designated by the display control data included in the special-figure variation effect control pattern determined as the use pattern in step S610 is transmitted to the VDP 121, etc. It is only necessary to start the variation of the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation process (step S613), and the decorative symbol variation setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S609 of FIG. 65 as the continuous notice setting processing. In the continuous notice setting process, the CPU of the production control microcomputer 120 first determines whether or not the continuous notice flag is on (step S701). At this time, if the continuous notice flag is off (step S701; No), the continuous notice setting process is terminated.

  When the continuous notice flag is on in step S701 (step S701; Yes), the continuous notice fluctuation count value is updated to be subtracted by 1 (step S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the updated continuous notice fluctuation count value has become “0” (step S703). At this time, if the continuous notice fluctuation count value is “0” (step S703; Yes), the continuous notice flag is cleared and turned off (step S704), and then the continuous notice setting process is terminated. Note that even when the continuous notice fluctuation count value becomes “0” in step S703, determination or setting for executing the continuous notice effect may be performed. In step S703, the continuous notice fluctuation count value becomes “0” when the variable display of the decorative symbol to be notified of the possibility that the special figure display result becomes “big hit” by the continuous notice effect is started. It is. Therefore, by performing determination and setting for executing the continuous notice effect at this time as well, the continuous notice effect can be executed even during the variable display of the decorative symbol to be notified.

  When the continuous notice fluctuation count value is other than “0” in step S703 (step S703; No), it is determined whether or not the continuous notice fluctuation count value is “3” or more (step S705). When the continuous notice variation count value is “3” or more (step S705; Yes), the continuous notice effect of the notice effect YD1 is determined from among a plurality of kinds of effect forms (effect contents) prepared in advance. (Step S706), the continuous notice setting process is terminated.

  When the continuous notice fluctuation count value is less than “3” in step S705 (step S705; No), it is determined whether or not the continuous notice fluctuation count value is “2” (step S707). Then, when the continuous notice variation count value is “2” (step S707; Yes), it is determined as a continuous notice effect of the notice effect YD2 among a plurality of types of effect modes (effect contents) prepared in advance ( In step S708, the continuous notice setting process is terminated.

  When the continuous notice fluctuation count value is not “2” in step S707 (step S707; No), corresponding to the fact that the continuous notice fluctuation count value is “1”, a plurality of types of effect forms (effect contents). Among them, after determining to be the continuous notice effect of the notice effect YD3 (step S709), the continuous notice setting process is ended.

  In this way, after the continuous notice flag is turned on based on the winning jackpot determination or the notification of the specific pattern common range, the continuous notice effect is executed until the continuous notice fluctuation count value becomes “0”. be able to. In addition, when the winning jackpot determination or notification within the specific pattern common range is notified, it is not limited to the case where the continuous notice effect is always executed, and it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is executed at a predetermined rate. You may do it. As an example, when the winning jackpot determination is notified, it may be determined that the continuous notice effect is executed at a higher rate than when the specific pattern common range is notified. Further, even when the winning jackpot determination or the specific pattern common range is not notified, it may be determined that the continuous notice effect is executed at a predetermined rate. In this case, the decision to execute the continuous notice effect may be made at a different rate depending on whether or not the winning big jackpot determination or the specific pattern common range is notified. As an example, when a winning jackpot determination or notification within a specific pattern common range is notified, it may be determined that the continuous notice effect is executed at a higher rate than when these are not notified.

  In the continuous advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 66, until the variable display of the decorative symbol to be notified of the possibility that the special figure display result becomes “big hit” by the continuous advance notice effect indicated by the continuous advance fluctuation count value is started. Depending on the remaining number of special figure games to be executed, continuous notice effects of different effect modes (effect contents) are determined. On the other hand, regardless of the remaining number of times of the special figure game (continuous notice variation count value) that is executed until the variable display of the decorative symbol to be notified is started, the same effect mode (effect content) is obtained. The notice effect may be determined to be executed as a continuous notice effect. In addition, the determination ratio of the effect mode (effect content) in the continuous notice effect may be varied depending on which of the winning jackpot determination and the specific pattern common range is notified. As an example, when a winning jackpot determination is notified, a specific effect mode (for example, a notice effect that notifies a message of “It's hot!”) Is higher than when a specific pattern common range is notified. It may be determined as follows.

  Continuous notice effects over a plurality of variable displays may be determined collectively. As an example, a plurality of continuous notice effect patterns showing the effect mode (effect contents) corresponding to each of multiple variable displays are prepared in advance, and the total is obtained when the big hit determination at the time of winning or the notification within the specific pattern common range is notified Any continuous notice effect pattern may be determined based on the number of reserved memories. In this case, the determination ratio for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect may be varied depending on the total number of reserved memories. For example, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, it may be determined that the continuous notice effect is executed at a higher rate than when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step S182 of FIG. 64 as the decorative symbol variation processing. In this decorative pattern changing process, the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 updates the effect control process timer value (for example, 1) (step S621), and then uses the updated effect control process timer value as the effect control pattern. Is compared with the production control process timer determination value indicated by, it is determined whether or not any of the timer determination values is met (step S622).

  If the timer judgment value is matched in step S622 (step S622; Yes), the presentation control execution data (for example, display control data, voice control data, etc.) stored in the presentation control pattern in association with the timer judgment value. The lamp control data, a part or all of the operation detection control data) or the end code is read (step S623). Here, when the plurality of timer determination values indicated by the effect control pattern match the effect control process timer value in step S622, the plurality of effect controls stored in association with the matched timer determination values. The execution data may be read in step S623. In step S623, it is determined whether an end code has been read (step S624). At this time, when it is determined that it is not the end code (step S624; No), after executing the effect control command process for controlling the effect operation according to the effect control execution data read in step S623. (Step S625), the decorative symbol variation processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S624 that it is an end code (step S624; Yes), for example, by setting a predetermined timer initial value in the effect control process timer, the hit start designation command reception waiting time is set. This is performed (step S626). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” that is a value corresponding to the process at the end of decoration symbol variation (step S627), and then the process during decoration symbol variation is terminated. Thus, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the decorative symbol variation end process is executed, and if the hit start designation command is not received before the hit start designation command reception waiting time elapses, the effect process flag is cleared, The value is initialized to “0”. On the other hand, if a hit start designation command is received before the hit start designation command reception waiting time elapses, effect control is performed depending on whether the special figure display result is “small hit” or “big hit”. When the process flag value is updated to “4” (when the special figure display result is “big hit”) or “5” (when the special figure display result is “small hit”), the small hit or big hit It is only necessary that the production operation is controlled.

  In addition, when it does not match any of the timer determination values in step S622 (step S622; No), the decorative symbol changing process is ended. However, if it is determined that the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received after executing the process of step S622 or before executing the process of step S622, the process proceeds to step S626. The decorative symbol variation end process may be executed when the next timer interrupt occurs.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process executed in step S625 illustrated in FIG. 67 as the effect control command process. In the effect control command process, the CPU of the effect control microcomputer 120 specifies the type of effect control execution data read out in the process of step S623 shown in FIG. 67 (step S721). At this time, it is only necessary to specify which control data is included among the display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, and operation detection control data included in the presentation control execution data.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the specified effect control execution data is display control data (step S722). At this time, if it is determined that the data is display control data (step S722; Yes), a setting for sending a display control command designated by the display control data to the VDP 121 or the like is performed (step S723).

  When it is determined in step S722 that the display control data is not (step S722; No), after the process of step S723 is executed, it is determined whether the specified effect control execution data is audio control data. (Step S724). At this time, when it is determined that it is voice control data (step S724; Yes), a sound effect signal corresponding to the sound number data designated by the voice control data is sent to the voice control board 13. Setting is performed (step S725).

  When it is determined in step S724 that the data is not voice control data (step S724; No), after executing the process of step S725, it is determined whether or not the specified effect control execution data is lamp control data. (Step S726). At this time, if it is determined that the data is lamp control data (step S726; Yes), a setting is made to send an illumination signal designated by the lamp control data to the lamp control board 14 (step S727). ).

  When it is determined in step S726 that the data is not lamp control data (step S726; No), after executing the process of step S727, it is determined whether or not the specified effect control execution data is operation detection control data. Determination is made (step S728). At this time, when it is determined that it is not the operation detection control data (step S728; No), the effect control command process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation detection control data is determined (step S728; Yes), based on the operation detection control data, a predetermined instruction operation (for example, a pressing operation or the like) for the player's operation button or the like is performed. ) Is effectively detected, and it is determined whether or not it is an effective detection period in which the effect operation can be switched according to the detection result (step S729). For example, in each of the continuous notice effects of the notice effect YD1 to the notice effect YD3, the period from when the effect image prompting the instruction operation to the operation button is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until the predetermined time elapses is the effective detection period. As described above, the operation detection control data associated with a predetermined production control process timer determination value may be set in advance.

  If it is determined in step S729 that it is the valid detection period (step S729; Yes), after performing the effect control based on the detection result of the instruction operation on the operation button (step S730), the effect control command process is performed. finish. For example, in the process of step S730, based on an operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button to the effect control board 12, it is determined whether a predetermined instruction operation (for example, a pressing operation) for the operation button has been detected. And when instruction operation with respect to an operation button is detected, the setting for changing the production content etc. should just be performed according to the detection result.

  If it is determined in step S729 that it is not the valid detection period (step S729; No), other operation detection control based on the operation detection control data is performed (step S731), and the effect control command process is terminated. To do. For example, in the process of step S731, based on the operation detection control data, a setting may be made to limit the effective detection period so that an instruction operation or the like by the player is not detected thereafter.

  Hereinafter, a specific operation example in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B are executed, Corresponding to the variable display of special symbols in these special symbol games, the ornaments are displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R included in the display area of the image display device 5. Variable display of symbols is executed. And, for example, based on the variable display result in a special game such as a fixed special symbol or the variable display result of a decorative symbol such as a combination of fixed decorative symbols, a predetermined game value such as being controlled to a big hit gaming state is given. It becomes possible. The game value that can be imparted by the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advantageous for a player who is controlled to the big hit gaming state and the big winning opening 60 is changed from the closed state to the open state so that the game ball easily enters (wins). And the like, or a right to generate an advantageous state for the player may be generated. In addition, for example, the maximum number of rounds that can be executed in the big hit gaming state, the upper limit number of special figure games that can be executed in the short time state, the big hit probability in the probability variation state, and control to the big hit gaming state without being controlled in the normal state The number of consecutive times, which is the number of times played, reaches a predetermined number, and the “left” and “right” accessory entry 31L, 31R included in the variable winning device 40 controlled by the small hit gaming state is in the open state from the closed state The game value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined by the fact that the game ball enters a state where it can enter (winning) or any part of the game ball, such as a part or all of them, relating to the advantageous degree of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Can be.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, or the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is formed. Special game display result based on the numerical data read from the random number circuit 509 in step S506 of FIG. 52 when a game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening is detected by the second start opening switch 22B. Using the random number value MR1 for determination and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S508, the random number value determination for winning as shown in FIG. 53 is performed in step S205 and step S210 shown in FIG. Processing is executed.

  In the winning random number determination process, when it is determined in step S525 in FIG. 53 that the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the jackpot determination range (step S525; Yes), in step S526. Based on the transmission setting, a first start port winning designation command for notifying the winning jackpot determination is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. If it is determined in step S530 in FIG. 53 that the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the jackpot determination range (step S530; Yes), a winning is determined based on the transmission setting in step S531. A second start port winning designation command for notifying the time big hit determination is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  The effect control board 12 turns on the continuous notice flag when it is determined in step S551 in FIG. 63 that the first start port winning designation command has been received, and in step S554 that the winning jackpot determination is notified. The state is set (step S556), and the continuous notice fluctuation count value is set (step S557). In addition, when it is determined in step S558 that the second start opening winning designation command has been received and it is determined in step S561 that a winning jackpot determination is notified, the continuous notice flag is set to ON ( In step S563), a continuous notice fluctuation count value is set (step S564). By setting the continuous notice fluctuation count value in this way, it is possible to specify the variable display hold position (hold number) where the variable display result is “big hit” because the random value MR1 is within the big hit determination range. it can.

  Thereafter, in step S701 in FIG. 66, it is determined that the continuous notice flag is on (step S701; Yes), and when it is determined that the updated continuous notice fluctuation count value is not “0” (step S703; No). ), The continuous notice effect of the effect mode (effect contents) according to the continuous notice fluctuation count value is determined (steps S705 to S709).

  FIG. 69 shows a display operation example in the case where a continuous notice effect based on having been determined as the notice effect YD1 in step S706 of FIG. 66 is executed. In this display operation example, first, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), for example, in response to the start of variation of special symbols in a special symbol game, each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display units As shown in FIG. 69 (B), the decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed at 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed on all of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Start fluctuation. Thereafter, for example, according to the display control data read from the effect control pattern for the continuous notice effect determined in the process of step S610 shown in FIG. 65, the player performs the operation operation of the operation button as shown in FIG. 69 (C). Effect image YH11 is displayed. When the player performs an instruction operation on the operation button within the validity detection period and the operation detection signal transmitted to the effect control board 12 is turned on accordingly, for example, FIG. 69 (D) An effect image YH21 showing the lines of the character image as shown is displayed. This effect image YH21 shows a character string for notifying the occurrence of super reach such as “super reach may”. On the other hand, when the instruction operation for the operation button is not performed within the validity detection period, the effect image YH11 is erased as shown in FIG. 69 (E), for example, and the effect operation in the continuous notice effect is ended. . After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (F), the decorative symbol variable display proceeds, such as temporarily displaying the decorative symbol on the “left” decorative symbol display section 5L.

  FIG. 70 shows a display operation example in the case where a continuous notice effect based on having been determined as the notice effect YD2 in step S708 of FIG. 66 is executed. In this display operation example, as shown in FIGS. 70A to 70C, display operations similar to those in FIGS. 69A to 69C are performed. Thereafter, when the player performs an instruction operation on the operation button within the validity detection period, for example, as shown in FIG. 70D, an effect image YH22 different from the effect image YH21 shown in FIG. By displaying the information, notification is performed in an effect mode (effect content) different from the case of the notice effect YD1. This effect image YH22 shows a character string that suggests that the reach is close, such as “Is it soon reach?”. When the instruction operation for the operation button is not performed within the valid detection period, as shown in FIG. 70E, it is only necessary to perform the rendering operation control similar to that in FIG. Subsequent display operations may be controlled in the same manner as in FIG. 69F, as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 71 shows an example of a display operation when a continuous notice effect based on the fact that the notice effect YD3 is determined in step S709 in FIG. 66 is executed. In this display operation example, as shown in FIGS. 71A to 71C, display operations similar to those in FIGS. 69A to 69C are performed. Thereafter, when the player performs an instruction operation on the operation button within the validity detection period, for example, as shown in FIG. 71 (D), the effect image YH21 shown in FIG. 69 (D) or FIG. 70 (D). For example, by displaying an effect image YH23 different from the effect image YH22 shown, notification is made in an effect mode (effect content) different from the case of the notice effect YD1 and the notice effect YD2. The effect image YH23 shows a character string that suggests that the occurrence of super reach such as “Looking to become super reach next time” is even closer. When the instruction operation for the operation button is not performed within the valid detection period, as shown in FIG. 71E, it is only necessary to perform the same rendering operation control as in FIG. Subsequent display operations may be controlled in the same manner as in FIG. 69F, as shown in FIG.

  In the display operation examples shown in FIG. 69 to FIG. 71, as a continuous notice effect corresponding to the notice effect YD1 to the notice effect YD3, a notice effect that notifies a predetermined message when an instruction operation on the operation button is performed is executed. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, as long as a continuous notice effect that notifies the possibility that the special figure display result will be a “big hit” in any effect form (effect content) may be executed. As an example, a notice effect that notifies a predetermined message without requiring an instruction operation on the operation button may be executed as a continuous notice effect corresponding to the notice effect YD1 to the notice effect YD3. As another example, by changing the display mode (for example, display color, display shape, character, etc.) of the reserved storage in the start winning storage display area 5H, it may be executed as a continuous notice effect over a plurality of variable displays.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the range of “230” to “251”, it is determined that it is within the specific pattern common range, and steps S527 to S529 are performed. The first start opening winning designation command indicating whether or not it is within the specific pattern common range is transmitted by the process of step S532 and S534, and the first indicating whether or not it is within the specific pattern common range by the processes of steps S532 to S534. 2 Start opening winning designation command is transmitted. On the other hand, a plurality of threshold values for determining whether or not a specific variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern with super reach) is provided, and which threshold value is used to determine a specific variation pattern or not. Depending on whether or not is determined, a different first start opening prize designation command or second start opening prize designation command may be transmitted.

  As an example, when the random value MR1 is within the small hit determination range, a specific pattern common range different from when the random value MR1 is not within the big hit determination range or the small hit determination range may be determined in advance. In the setting example of the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133B shown in FIG. 36B, the variation pattern type CA2 regardless of whether the small hit type is “first small hit” or “second small hit”. Determining whether the random pattern MR3 matches the random determination value MR3 by determining whether or not the random determination value MR3 matches one of the determination values “170” to “251” corresponding to -4. Can do. Therefore, when the random value MR1 is within the small hit determination range, whether or not the random value MR3 matches any of the same determined values “170” to “251” different from the case where the variable display result is “lost”. To determine whether it is within the specific pattern common range. And when it determines with it being in the specific pattern common range, the 1st start opening from which the EXT data differs from the 1st start opening winning designation command and the 2nd starting opening winning designation command set in Step S528 or Step S533 The transmission setting of the winning designation command or the second start opening winning designation command may be performed.

  The random value MR1 is not limited to the case where the threshold value for defining the specific pattern common range is different depending on whether the random value MR1 is within the small hit determination range or outside the small hit determination range. Even in the case of “”, the threshold value for defining the specific pattern common range may be varied according to the special figure reserved memory number (total reserved memory number, etc.) and the gaming state. Even in such a case, the first start port winning designation command and the second starting port winning designation command are set to be transmitted depending on which threshold value is used to determine whether or not the specific variation pattern is used. do it.

  For example, by executing the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 53, the main board 11 includes the first starting opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command for notifying the winning jackpot determination, the specific pattern common range, and the like. To the effect control board 12. On the other hand, a range of values that can be taken by the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type (specifically, a range of “0” to “251”) is divided into a plurality of extraction value ranges in advance. Different first start opening prize designation commands and second start opening prize designation commands are transmitted according to which extracted value range the random value MR3 extracted in the process of step S508 shown in FIG. It may be. As an example, among the ranges “0” to “251”, the range “230” to “251” is the first extraction value range, the range “225” to “229” is the second extraction value range, The range of “220” to “224” is set as the third extraction value range. In this case, for example, in the processing of step S527 and step S532 shown in FIG. 53, it is determined in which extraction value range the random value for determining the variation pattern type is included. Then, the setting of the EXT data in the first start opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command may be made different according to the determination result of the extraction value range. On the side of the effect control board 12, determination as to whether or not a specific variation pattern is obtained according to the extraction value range specified from the EXT data of the first start opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command, etc. Can be done.

  In step S140 of FIG. 50, when the special symbol normal process as shown in FIG. 55 is executed and it is determined in step S221 that the second reserved memory count value is “0” (step S221; Yes), in step S223, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage count value is “0”. Accordingly, the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure. In addition, when the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the V winning is generated in the small hit gaming state or the special figure display result is “big hit”, the big hit end processing in step S147 shown in FIG. The setting for starting the control to change the gaming state to the time saving state is performed, and the time saving flag is set to the on state. When the time reduction flag is turned on in this way, when the high opening control is started together with the time reduction control in the time reduction state, for example, the normal figure change time in the normal game is set to a short time, or the normal map display result When the ratio of making a decision to make “per game” is high, and when the result of normal display is “per game”, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B (second start prize opening) is opened. By increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening, or by combining some or all of these, it becomes easier for the game ball to pass (enter) the normal variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port). If it is determined in step S523 in FIG. 53 that the time reduction control is being performed (step S523; Yes), in step S524, a first start opening winning designation command for notifying the big hit / short time winning is transmitted. For example, the execution of the determination based on the random value MR1 in step S525 is restricted.

  When the high opening control is performed in the short time state, it is easy for the game ball to pass (enter) through the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B (second starting winning hole), and the special game using the first special figure When the execution of the continuous notice effect is started based on the reserved storage information, the special game using the second special figure that is preferentially executed by passing (entering) the game ball to the second starting prize opening is executed. By continuing, the variable display can be continuously executed many times in a state in which the hold storage information whose variable display result is “big hit” is held. In this case, the continuous notice effect is an effect of notifying the state in which the hold storage information whose variable display result is “big hit” is held, and the variable display result is obtained by executing the special figure game using the second special figure. Becomes a “hit” and is repeatedly controlled to the big hit gaming state, there is a possibility that the gambling of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is remarkably enhanced. In addition, while recognizing that the variable display result is “big hit” in the special game using the first special figure, the player repeatedly passes (enters) the game ball to the second start winning opening to make the second special game. Depending on whether the special figure game using the figure is repeatedly executed or the special figure game using the first special figure is executed without passing (entering) the game ball to the second start winning opening, the variable display result is “ There is a possibility that the timing at which the game is set to “big hit” and controlled to the big hit gaming state may be greatly changed depending on the skill of the player. Therefore, during the time-shortening control, the special game using the first special figure is set so that the execution of the continuous notice effect based on the detection of the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening is not started. Thus, the player can not recognize that there is a possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit”, thereby ensuring a healthy game playability.

  In the process of step S228 shown in FIG. 55, when the special figure display result is determined to be “small hit” based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the variable symbol display result of the special symbol in the special figure game As the determined special symbol, the small hit symbol that is the result of the open display is derived and displayed. In addition, the decorative symbols constituting the small hit combination are derived and displayed as the confirmed decorative symbols that are the variable display results of the decorative symbols. In this way, when the variable display result that is the open display result is derived and displayed, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the small hit gaming state by the special figure process flag update setting in step S299 of FIG. At this time, for example, the variable winning device 40 is formed by the control of step S332 shown in FIG. 59 based on the accessory release control pattern CYA and the accessory release control pattern CYB set by the process of step S313 shown in FIG. An accessory opening / closing operation is performed in which the “left” and “right” accessory entrances 31L and 31R are changed from the closed state to the open state and then returned to the closed state.

  A game ball that has entered the variable prize-winning device 40 from one of the “left” and “right” bonuses 31L, 31R that has been released in the small hit game state passes through the specific area 49 (entrance) ) And the specific area switch 24 detects it (step S339 in FIG. 59; Yes), the V winning flag is set to the ON state in step S340. Thereafter, in response to the V winning flag being on when the small hit gaming state ends (step S368 in FIG. 60; Yes), the processing of steps S370 to S374 is executed, and so on. The gaming state in 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S228 shown in FIG. 55, when the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” based on the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the special symbol in the special figure game can be changed. The big hit symbol that is the specific display result is derived and displayed as the confirmed special symbol that is the display result. In addition, the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot combination are derived and displayed as finalized decorative symbols that result in variable display of decorative symbols. Thus, when the variable display result as the specific display result is derived and displayed, the processing of steps S289 to S295 shown in FIG. 57 is executed, and the game ball that has passed (entered) the specific area 49 without performing the accessory opening / closing operation. Even if the specific area switch 24 is not detected, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, for example, the CPU 505 shows the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result based on the numerical data read from the random value register R1D and the random value register R2D of the random number circuit 509 in step S506 of FIG. Using the numerical data, in step S228 of FIG. 55, the special figure display result is determined as “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lost”. In the random number circuit 509, for example, the random number sequence change circuit 555 changes the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553 based on a random number update rule set in advance by the setting of the random number sequence change setting circuit 556. A random number sequence RSN obtained by updating numerical data by a predetermined procedure is output. Based on the fact that the first start winning signal SS1 from the first start port switch 22A input to the input port P0 is turned on, the numerical data constituting the random number sequence RSN is stored in the random number value register R1D as a random value. Captured and stored. Further, based on the fact that the second start winning signal SS2 from the second start port switch 22B input to the input port P1 is turned on, the numerical data constituting the random number sequence RSN is stored in the random number value register R2D as a random value. Captured and stored.

  FIG. 72 is a timing chart for explaining the operation of the random number circuit 509. FIG. 72A shows a control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 111 mounted on the main board 11. FIG. 72B shows the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112. The various signals shown in FIG. 72 are assumed to be negative logic signals that are turned off at a high level and turned on at a low level. As shown in FIGS. 72A and 72B, the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK and the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK are different from each other. It does not become an integral multiple of the other oscillation frequency.

  As shown in FIG. 72B, the random number clock RCLK falls from the high level to the low level at timings T10, T11, T12,. The random number clock RCLK is supplied to the random number external clock terminal ERC of the game control microcomputer 100 and input to the clock terminal CK in the clock flip-flop 552 provided in the random number circuit 509 shown in FIG. The clock flip-flop 552 responds to the falling edge of the random number clock RCLK input to the clock terminal CK with the latch clock RC0 fed back from the negative phase output terminal (inverted output terminal) Q bar to the D input terminal. Then, it is taken in (latched) and outputted as a random number update clock RGK from the positive phase output terminal (non-inverted output terminal) Q. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 72C, the random number update clock RGK falls from the high level to the low level at the timings T10, T12, T14,..., And is ½ of the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK. The signal has an oscillation frequency of. For example, if the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK is 20 MHz, the oscillation frequency of the random number update clock RGK is 10 MHz. Since the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK is neither an integer multiple nor a fraction of the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK, the oscillation frequency of the random number update clock RGK is the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK. Different frequency. The random number generation circuit 553 updates the numerical data in the count value permutation RCN in response to, for example, the falling edge of the random number update clock RGK. The random number sequence change circuit 555 changes the numerical data update order in the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553 based on the setting of the random number update rule by the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 as a random number sequence RSN. Output. Thus, the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN is updated in response to the falling edge of the random number update clock RGK, for example, as shown in FIG.

  As described above, the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112 and the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 111 are different from each other. One oscillation frequency does not become an integral multiple of the other oscillation frequency. Therefore, the oscillation frequency of the random number update clock RGK and the latch clock RC0 generated by the clock flip-flop 552 of the random number circuit 509 is ½ of the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK, but the oscillation of the control clock CCLK. The frequency and the oscillation frequency of the internal system clock SCLK that is ½ of the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK are different. In this way, the control clock CCLK, the internal system clock SCLK, and the random number update clock RGK are prevented from being synchronized. From the operation timing of the CPU 505, the random number circuit 509 generates the random number generation circuit 553 and the random number sequence change circuit 555. It becomes difficult to specify the update timing of the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN to be performed. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent aiming and the like based on the result of analyzing the update operation of the numerical data serving as the random number value in the random number circuit 509 from the operation timing of the CPU 505.

  The latch clock RC0 output from the clock flip-flop 552 is an inverted signal of the random number update clock RGK, the oscillation frequency is the same as the oscillation frequency of the random number update clock RGK, and its phase is the same as the phase of the random number update clock RGK and π It differs by (= 180 °). The latch clock RC0 is branched into a latch clock RC1 and a latch clock RC2 at a branch point BR1. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 72E, each of the latch clocks RC0, RC1, and RC2 becomes an oscillation signal whose signal state changes in a common cycle. The latch clock RC1 is input to the clock terminal CK of the latch flip-flop 557A. The latch clock RC2 is input to the clock terminal CK of the latch flip-flop 557B.

  Thus, the oscillation frequencies of the latch clocks RC1 and RC2 generated by branching the latch clock RC0 are different from the oscillation frequencies of the control clock CCLK and the internal system clock SCLK. Therefore, the control clock CCLK, the internal system clock SCLK, and the latch clocks RC1 and RC2 are prevented from being synchronized, and the random number circuit 509 takes in numerical data as a random value from the operation timing of the CPU 505. It becomes difficult to specify the timing. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent aiming and the like based on the result of analyzing the operation of fetching numerical data as a random value in the random number circuit 509 from the operation timing of the CPU 505.

  In response to the falling edge of the latch clock RC1, the latch flip-flop 557A takes in (latches) the first start winning signal SS1 transmitted from the first start port switch 22A and supplied to the input port P0. Then, it is output from the output terminal Q as a start winning latch signal SL1. Then, if the capturing method in the random number latch selector 558A is designated as signal input to the input port P0, the start winning latch signal SL1 is output as the random number latch signal LL1. Thereby, for example, the latch clock RC1 falls in the first start winning signal SS1 whose signal state changes between the off state (high level) and the on state (low level) at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (F). After being taken into the latching flip-flop 557A at timings T11, T13, T15,. LL1 is output from the random number latch selector 558A. Here, the first start winning signal SS1 transmitted from the first start opening switch 22A is turned off when the start winning of the game ball at the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected. Change to ON state. The random number latch signal LL1 output from the latch flip-flop 557A via the random number latch selector 558A is supplied to the random number value register 559A serving as the random number value register R1D, and in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555. Used to obtain numerical data. Thus, the latch flip-flop 557A and the random number latch selector 558A acquire numerical data as a random number value using the latch clock RC1 based on the detection of the start winning of the game ball at the first start winning opening. The random number latch signal LL1 is generated separately from the case where the start winning of the game ball at the second start winning opening is detected.

  The latch flip-flop 557B captures (latches) the second start winning signal SS2 transmitted from the second start port switch 22B and supplied to the input port P1 in response to the falling edge of the latch clock RC2. Then, it is output from the output terminal Q as a start winning latch signal SL2. Then, if the capturing method in the random number latch selector 558B is designated as signal input to the input port P1, the start winning latch signal SL2 is output as the random number latch signal LL2. Thereby, for example, the latch clock RC2 falls in the second start winning signal SS2 whose signal state changes between the off state (high level) and the on state (low level) at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (I). After being taken into the latch flip-flop 557B at timings T11, T13, T15,..., A random number latch signal whose signal state changes between an off state and an on state at timings T13 and T15 as shown in FIG. LL2 is output from the random number latch selector 558B. Here, the second start winning signal SS2 transmitted from the second start opening switch 22B is turned off when the start winning of the game ball at the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected. Changes from ON to ON. The random number latch signal LL2 output from the latch flip-flop 557B via the random number latch selector 558B is supplied to the random number value register 559B serving as the random number value register R2D, and the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 Used to obtain numerical data. In this way, the latch flip-flop 557B and the random number latch selector 558B acquire numerical data as a random number value using the latch clock RC2 based on the detection of the start winning of the game ball at the second start winning opening. The random number latch signal LL2 is generated separately from the case where the start winning of the game ball at the first start winning opening is detected.

  In this way, the latch flip-flop 557A and the latch flip-flop 557B each have a common cycle by branching the latch clock RC0 generated by the common clock flip-flop 552 at the branch point BR1. Using the latch clocks RC1 and RC2 whose signal states change, a start winning latch signal SL1 and a start winning latch signal SL2 for obtaining numerical data as a random value are generated. Thereby, the circuit configuration in the random number circuit 509 can be simplified, and the manufacturing cost in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be reduced.

  The random value register 559A serving as the random value register R1D receives the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 at the falling edge of the random number latch signal LL1 input from the random number latch selector 558A to the clock terminal. In response, the data is fetched (latched), and the numerical data serving as stored data is updated. The random value register 559B serving as the random value register R2D receives the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 at the falling edge of the random number latch signal LL2 input from the random number latch selector 558B to the clock terminal. In response, the data is fetched (latched), and the numerical data serving as stored data is updated.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 72 (G), when a falling edge occurs in which the random number latch signal LL1 changes from the OFF state to the ON state at timing T11, the random number sequence change circuit 555 outputs it at timing T11. As shown in FIG. 72H, the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN is fetched into the random value register R1D and acquired as numerical data that becomes a random value. As a result, in the random value register 559A serving as the random value register R1D, the numerical data used as the random number value based on the detection of the start winning of the game ball at the first starting winning opening is used as the game at the second starting winning opening. It can be acquired and stored separately from the case where the start winning of the ball is detected.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 72 (J), when a falling edge that changes the random number latch signal LL2 from the OFF state to the ON state occurs at timing T13, the random number sequence change circuit 555 at timing T13. As shown in FIG. 72 (K), the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from is taken into the random value register R2D and acquired as numerical data that becomes a random value. As a result, the random value register 559B serving as the random value register R2D, based on the detection of the start winning of the game ball at the second start winning opening, converts the numerical data used as the random number value into the game at the first starting winning opening. It can be acquired and stored separately from the case where the start winning of the ball is detected.

  Thus, the random value register 559A responds to the falling edge of the start winning latch signal SL1 generated by the latch flip-flop 557A using the latch clock RC1 and the random number latch signal LL1 output from the random number latch selector 558A. The numerical data in the random value RSN is stored. The random value register 559B is responsive to the falling edge of the start winning latch signal SL2 generated by the latch flip-flop 557B using the latch clock RC2 and the random number latch signal LL2 output from the random number latch selector 558B. The numerical data in the random number sequence RSN is stored.

  As described above, in the random number circuit 509, the clock flip-flop 552, the random number generation circuit 553, the random number sequence change circuit 555, and the like acquire numerical data that becomes a random number value based on the start winning of the game ball at the first start winning opening. Based on the combination of the latch flip-flop 557A, the random number latch selector 558A, and the random value register 559A configured as described above, and numerical data that becomes a random value based on the starting winning of the game ball at the second starting winning opening is obtained. The latch flip-flop 557B, the random number latch selector 558B, and the combination of the random number value register 559B are shared. Therefore, the random number update clock RGK output from the clock flip-flop 552 and supplied to the random number generation circuit 553 and used for updating the numerical data in the count value permutation RCN and the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN is the first starting prize opening. A common random number update configuration for acquiring numerical data that is a random value based on a starting winning of a game ball and a configuration that acquires numerical data that is a random value based on a starting winning of a gaming ball at the second starting winning opening This is a clock signal. Thereby, the circuit configuration in the random number circuit 509 can be simplified, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be reduced.

  In the random number latch flag register RDFM shown in FIG. 28 (A), the operation for reading and reading numerical data in the random value register 559A serving as the random value register R1D, and the numerical data in the random value register 559B serving as the random value register R2D. The corresponding bit value changes to “0” and “1” in response to the fetch operation and read operation. FIG. 73 is a timing chart for explaining changes in the random number latch flag data RDFM0 and the random number latch flag data RDFM1 stored in the bit numbers [0] and [1] of the random number latch flag register RDFM.

  As shown in FIG. 73A, at the timing T20 when the random number latch signal LL1 and the random number latch signal LL2 fall, numerical data is taken into the random value register R1D and the random value register R2D as shown in FIG. In response to this, the bit values of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 and the random number latch flag data RDFM1 change from “0” to “1” as shown in FIG. 73 (C). For example, when numerical data is stored in the random value register R1D in response to the random number latch signal LL1 being turned on (low level) at the timing T20, the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is “0”. By changing from “1” to “1”, the random number latch flag corresponding to the random number value register R1D is turned on. Further, when numerical data is stored in the random value register R2D in response to the random number latch signal LL2 being turned on (low level) at the timing T20, the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 is “0”. By changing from “1” to “1”, the random number latch flag corresponding to the random number value register R2D is turned on.

  Thus, when the random number latch flag is turned on, storage of new numerical data in the corresponding random number value register R1D or random number value register R2D is restricted. For example, when the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 changes from “0” to “1”, the random number latch flag corresponding to the random number value register R1D is turned on, and new numerical data is stored in the random number value register R1D. Is limited. When the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 changes from “0” to “1”, the random number latch flag corresponding to the random number value register R2D is turned on, and new numerical data is stored in the random number value register R2D. Is limited. Therefore, the random number value register R1D and / or the random number value register R2D in which the corresponding random number latch flag is in the ON state captures numerical data corresponding to the input of the first start winning signal SS1 and / or the second starting winning signal SS2. Even when the random number latch signal LL1 and / or the random number latch signal LL2 is input, new numerical data included in the random number sequence RSN cannot be stored.

  Thus, after numerical data is temporarily stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D, before the numerical data is read from the CPU 505 or the like, for example, the first start winning signal SS1 or the second start winning signal SS2 Even when the signal is erroneously turned on due to noise or the like, the numerical data already stored is updated, and it is possible to prevent inaccurate random number reading. Further, the bit values of the random value acquisition specification data RDLT0 and the random value acquisition specification data RDLT1 are intentionally set to “1” from the outside, or the first start winning signal SS1 and the second starting winning signal SS2 are set. It is also possible to prevent an illegal act such as modifying already stored numerical data by intentionally turning it on from the outside. On the other hand, when the numerical data once stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D is not read from the CPU 505 or the like for a long time, the first start prize signal SS1 and the second start prize signal SS2 are thereafter normal. When the ON state is turned on, accurate numerical data corresponding to the passage (entrance) of the game ball at the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening can be stored in the random value register R1D and the random value register R2D. become unable.

  Therefore, for example, the CPU 505 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined random value register reading process as shown in FIG. 73D when a predetermined random value reading condition is satisfied. Then, the random number value register R1D and the random number value register R2D are read to turn off the random number latch flag, thereby setting a state in which storage of new numerical data is permitted. The random number read condition is that the CPU 505 starts executing the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the special game when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. When the number of reserved memories has reached a predetermined upper limit and invalidating the establishment of the second start condition based on the detection of a game ball that has passed (entered) the normal variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) The bit number [1] of the switch-on buffer is cleared to “0”, or a part or all of them may be included. In the operation example shown in FIG. 70, in response to the completion of the random value register reading process shown in FIG. 73B at timing T25, as shown in FIG. 73C, the random number latch flag data RDFM0 and the random number latch are shown. The bit value of the flag data RDFM1 is updated from “1” to “0”, and the corresponding random number latch flag is set to the off state.

  As an example, the CPU 505 executes a predetermined security check process or the like when the system reset of the gaming control microcomputer 100 is canceled based on the start of power supply in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and then executes a user program from the ROM 506. The control code indicating (game control game control program for game control) is read and the execution of the game control is started. At this time, the CPU 505 reads the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D by executing the process of step S56 shown in FIG. 46 as the random value register read process, and sets the corresponding random number latch flag. Turn off. In the process of step S56 shown in FIG. 46, the CPU 505 determines whether or not the random number latch flag is on based on the result of checking the bit values of the random number latch flag data RDFM1 and the random number latch flag data RDFM0. May be read out only. Alternatively, each random number latch flag may be turned off by reading numerical data from both the random value register R1D and the random value register R2D regardless of whether the random number latch flag is on.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, various power supply voltages gradually rise to specified values, for example, as shown in FIGS. 11B and 11C, such as the power supply voltage VSL and the power supply voltage VCC. During such an increase in the power supply voltage, some of the various circuits such as the built-in circuit of the game control microcomputer 100 may operate normally, while the other components may not operate normally. As an example, when the power supply voltage is unstable, the first start prize signal SS1 or the second start prize signal SS2 is erroneously turned on. There is a possibility that numerical data is captured and stored, and the corresponding random number latch flag is turned on, which limits the storage of new numerical data. In addition, after the execution of game control by the CPU 505 or the like is started and before the switch processing of step S92 shown in FIG. By inputting to the random value register R2D, it is possible to perform an illegal act of obtaining numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result with the special figure display result being “big hit” and controlling it to the big hit gaming state. There is sex. As described above, when the storage of new numerical data is restricted when the random number latch flag is turned on, the game ball passes (enters) the start winning opening such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. It is possible to prevent erroneous numerical data due to noise or the like from being taken in and stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D after the start prize is generated, while the power supply voltage is unstable before the start prize is generated. When numerical data is fetched and stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D due to malfunction or fraud, even if a start prize is subsequently generated, it is already stored before the start prize generation timing. There is a possibility that the numerical data is acquired as a random number value and used for determining the special figure display result.

  Therefore, when the system reset in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is released and the gaming control is started, the random number latch flag is set to the off state to allow the storage of new numerical data. As a result, for example, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D in error when the power supply voltage is unstable, such as when the power is turned on in the pachinko gaming machine 1, is acquired as a random value, and the game control It can be prevented from being used for various decisions. In addition, after the execution of the game control is started, an illegal act of inputting a random number latch signal and controlling it to the big hit game state before the state of the first start port switch 22A or the second start port switch 22B is checked. Can be prevented.

  As another example, an on-state power-off signal is output from the power supply monitoring circuit 303 mounted on the power supply board 10 based on a decrease in the predetermined power supply voltage in the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the power supply voltage VSL. The CPU 505 outputs an on-state power-off signal in step S111 in FIG. 49 (step S111; Yes), and further, after the backup monitoring timer value reaches the backup determination value in step S114, the steps S115 to S118 are performed. By executing the above process to prepare for an unstable operation or stoppage of the pachinko gaming machine 1 due to a decrease in power supply voltage, the process of step S119 is repeatedly executed until the game control microcomputer 100 enters an operation stop state. The input state of the power-off signal is repeatedly determined. Thereafter, when it is determined during the process of step S119 that the power-off signal is in an off state and is not input, the CPU 505 completes the power-off process after executing the process of step S124 and the game. By returning (returning) from the control timer interrupt process, the execution of the game control is started from the head of the control code indicating the user program (game control process program for game control) stored in the ROM 506. Here, after it is determined in step S119 that the power-off signal has been turned off and is not input, before the power-off processing is terminated and the execution of the game control is started from the beginning of the control code, By executing the processing from step S120 to step S123 as the random value register reading processing, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D is read, and the corresponding random number latch flag is set to the OFF state.

  FIG. 74 is a timing chart showing an operation example when the power supply voltage VSL decreases during execution of game control. First, based on the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, at a timing T30 before the timing T31 when the power supply voltage VSL shown in FIG. The power supply voltage VCC shown in (B) reaches a predetermined value VCC1. At this timing T30, the reset signal shown in FIG. 74C changes from the on state to the off state. Subsequently, when the power supply voltage VSL reaches the predetermined value VSL1 at timing T31, the power-off signal shown in FIG. 74D is changed from the on state to the off state. After that, for example, at timing T32, the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 shown in FIG. By changing from “1” to “1”, the random number latch flag corresponding to the random number register R1D is turned on.

  After the numerical data is stored in the random value register R1D at the timing T32 in this way, the power supply voltage VSL shown in FIG. 74A becomes the predetermined value VSL1 at the timing T33 before the numerical data is read by the CPU 505 or the like. Suppose that it is lower. At this time, based on the determination that the power-off signal shown in FIG. 74D is on (step S111 in FIG. 49; Yes), is the power-off signal on in step S119? It is repeatedly determined whether or not. Thereafter, for example, at timing T34, when the power supply voltage VSL shown in FIG. 74A returns to the predetermined value VSL1, it is determined in step S119 shown in FIG. 49 that the power-off signal is off and is not input. (Step S119; No). Further, based on the determination that the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is “1” and the random number latch flag is in the on state in step S120 shown in FIG. 49, the process of step S121 is executed. Then, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D is read, the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is updated from “1” to “0”, and the random number latch flag corresponding to the random number register R1D is turned off. Set to state. Thereafter, when the power-off process ends, for example, based on the contents specified in the power-off recovery vector table set in step S124 shown in FIG. 49, the user program (game control game) stored in the ROM 506 is used. The game control main process as shown in FIG. 45 is executed from the beginning by starting the execution of the game control from the head of the control code indicating the (game control process program).

  In the random number circuit 509, numerical data that becomes a random number value is captured and stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D in response to the rising edge of the first start winning signal SS1 or the second start winning signal SS2. In this case, for example, when the power supply voltage VDD for switch operation is reduced to a predetermined switch voltage or lower after the process of step S119 shown in FIG. 49 is repeatedly executed, the normal voltage value is restored. During the restoration to the value, rising edges of the first start winning signal SS1 and the second starting winning signal SS2 occur, and numerical data is captured and stored in all of the random value register R1D and the random value register R2D. May turn on. If such an ON state of the random number latch flag is left unattended, the random number latch flag is in the ON state when the game ball passes (enters) through the first starting winning port and the second starting winning port after the power supply voltage is restored. Therefore, the storage of new numerical data is limited, and the special figure display result is determined based on the numerical data captured during the restoration of the power supply voltage, etc. There arises a problem that determination using numerical data fetched at different timings is performed. Therefore, the CPU 505 of the game control microcomputer 100 reads the random value register R1D and the random value register R2D in step S56 shown in FIG. 46 and step S121 and / or step S123 shown in FIG. The above-described problem can be solved by starting (resuming) the execution of the game control after turning off.

  As another example of the random number value reading condition, there is a case where the reserved memory number of the special figure game has reached a predetermined upper limit value when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. is there. Here, for example, after it is determined in step S203 shown in FIG. 51 that the first start port switch 22A is on, the read value of the first hold storage counter is set to a predetermined upper limit value in step S502 shown in FIG. (For example, “4”) or more, if it is determined to be greater than or equal to (eg, “4”), all entries (for example, entries corresponding to the holding numbers “1” to “4”) are stored in the first special figure storage unit 591A. Is stored, and the number of reserved data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 591A has reached the upper limit storage number, so new reserved data cannot be stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 591A. . Further, for example, after it is determined in step S208 shown in FIG. 51 that the second start-up switch 22B is in the ON state, the read value of the second reserved storage counter is greater than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value in step S502 shown in FIG. Is determined, the reserved data is stored in all entries in the second special figure storage unit 591B, and the number of stored data in the second special figure storage unit 591B is the upper limit storage number. Therefore, new hold data cannot be stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 591B. In such a case, in general, the starting condition of the special game based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening or the second starting prize opening is not established, and the prize ball is paid out. Only done.

  For this reason, it may be considered not to read out numerical data that is a random value generated by the random number circuit 509. However, in the random number circuit 509, in response to the first start winning signal SS1 and the second starting winning signal SS2 being turned on and being input regardless of the number of stored data, the random number value register R1D and the random number circuit 509 Numeric data that is a random number value is fetched and stored in the numeric register R2D, and the corresponding random number latch flag is turned on. Then, when the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening next time, even if the first start winning signal SS1 and the second start winning signal SS2 are turned on and input, Since the storage of new numerical data in the random value register R1D and the random value register R2D is restricted, it is impossible to acquire an accurate random value corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 505 of the game control microcomputer 100 determines in step S502 shown in FIG. 52 that the read value of the hold storage counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined upper limit value (step S502; Yes), the step By executing the processing of S510 and reading the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D or the random value register R2D, the corresponding random number latch flag is turned off, and the random value acquisition process is terminated. In the process of step S510, the random number value register R1D is read when the first start opening prize table 136A is set in step S202 of FIG. 51, while the second start opening prize is obtained in step S207 of FIG. When the table 136B is set, the random number value register R2D is read. Thus, for example, when a plurality of display devices that variably display special symbols, such as the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, are provided, the reserved memory number of the special symbol game reaches the upper limit value. When a game ball that passes (enters) a start winning opening associated with a special symbol is detected, numerical data is read from the random value register associated with the starting winning opening and new numerical data is stored. On the other hand, the numerical data is not read from the random value register not associated with the start winning opening. As a result, when a game ball passes (enters) one of a plurality of start winning openings, the operation of updating or obtaining numerical data that becomes a random value corresponding to another starting winning opening is affected. Can not be.

  When the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning port or the second start winning port, the CPU 505 determines whether or not the game ball has passed (entered) in step S204 or step S209 shown in FIG. Execute common random value acquisition process. And in a common processing routine, such as the processing of step S501 to step S510 shown in FIG. 52, regardless of the start winning opening through which the game ball has passed, especially by executing the processing of step S505 and step S506, etc. Among the random value register R1D and the random value register R2D included in the 509, numeric data serving as a random value is read out from the random value register corresponding to the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening through which the game ball has passed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with a plurality of start winning ports such as the first starting winning port and the second starting winning port, the random number value can be read out by making it possible to read the numerical data as a random value by such a common processing routine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessive increase in the amount of programs for acquiring numerical data.

  In the main board 11, the security check program 506A stored in the ROM 506 or the like is stored in the ROM 506 or the like when the initial power is supplied from the power board 10 (when power is turned on without a backup power source) or when the CPU 505 is restarted after a system reset occurs. Is read out and executed, the gaming control microcomputer 100 enters the security mode. At this time, as a process corresponding to the security check program 506A, for example, a security check process as shown in FIG. 44 is executed. Here, the security time when the game control microcomputer 100 is in the security mode is set in advance in the bit number [2-0] or the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES stored in the program management area of the ROM 506. Depending on the stored bit value, a time component different from the fixed time can be included.

  For example, if the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is a value other than “000” (step S2 shown in FIG. 44; No), the setting contents as shown in FIG. Correspondingly, in addition to the fixed time, any one of a plurality of extension times that can be selected in advance can be set as a time component included in the security time (step S4). If the bit value [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is a value other than “00” (step S6; No), the short mode or the long mode as shown in FIG. 18C is supported. Then, a variable setting time that changes in a predetermined time range each time the initial setting process is executed based on system reset or power-on can be set as a time component included in the security time (step S8).

  Until the security time set in this way has elapsed (step S14; No), the execution of the game control main process by the user program stored in the ROM 506 is not started. Then, the operation of generating numerical data to be a random number value by the random number circuit 509 may not be started during the period in which the game control microcomputer 100 is in the security mode. As a result, it becomes difficult to specify the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 or the numerical data to be updated from the operation start timing due to power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or system reset, and the analysis result of the game control processing program By connecting a so-called “hanging board” and inputting a fraud signal at a predetermined timing, it is possible to reliably prevent actions such as illegally generating a big hit gaming state.

  As an example, the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is set to a different value for each model of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this case, the extension time set in step S4 shown in FIG. 44 can be made different for each model of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 is determined from the operation start timing of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It becomes difficult to specify. Further, by setting the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES to “01” or “10”, the variable setting time set in step S8 is varied for each system reset. This makes it extremely difficult to specify the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 from the operation start timing of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  When it is determined in step S14 shown in FIG. 44 that the security time has elapsed (step S14; Yes), the CPU 505 reads the user program stored in the ROM 506, and the game control main process as shown in FIG. Executed. For example, the setting process in step S33 includes a random number circuit setting process as shown in FIG. Here, if the bit value at the bit number [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 as shown in FIG. 17B is set to “1”, the random number circuit 509 is instructed by the processing in step S55 shown in FIG. The start value of the numerical data, which is a random value generated in this way, can be changed every time the system is reset. Thereby, even if the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 can be specified, it becomes difficult to specify numerical data read from the random value register 559A and the random value register 559B included in the random number circuit 509. It is possible to reliably prevent actions such as illegally generating a big hit gaming state by aiming based on the analysis result of the control processing program or inputting a fraud signal at a predetermined timing by connecting a so-called `` hanging board '' it can.

  The random number circuit 509 and the like are provided with a free-run counter 554A that updates a count value serving as initial value determination data separately from the operation of the CPU 505. When the bit value [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is “1”, the free run counter 554A is set at the initial setting based on the setting by the start value initial setting circuit 554 of the random number circuit 509. The start value is randomly determined by using the count value as it is, or by using a value obtained by substituting the count value into a predetermined arithmetic function (for example, a hash function). As a result, it becomes difficult to specify the numerical data as the start value in the random number circuit 509 from the operation mode of the CPU 505, and aiming based on the analysis result of the game control processing program or connecting a so-called “hanging board” to a predetermined timing By inputting the fraud signal at, actions such as illegally generating a big hit gaming state can be reliably prevented.

  The CPU 505 of the game control microcomputer 100 sets the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 133A shown in FIG. 36A in the use table in step S252 shown in FIG. 56, or in step S255, FIG. 36B. After setting the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133B shown in FIG. 37 to the usage table, after setting the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C shown in FIG. 37A in the usage table in step S259, or In step S260, the loss variation pattern type determination table (mid-time) 133D shown in FIG. 37B is set in the usage table, and then the process of step S261 is executed to obtain a plurality of types of variation pattern types prepared in advance. Decide on one. Then, based on the variation pattern type determined at this time, the variation pattern determination table 134 shown in FIG. 38 is set in the use table in step S262, and then the process of step S263 is executed to prepare the variation pattern in advance. Decide on one of multiple types. Thereby, when adding the variation pattern type or changing the occurrence rate, it is only necessary to change the setting of the determined value in the variation pattern type determination table, so that the setting time can be shortened. In addition, when adding a detailed variation pattern or changing the occurrence rate, it is only necessary to change the setting of the determination value in the variation pattern determination table, so that the setting time can be shortened. That is, since the determination ratio of the variation pattern type and the determination ratio of the variation pattern can be set separately, the design change related to the variation pattern type and the distribution of the variation pattern can be easily performed.

  In the setting example of the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C shown in FIG. 37A or the loss variation pattern type determination table (short time) 133D shown in FIG. In this case, more decision values are assigned to the variation pattern types CA1-2 than in the case where the total number of reserved memories is less than the predetermined number. The variation pattern type CA1-2 includes only a variation pattern PA1-2 that is a non-reach variation pattern for shortening. Therefore, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the average variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. Thereby, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the situation where the variable display operating rate (operating rate) decreases.

  When determining the universal symbol display result that becomes the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in the normal symbol normal process of step S170 shown in FIG. 61, by referring to the universal symbol display result determination table 135, when the time reduction flag is on. The map display result is determined as “per map” at a higher rate than when the time flag is off. In addition, when the time reduction flag is on, the normal symbol variation time, which is a variable symbol display time, is set shorter than when the time reduction flag is off. In addition, when the hourly flag is on, the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B (second start prize opening is based on the fact that the usual figure display result is “per figure” compared to when the hourly flag is off. ) Is set to increase the number of times and the opening time. Thus, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the short time state and the time shortening control or the high opening control is performed, the normally variable winning ball is compared to the case where the time shortening control or the high opening control is not performed in the normal state or the like. By increasing the frequency with which the device 6B (second start winning opening) is opened, it is possible to increase the possibility that a lot of prize balls will be paid out, and to improve the game entertainment.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment, the random number circuit 509 is based on the input of a predetermined signal such as the first start winning signal SS1 or the second starting winning signal SS2 being turned on, for example. When numerical data included in the random number sequence RSN updated by a predetermined procedure by the random number generation circuit 553, the random number sequence change circuit 555, or the like is stored in the random value register R1D (559A) or the random number value register R2D (559B). In addition, by changing the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 and the random number latch flag data RDFM1 stored in the random number latch flag register RDFM from “0” to “1”, the random number value register R1D storing numerical data (559A) or a random number latch corresponding to the random value register R2D (559B) Lag storage of new numerical data turned on is limited. On the other hand, for example, when the CPU 505 executes the processing of step S506 shown in FIG. Is read, the random number latch flag corresponding to the random value register R1D (559A) or the random value register R2D (559B) from which the numerical data is read is turned off, and storage of new numerical data is permitted. The Thus, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D (559A) or the random value register R2D (559B) based on the input of the predetermined signal is not altered by noise or the like before being read by the CPU 505 or the like. Numerical data that is an accurate random value can be acquired.

  By using the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in step S507 in FIG. 52 based on the numerical data thus obtained, the special figure display result is obtained by the process in step S228 shown in FIG. It is determined as one of “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing”. Thereby, display results, such as a special figure display result, can be determined using an exact random number value.

  When the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES shown in FIGS. 15A, 18A and 18C is set to a value other than “00”, it is based on system reset or power-on. A variable setting time that changes in a predetermined time range each time the initial setting process is executed is set as a time component included in the security time. Further, when the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES shown in FIGS. 15A and 18A and 18D is a value other than “000”, in addition to the fixed time, One of a plurality of extension times that can be selected in advance is set as a time component included in the security time. As a result, it becomes difficult to specify the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 or the numerical data to be updated from the operation start timing due to power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or system reset, and the analysis result of the game control processing program By connecting a so-called “hanging board” and inputting a fraud signal at a predetermined timing, it is possible to reliably prevent actions such as illegally generating a big hit gaming state.

  In the random number circuit 509, the random number sequence changing circuit 555 changes the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generating circuit 553 based on a predetermined random number changing rule, whereby the numerical data is changed to a predetermined update initial value by a predetermined procedure. To a predetermined update final value cyclically. Then, when the bit value at the bit number [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 shown in FIG. 15A or FIG. 17B is “1”, the CPU 505 executes the process of step S55 shown in FIG. As a result, the start value of the numerical data to be a random number generated by the random number circuit 509 is changed every time the system is reset. Thereby, even if the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 can be specified, the numerical data read from the random value register R1D (559A) and the random value register R2D (559B) included in the random number circuit 509 is specified. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent aiming based on the analysis result of the game control processing program and input of an illegal signal due to connection of a so-called “hanging board”.

  More specifically, a free run counter 554 provided in the random number circuit 509 or the like updates a count value serving as initial value determination data separately from the operation of the CPU 505 of the game control microcomputer 100. Then, based on the setting by the start value initial setting circuit 554 of the random number circuit 509 and the like, the start value of the numerical data that becomes the random number value is determined using the count value of the free run counter 554. This makes it difficult to specify numerical data that is a random value from the operation mode of the CPU 505 of the game control microcomputer 100, and is based on aiming based on the analysis result of the game control processing program or connection of a so-called “hanging board”. It is possible to reliably prevent an illegal signal from being input.

  In the external bus interface 501 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, the internal resource access control circuit 501A allows external data other than the internal circuit such as the CPU 505 to externally read the internal data of the game control microcomputer 100 such as data stored in the ROM 506. Limited. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a game control processing program such as a game control user program stored in the ROM 506 from being read from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 and provided for analysis or the like. Further, it is possible to reliably prevent aiming based on the analysis result of the game control processing program and input of an illegal signal due to connection of a so-called “hanging board”.

  In the frequency monitoring circuit 551 of the random number circuit 509 built in or externally attached to the game control microcomputer 100, the input state of the random number clock RCLK from the random number clock generation circuit 112 to the random number external clock terminal ERC is set as the internal system clock SCLK. In comparison, when a frequency abnormality is detected in the random number clock RCLK, the bit value of the internal information data CIF4 stored in the bit number [4] of the internal information register CIF is set to “1”. Then, the CPU 505 determines that the number of times that the read value of the internal information data CIF4 is continuously determined to be “1” in step S63 shown in FIG. 47, for example, has reached the clock abnormality determination value in step S65. When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation state of the random number circuit 509. Thereby, it is possible to reliably prevent an illegal act by inputting an illegal signal as the random number clock RCLK.

  The CPU 505 of the game control microcomputer 100 performs the steps shown in FIG. 46 as random number value register read processing when the system reset of the game control microcomputer 100 is released based on the start of power supply in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. By executing the processing of S56, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D (559A) or the random value register R2D (559B) is read, and the corresponding random number latch flag is turned off. As a result, for example, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D (559A) or the random value register R2D (559B) is erroneously acquired as a random value when the power supply voltage is unstable, such as when the power is turned on. Can be prevented.

  Further, in response to the determination that the power-off signal is in the ON state in step S111 shown in FIG. 49, for example, after a decrease in a predetermined power supply voltage such as the power supply voltage VSL is detected, the game control microcomputer Until 100 is in the operation stop state, the process of step S119 is executed to repeatedly determine the input state of the power-off signal. Then, when it is determined in step S119 that the power-off signal has been turned off and is not input, before game control is started from the beginning of the control code stored in the ROM 506 based on the setting in step S124. In addition, the processing of step S120 to step S123 is executed to turn off the random number latch flag that is in the on state. As a result, for example, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D (559A) or the random value register R2D (559B) erroneously in a state where the power supply voltage is unstable such as when the predetermined power supply voltage such as the power supply voltage VSL is lowered is changed to the random value. Can be prevented from being acquired.

  52. A random number value for determining a special figure display result based on the numerical data read in step S506 of FIG. 52 when a start winning occurs when a game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Using MR1, a winning random number determination process as shown in FIG. 53 is executed in step S205 or step S210 shown in FIG. 51, and whether the random value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range in step S525 or step S530. It is determined whether or not the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit”. Then, in response to the notification of the winning jackpot determination in step S554 or step S561 in FIG. 63, the winning flag jackpot is set by setting the continuous notice flag in the on state in step S556 or step S563. Prior to the start of the variable display to be determined, a specific effect operation such as, for example, a continuous notice effect over a plurality of variable displays is executed. As a result, before the variable display targeted for the big hit determination at the time of winning is started, the possibility of the display result being a “big hit” is notified, and the variable display result is “big hit” over a long period of time. Can maintain a sense of expectation and improve game entertainment.

  The numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S508 of FIG. 52 when the start winning occurs when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. Based on this, it is determined in step S527 or step S532 in FIG. 53 whether or not it is within the specific pattern common range, and whether or not a specific variation pattern such as a variation pattern with super reach is determined. judge. Then, in response to the notification of the specific pattern common range in step S555 or step S562 in FIG. 63, the specific notice pattern is set by setting the continuous notice flag to the on state in step S556 or step S563. Prior to the start of variable display, which is a determination target within the common range, for example, a specific effect operation such as continuous notice effect over a plurality of variable displays is executed. Thus, before the variable display that is a determination target such as within the specific pattern common range is started, the possibility that the variable display becomes a specific variation pattern is notified, and the variable display result is obtained over a long period of time. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation to be a “hit” and to improve the gaming fun.

  Further, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (during short time) 133D, the variation pattern type CA1-1 is determined depending on whether or not the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. The assignment of determination values to the variation pattern types CA1-3 and the variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-3 is different. This makes it possible to adjust the variable display time of the special pattern and decoration pattern by varying the rate of determination of the variation pattern according to the number of reserved memory of the special figure game, so that the variable display is possible when the number of reserved memory is large. While increasing the efficiency, it is possible to prevent the variable display from being interrupted when the number of reserved memories is small, thereby reducing the game interest.

  On the other hand, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (during short time) 133D, at least a part of the determination values corresponding to the variation pattern type CA2-4 is the gaming state and the total. The same decision values “230” to “251” are set regardless of the number of reserved memories. This makes it possible to reliably determine that a specific variation pattern is determined regardless of the gaming state and the total number of reserved memories.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B has been described, but only one special symbol display device is provided. Also good. In this case, for example, the combination of the latch flip-flop 557B, the random number latch selector 558B, and the random value register R2D (559B) included in the random number circuit 509 shown in FIG.

  As an example, in the game area, a game ball cannot pass (enter) through the start prize opening (or difficult to enter), and a game ball can pass (enter) through the start prize opening (or easy to enter). ) A start winning ball device that changes to the start open state is provided. Then, when a game ball that has passed (entered) through the start winning opening is detected, a special symbol game using the special symbol by the special symbol display device is started, and the special symbol game is not stored on hold. . In this case, the variation pattern corresponding to the special diagram variation time from when the special symbol variable display is started until the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed is determined based on the numerical data read from the random number circuit 509. It may be determined using numerical data indicating the random number value. As a result, after the game ball passes (enters) through the start winning opening and the start winning is generated, the “left” and “right” accessory entrances 31L and 31R provided in the variable winning device 40 are opened. Based on the numerical data read from the random number circuit 509, the special figure change time, which is the time required for starting the opening / closing operation of the accessory to be changed to the closed state, can be determined. In addition, the number of times of opening and opening time of the accessory opening / closing operation executed in the small hit game state may be determined according to the variation pattern, or may be determined independently of the variation pattern. You may be made to do. Alternatively, the number of times of opening or opening time of an accessory may be determined at a different rate depending on the determination result of the variation pattern, or the variation pattern may be determined at a different rate depending on the determination result of the number of opening of an accessory or opening time. May be.

  The first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B are not limited to those provided as a plurality of starting areas, but, for example, three or more. A plurality of starting areas may be provided. In this case, a start condition for executing a special game using different special symbols may be established based on the detection of a start winning game ball in each start area. The random number circuit 509 may be provided with a plurality of random value registers such as three or more corresponding to the number of start areas, and a random number latch flag corresponding to each random value register may be provided. Or, for example, a special game using the same special symbol is executed based on the detection of a start winning game ball in a part (at least two) of the starting areas of three or more starting areas. The starting condition for doing so may be satisfied. In addition, even if a start winning of a game ball is detected in any start area among a plurality of start areas, a special game using a common (or one set) special symbol is executed. The start condition may be satisfied. In this case, the start condition for starting the special game may be established in the same order as the order in which the start winnings of the game balls are detected in the plurality of start areas. Alternatively, a priority is given to a plurality of start areas, and a start condition for starting a special game based on detection of a start winning game ball in a start area having a high priority is set as a start area having a low priority. The starting condition based on the detection of the start winning of the game ball may be established with priority.

  In the process of step S119 shown in FIG. 49, instead of determining whether or not the power-off signal is in the on state, it may be determined whether or not the watchdog timer has timed out. For example, a predetermined oscillation signal such as the internal system clock SCLK is supplied to the input terminal of the watchdog timer, and the signal change is counted up. When the value counted by the watchdog timer reaches a predetermined value (time-out value), a time-out signal is output. The time-out signal is logically inverted by a predetermined inversion circuit and then input to the AND circuit as a return signal. The AND circuit takes a logical product of the reset signal and the return signal and supplies the logical product to the reset terminal of the CPU 505. The time-out value in the watchdog timer may be set to, for example, a time when the power supply voltage VSL is lower than the voltage value that can generate the power supply voltage VCC after the power-off signal is turned on. Since the watchdog timer operates using the power supply voltage VCC as a drive voltage, the timeout value is set to be equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the operable period of the watchdog timer. Therefore, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, if the power supply voltage decreases as it is and the supply is stopped, the watchdog timer The circuit parts of this will not work. When the CPU 505 is executing game control, a timer clear signal may be periodically supplied to the watchdog timer to clear the count value (for example, set to an initial value “0”). The output period of the timer clear signal is set to be shorter than the time required until the watchdog timer times out. Therefore, when the CPU 505 is executing normal game control, a time-out signal is not output from the watchdog timer.

  In this case, during the period in which the process of step S119 is repeatedly executed, the watchdog timer is not supplied to the watchdog timer, and if the power supply voltage VCC is a normal voltage value even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the watchdog timer Timeout occurs at. At this time, based on the return signal supplied to the CPU 505, the processing may be started (restarted) from the beginning of the game control processing program. Even in this case, for example, in the process of step S56 shown in FIG. 46, numerical data can be read from the random value register R1D (559A) and the random value register R2D (559B), and each random number latch flag is set to an off state. be able to. Alternatively, when it is determined in the process of step S119 shown in FIG. 49 that a time-out has occurred in the watchdog timer, it is determined that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered from an instantaneous interruption of the power supply voltage, and after step S120 What is necessary is just to make it process. Even in this case, in the processing from step S120 to step S123 shown in FIG. 49, numerical data can be read from the random value register R1D (559A) and the random value register R2D (559B), and each random number latch flag is turned off. Can be set. Thus, for example, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D (559A) or the random value register R2D (559B) erroneously in a state where the power supply voltage is unstable, such as when an instantaneous interruption occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1, Can be prevented from being acquired.

  The extension time set in step S4 of FIG. 44 may be determined as one of a plurality of extension times for each system reset, for example, by setting in a user program stored in the ROM 506. In this case, the extension time set in step S4 is defined to be longer than the longest variable setting time that can be set in step S8. Then, after a rough extension time is determined in step S4, a detailed extension time may be determined in step S8. As a result, the security time for entering the security mode when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on or when the system is reset can be greatly changed every time the system is reset. It becomes more difficult to specify the start timing and the numerical data to be updated.

  Further, the extended time added to the fixed time may be determined using an ID number given to each chip constituting the game control microcomputer 100. As an example, an extension time corresponding to the calculated value is executed by executing a part or all of an operation for performing a predetermined scramble process on the ID number and an operation such as addition / subtraction / multiplication / division using the ID number. May be set. In this case, the extension time may be randomly determined for each system reset, for example, by changing an arithmetic expression used for determining the extension time for each system reset. Furthermore, the count value of the free run counter, the ID number, and the like, for example, the arithmetic expression for determining the extension time using the ID number is determined corresponding to the count value of the free run counter stored at the time of system reset. The extended time may be determined randomly at each system reset by using a combination of the above. In addition, when changing the start value of the random number generated by the random number circuit 509 at each system reset, the start value of the random number can be changed by using a combination of the count value of the free-run counter and the ID number. You may decide.

  The clock signal supplied to the CPU 505 of the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the clock signal supplied to the random number circuit 509 are generated using an oscillation signal generated by one oscillator included in the common clock generation circuit. You may make it do. In this case, for example, a frequency divider for generating the random number clock RCLK and the control clock CCLK is provided, and the latch clocks RC0, RC1, RC2 are synchronized with the control clock CCLK or the internal system clock SCLK. What is necessary is just to set the frequency division ratio etc. in each frequency divider so that it may become difficult to produce. The control clock generation circuit 111 and the random number clock generation circuit 112 may be provided in whole or in part inside the game control microcomputer 100 or outside the game control microcomputer 100. May be.

  The oscillation signal that becomes the random number update clock RGK or the latch clock RC0 may be generated outside the random number circuit 509 such as the random number clock generation circuit 112, for example. Alternatively, a circuit for generating the random number update clock RGK and a circuit for generating the latch clock RC0 may be separately provided in the random number circuit 509. As an example, while generating a random number update clock RGK by a flip-flop similar to the clock flip-flop 552, an inversion circuit for inverting the signal state of the random number update clock RGK is provided, and a signal output from the inversion circuit is latched. It may be used as the clock RC0.

  When restricting external reading of the ROM 506 or the like, for example, the connection terminal for externally reading out the data stored in the ROM 506 in the game control microcomputer 100 cannot be connected to the external device in the provider of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be sealed.

  In the above embodiment, “first big hit” and “second big hit” are provided as the big hit types when the special figure display result is “big hit”, and the special figure display result is “small hit” In the above description, “first small hit” and “second small hit” are provided as the small hit types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one of “first big hit” and “second big hit” may be provided as the big hit type, and “first big hit” as the small hit type. Only one of “second small hits” may be provided.

  As an example, when the special figure display result is “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state in which the same round as the case of “first big hit” in the above embodiment is executed, and the special figure display result Is controlled to a small hit game state in which the same opening / closing operation of the accessory as in the case of the “first small hit” in the above embodiment is performed. You may make it control to the big hit game state in which the same round as the case where a figure display result turns into "big hit" is performed.

  As another example, when the special figure display result is “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state in which the same round as the case of “second big hit” in the above embodiment is executed. When the display result is “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state in which the same accessory opening / closing operation as in the case of “second small hit” in the above embodiment is executed, and a V prize is generated. In some cases, the game may be controlled to a jackpot gaming state in which a round similar to that in the case where the special figure display result is “big jackpot”. In this example, in the big hit gaming state, the round in which the big winning opening 60 is opened by the big winning opening door 61 is not executed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 controlled in such a small hit game state or a big hit game state, the configuration of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 may not be provided.

  Further, in the big hit gaming state based on the occurrence of the V prize, a round is executed in which the “left” and “right” accessory entrances 31L and 31R provided in the variable winning device 40 are opened, The game is not limited to a round in which the grand prize opening 60 is opened by the prize opening door 61, and a predetermined number (for example, 2000) of game balls may be paid out as prize balls.

  In the above embodiment, the special figure display result is selected by selecting the special figure display result determination table 130 as shown in FIG. 34 in step S227 of FIG. 55 and determining the special figure display result in step S228. It has been described that it is determined as one of “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the special figure display result may be determined as “big hit” or “small hit”. In this case, when it is determined in step S229 in FIG. 55 that the special figure display result is not “big hit”, the special figure display result is judged to be “small hit”, and the process of step S232 is executed. Instead, the processes of steps S233 and S234 may be executed.

  In the above embodiment, as the variation pattern setting process of step S141 shown in FIG. 50, the process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 56 is executed regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. Explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied, a process different from each other is executed, and the variation pattern type is selected from a plurality of types. It is also possible to determine whether or not one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. In this case, the process for determining the variation pattern type and the process for determining the variation pattern are varied depending on which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, while the variation pattern type The numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determination and the numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern are common numerical data regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. May be used.

  Further, as a variation pattern type determination table such as a big hit variation pattern type determination table, a small hit variation pattern type determination table, or a loss variation pattern type determination table, depending on whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, You may prepare beforehand what made the allocation of the decision value with respect to each variation pattern type differ. Then, in the variation pattern setting process executed in response to the establishment of the first start condition, a variation pattern type determination table corresponding to the establishment of the first start condition is selected as a use table, and a random value for determining the variation pattern type Based on MR3, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types. On the other hand, in the variation pattern setting process executed in response to the establishment of the second start condition, a variation pattern type determination table that is different from the case where the first start condition is established according to the establishment of the second start condition. It may be selected as a usage table and the variation pattern type may be determined as one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type common to the case where the first start condition is satisfied.

  In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that it can be controlled to the short-time state after the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit”. In the short-time state, it has been described that the control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility of the game ball entering the second start winning opening and making the second start condition easier to be satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the probability variation control is continuously performed after the end of the big hit gaming state to improve the probability that the variable display result is determined to be the “big hit”, and the second start prize opening A high-accuracy high-base state in which high-opening control is performed to increase the possibility of a game ball entering, and a high-accuracy low-base state in which probability variation control is performed but high-opening control is not performed may be included. Also, in the short-time state, a low-accuracy base state in which the special figure fluctuation time is shortened and high-opening control is performed, and a low-accuracy low-base state in which the special figure fluctuation time is shortened but high-opening control is not performed. May be included. As an example, depending on whether the jackpot type is “first jackpot” or “second jackpot”, control is made to either the high-accuracy high-base state or the high-accuracy-low base state after the big-hit gaming state ends. You may be made to do. As another example, depending on whether the big hit type is “first big hit” or “second big hit”, either the high-precision high base state or the high-precision low base state after the big hit gaming state ends The controlled ratios may be different from each other.

  In the above embodiment, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are provided in the display area of the image display device 5, and the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are provided. In the above description, it is assumed that one decorative symbol is stopped and displayed so that the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed on one predetermined effective line. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, three locations of “upper”, “middle”, and “lower” are provided. It is also possible that the decorative symbols can be stopped and displayed, and the finalized decorative symbols that will be the final stopped symbols are stopped and displayed on five or eight active lines.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the various display operations including the display operation of the display image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing the gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  Programs and data for realizing part or all of the configuration and functions of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are not limited to a form distributed and provided to a computer device or the like by a detachable recording medium. Alternatively, it may be distributed in advance by preinstalling in a storage device such as a computer device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Discharge control board 18 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switches 22A, 22B ... Start port switches 23L, 23C, 23R ... accessory count switch 24 ... specific area switch 25 ... discharge port switch 28 ... big prize port count switch 31 ... game start switch 31L, 31R ... accessory entry port 32L, 32R ... blade member 40 ... Variable winning device 41 ... Passing gate 49 ... Specific area 50 ... Normal area 3 ... Open solenoid 54 ... Solenoid for a prize winning door 55 ... Solenoid for an ordinary electric accessory 60 ... A prize winning opening 61 ... A prize winning entrance door 100, 810 ... A microcomputer 501 for game control ... External bus interface 501A ... Internal resource access Control circuit 502 ... Clock circuit 503 ... Unique information storage circuit 504 ... Reset / interrupt controller 505 ... CPU
506 ... ROM
507 ... RAM
508 ... CTC
509 ... random number circuit 510 ... PIP
511 ... Serial communication circuit 512 ... Address decoding circuit 551 ... Frequency monitoring circuit 552 ... Clock flip-flop 553 ... Random number generation circuit 554 ... Start value setting circuit 554A ... Free-run counter 555 ... Random number sequence change circuit 556 ... Random number sequence change setting circuit 557A, 557B ... Flip-flops for latch 558A, 558B ... Random number latch selectors 559A, 559B ... Random value register

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
A variable winning device that changes between a first state in which game media can be won and a second state in which game media cannot be won;
A gaming control microcomputer having a built-in control CPU for executing gaming control in the gaming machine based on the content stored in the nonvolatile memory after a predetermined period of time;
A random number circuit that is built in or externally attached to the game control microcomputer and generates numerical data to be random values;
The random number circuit includes:
Numeric value updating means for updating and outputting numerical data according to a predetermined procedure;
Random number storage means for capturing and storing the numerical data output from the numerical value updating means as the random number value,
The game control microcomputer is:
Control determination means for making a predetermined determination by the control CPU using a random number value generated by the random number circuit;
While the numerical data output from the numerical value updating means based on the input of a predetermined signal is stored in the random value storage means, the random number value is set to a first value to limit the storage of new numerical data, while the random value Predetermined data that is set to a second value and allows new numerical data to be stored when the numerical data stored in the storage means is read by the control CPU at the read timing of the random number value;
Security check means for executing a security check for checking whether or not the storage content of the nonvolatile memory has been changed in the predetermined period;
Start period setting means capable of variably setting the predetermined period;
Including a value giving means for giving a predetermined game value based on the fact that the game medium has won the variable winning device.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images